Home

Operating Manual (GT Works Version5/GT Designer

1. PLC read screen see Sec 6 2 1 6 18 6 OPERATING THE VARIOUS LADDER MONITOR SCREENS MELSEC GOT 6 3 Ladder monitor The ladder monitor screen display and the keys that are shown at the top of the Screen are explained in this section 6 3 1 Ladder monitor screen display and key functions The ladder monitor screen varies depending on the type of PLC CPU to be monitored POINT After executing PLC read if the PLC CPU comment or comment capacity is changed the comment may not be correctly displayed on the ladder monitor screen When changing the comment or comment capacity re start the GOT 1 When MELSEC A FX ladder monitor is executed a Display e 4 STEP 12345 18374 When comment is not displayed maximum 8 lines 1 d When comment is displayed maximum 3 lines display foe ON OFF status display for ladder monitor T fron ON status oar K25 AS gt e e OFF status JH HE lt gt hr TO 7 ea 25 3 ira s 11 1 E E E The MCR command is normally displayed as AF Print Cancel Screen Print Sequence program is displayed A maximum of 11 contact points is displayed in one line of a ladder for 12 co
2. END E Ede muUa Ba Els Elo Ed7 Ele EEs Hio Bes d ox Bliss 5 ox LE or Lill ox Lil ox Ld ok Ld ox Ld ox Ela Edi Ris Elis Elis Edi Elo Elis FR is ER eo d OK dij OK dd OK Lda OK dB OK dB OK dd OK Li OK dij OK gd OK SR 21 ER 22 H 23 EE 24 E 25 Enzo SR 27 EE 28 EE 29 EF 30 09 OK dij OK Lda OK dd OK d ok gl OK dd OK Lda OK Ldi OK gd OK Els mao Elss EH Ellos Eco EEG Els EE 3 EHao d ox BERR LI ox Lb ox LB ox LE ox Lib ox LE ok LiB ox LE ok Ela Ela Eas Haa SBR Ela Ea 48 E549 ENso dd OK di OK dd OK ddl OK dd ok di OK dd OK RB B OK gd OK SR si Bese SRes Eds Els Els Els E ss E s9 EF 60 09 OK dij OK dd OK dl OK d ok gl OK dd OK Lda OK gd OK gd OK Els Els Ele lea id ox LB ok Lll ox Bere 1 10 1 OVERVIEW MELSEC GOT 1 1 6 Features of the List editor function 1 11 Installation of the List editor function OS into the memory with the GT Designer allows for list edit of the sequence program in the ACPU The following shows features of the List editor function 1 Easy parameters and sequence program maintenance Simple key operations allow checks partial modifications changes and additions of the parameters and the sequence program in the PLC CPU Without peripheral equipment other
3. The printout method varies with the used GOT as described below 1 When A985GOT or A97 GOT is used To start printout touch the Print Screen Cancel Print key displayed on the motion monitor screen 2 When A95 GOT or A956WGOT is used To start printout set the hardcopy function start stop triggering device using GT Designer and turn that set device on off POINT Before printing out the motion monitor screen always install the option driver into the GOT Set the output destination PC card printer of the hardcopy in the hardcopy setting of GT Designer Refer to Help of GT Designer for details of the hardcopy setting 23 16 23 16 24 ERROR DISPLAY AND HANDLING WITH MOTION MONITORING MELSEC GOT CHAPTER 24 ERROR DISPLAY AND HANDLING WITH MOTION MONITORING 24 1 This section gives the errors that may be displayed during motion monitoring operation and their corrective actions Error message Error Definition Corrective Action No PLC Communications Communication with the monitor destination PLC CPU cannot be made e Check the connection status of the PLC CPU and GOT for unplugged connector open cable e Check the PLC CPU for error occurrence This PLC type is not supported The CPU selected on the system configuration screen is other than the Q172CPU or Q173CPU Choose the Q
4. Buffer memory batch Clearing of all programs Clearing of all device memories Set the PLC No of other stations for access on the MELSECNET II B or MELSECNET 10 gt PC No GO Network No Station No PLC No setting Select the main sub Main sub program switching program displayed on the list edit screen Operate the run stop Remote run stop status of the ACPU from the GOT Address GO hexadecimal Specify the memory address absolute Read write of machine address of the ACPU il Address r gt Machine language Read ihe memory eia s fi xadecina Go eer and write the machine Y language to the memory F 20 16 20 16 21 ERROR DISPLAY AND CORRECTIVE ACTIONS FOR LIST EDIT MELSEC GOT CHAPTER21 ERROR DISPLAY AND CORRECTIVE ACTIONS FOR LIST EDIT 21 1 Error detected with the list editor funct
5. 12 13 12 13 12 13 12 OPERATION OF EACH SPECIAL MODULE MONITOR SCREEN MELSEC GOT 12 7 A62LS Module Monitor Screen Image CH No 0 3 SET RESET Data Chg MONIT MENU END AB2LS Operation Monitor Screen I HDT Error Start SLS 0 P Enable Up Lim Err Lo Lim Err Stop wd Jag Starti grey Jog Start Sensor BIN Pos 012345 Scaling BIN Pos 012345 sensor Er Corre Posit Error Err Err Code 01 3 LS Output FEDCBRS876543210 0110110110110110 Target Stop Pos 012345 Ls Setting 0110110110110110 Prg No o Arback 0 Op Mode 43210 0110110110110110 MAX DN CH 0 OFF 01 MAX DN DH 01 1 OFF MAX ON CH a1 2 OFF MAX ON CH 3 OFF 012345 012345 012345 012345 012345 012345 012345 012345 012345 0123451 012345 0 1012845 1 12345 2 1012345 3 12345 4 1012345 5 0012345 amp 012345 7 012345 8 112345 3 012345 012395 012345 012395 012345 012345 012345 012345 012395 012345 012345 012845 1012345 1012345 012345 1012345 1012345 012945 1012345 1012345 WOITN RON So 012345 012345 012345 012345 012345 012345 012345 012345 012345 012345 012345 012345 012345 012345 012345 012345 012345 012345 012345 012345 012345 A62LS Input Output Monitor Scr
6. 48 to 49 0030 to 0031 18 to 19 0012 to 0013 50 to 51 0032 to 0033 20 to 21 0014 to 0015 08 40 0008 0028 las oone onas 12 53 12 53 12 OPERATION OF EACH SPECIAL MODULE MONITOR SCREEN MELSEC GOT 12 31 QD75P QD75D Module Monitor Buffer memory address O dec hex 800 to 801 0320 to 0321 ERE TER EAST S 1 900 to 901 0384 to 0385 01234567630 0128456783 Positioning comp 1000 to 1001 03E8 to 03E9 01234567890 0123456783 1100 to 1101 044C to 044D BEN 01232567620 0123456189 Positioning comp 01234567890 012 Positioning comp TOIT TT 812 to 813 032C to 032D Screen Image N 912 to 913 0390 to 0391 1012 to 1013 03F4 to OSF5 8 dx u 1112 to 1113 0458 to 0459 ERE 5 D E io 809 909 0329 038D BE oor EE 1009 1109 0
7. MELSEC GOT 2 Data can be changed by test operation see Section 9 6 for details Test sample When MO is on When changing DO present value NETWK No 0 STATION FF DEC NETWK No 0 STATION FF DEC DEVICE M 0 RST 0 SET 1 1 DEVICE D 0 VL K 2147483648 7 8 9 A B 4 7 8 9 A B lt 4 5 6 Cc D 4 5 6 C D 1 2 3 E IF T A 1 2 3 E IF T A l AC DEL E i AC DEL E 1 Test for bit device Device specified by user is turned on or off 2 Test for word device Writes designated value into device specified by user 3 Test for timer counter Writes in designated value as current value or set values of device specified by user 4 Test for buffer memory Writes designated value into buffer memory specified by user 3 Display format can be changed and device comments can be displayed see Section 9 1 2 for details Sample display For entry monitor For batch monitor comment display hexadecimal display DEVICE MONITOR TEST MENU FORM SET BATCHMONITOR TEST MENU FORM SET NETWKNo 0 STATION FF NETWK No 0 STATION FF D 200 30 D 10 H 7FFF D 18 H FEOC Line 1 current units D 11 H 0000 D 19 H 0CA2 W 200 43 D 12 H 0000 D 20 H 0000 Production line A D 139 H FFFF D 21 H 0000 R 50 68378428 DW D 14 H 0000 D
8. MELSECNET 2 B4Sta LocSta MELSECNET 10 OSta RmtSta NETWK No 1 Rmt VO Net 2 Network information can be obtained from the own station monitor screen Dedicated monitor screens are available for each category of station classification depending on the role that is played by the own station Network category MELSECNET B MELSECNET Il master station MELSECNET B MELSECNET Il local station MELSECNET 10 control station ordinary station MELSECNET 10 remote master station Sample display MELSECNET B MELSECNET II master station A Petail Info TsSt Info This Station sit 0 This Station s Master D Link Info Total of L Sta 3 1 OVERVIEW 1 10 MELSEC GOT 3 The status of other stations can be monitored on the other station monitor screen The other station monitor screen provides the following type of information on the status of other stations connected on a network e Communications status of each station e Data link status of each station e Parameters status of each station e CPU action status of each station e CPU RUN status of each station e Loop status of each station Sample display Other station monitor menu screen Fl Com Status D Link CPU RUN S Loop a P MTR T CPU OP Other station s communications status monitor screen
9. STEP 63 932 TEE 54 opos M120 Hh BL am M669 M115 Ex ceno mon esc ust 4 3 EJ 2 3 Fw Cancel Screen Print ED EE A search for another defect is repeated After searching for Coil M120 that is in the OFF state M669 is displayed as a device that is not conductive Example Meg After searching for a device that is in the ON state a device that is conductive is displayed The entire field of the device name and number is highlighted on screen Example WAJ After searching for Coil M669 that is in the OFF state M111 is displayed as a device that is not conductive Example Mit 6 OPERATING THE VARIOUS LADDER MONITOR SCREENS MELSEC GOT 2 When two occurrences of the search device are found If there are two or more devices that caused a failure the the defect search is interrupted message appears and the defect search is terminated Example After searching for Device M120 that is in the OFF state M669 and X0025 will be displayed as devices that caused a failure se en After searching for Coil M120 that is in the OFF state M669 and i 1 X0025 are displayed as devices that are not conductive Example Moo Moog After searching for a device that is in the ON state devices that are conductive are displayed The entire field of the device name and 5 C GJ E E S number is highlighted o
10. 12 74 12 74 12 OPERATION OF EACH SPECIAL MODULE MONITOR SCREEN MELSEC GOT Do meme e mates Screen Image No 30313 30413 07669 076CD ERES 30314 30414 0766A 076CE 30315 30415 0766B 076CF 30116 30216 30316 30416 0766C 076D0 075A0 07604 30112 30212 30312 30412 07668 076CC 30317 30417 0766D 076D1 30319 30419 0766F 076D3 QD75M Servo regulation parameter Parti 4 2000 rads Bx is EE Axis EE 0 8000 rad s x is JE Ax isa 0123 Position loop gaing 1 1000 rad s Axis Axisd Position loop gaint fix isi Load inertia 10 fix isi axis EE n 1 s PEE xis pEEE Speed integral compensation 1000 ms o 0 xisa RNE 0 100 Ax isa Axisdl E brake sequence 1 Axis Ax is2 In position range luum citar seed aro comen sae al rogos pusia Droop pulses Puli LISTE His otteet cht Axis Bla is os iss E ax iss n che Axis i ax isa e iss Eois 3s5838 532 38 Balke EEE DBBBESSBEDSES h EE haga SERRE A OM AFTER i i f i wid filter Axcis 1 ax iss I a isa Witch depth Axis 1l cis I nci 53 Axis4 Eaa 30320 30420 07670 076D4 P o 3 30321 30421 07671 076D5 10 30118 30218 075A6 0760A 30318 30418 0766E 076D2 30122 30222 30322 30422 075AA 0760E 11 07672 076D6 075AB 0760F 30123 30223 QD75M Servo regul
11. 12 50 12 50 12 OPERATION OF EACH SPECIAL MODULE MONITOR SCREEN MELSEC GOT 12 28 Q64AD Q68ADV Q68ADI Module Monitor Buffer memory address Screen Image No das ER Wl 0 1 Q64AD Operation Monitor 000A 3 9 0009 a y s wo ee EA IE 2021 00140085 01234 01234 01234 01234 20 21 0014 0015 o1234 01234 01234 01234 0013 01234 01234 01234 7 0001 to 0008 1110 18 0008 to 0012 30 32 34 001E 0020 0022 36 38 40 0024 0026 0028 42 44 002A 002C 31 33 35 001F 0021 0023 37 39 41 0025 0027 0029 002B 002D Dutput mn Dutput onn 12 51 12 51 12 OPERATION OF EACH SPECIAL MODULE MONITOR SCREEN MELSEC GOT 12 29 Q62DA Q64DA Module Monitor Buffer memory address Screen Image No hex ETE as ERR QR 4DA Operation Monitor al 2 0014 ei cerron code MORNE 0001 to 0004 111014 000B to 000E 19 os 11 to 14 000B t
12. 9 1 TG Monitor ice tete ect 9 13 Screen cleanup sss 4 15 Screen amp OS copy sss 4 5 Screen save light sss 4 8 Screen saver function sese ee eee eee 4 9 Screen saver Human sensor 4 11 Screen save time eee eee eee eee 4 8 Servo amplifier monitor function 25 1 Security password sese eee eee eee eee 4 18 Send Message Delay 4 9 Send Message Time sese eee eee 4 10 Send Message Wa see eee eee 4 10 SOMOS E EE E 4 14 Te 4 7 Servo Monitor SFC Error History 23 5 Special module monitor function 1 7 Specifications Ladder monitor function 3 1 Network monitor function 3 9 Index 2 Special module monitor function 3 4 System monitor function 3 2 List editor function sssse 3 11 Servo amplifier monitor function 3 21 Specifying the monitor station and device 9 4 Subnet Mask ssssseeeeeeees 4 10 Startup tine eec teet deans 4 9 10 Switching the display form 9 2 System monitor function 1 5 T TG Monti 9 12 Test for special function module 12 8 Test function sese eee eee eee 9 16 U Utility fun
13. Allows you to perform visual inspection for deformation in font size e Memcard Check nn Allows you to make a check on the hardware of a memory card After checking a memory card are initialized e Userrom Check mmn Allows you to check for user space in the internal memory The password must be entered to check the user area of the built in memory The GOT The password is 1111 fixed The entered password is displayed as on the screen After checking user space is cleared to delete any data contained in the user space performs these checks e OS Area Check nnnm Allows you to check for OS space in the internal memory e Comm Check Allows you to check for GOT to PLC CPU communications e Touchsw Check nnn Allows you to check for touch keys 3 Procedure a Basic operation e Select the desired button to perform a diagnostic check e Select options as instructed on screen e You will see a message indicating that the selected diagnostic check was successfully completed e If an error is detected you will see a message indicating the occurrence of the error e The Image Check allows you to view the following elements 1 The entire screen is displayed in one color Display colors are changed in the order of red green blue 2 Basic figures are displayed including circles and squares 3 Ellipses and checkered patterns are tiled or cascaded on screen 4 OPERATING THE UTILITY FUNCTION 4 7 D
14. DI DO display ML E L L L L S lL L L L operation 686 Servo A985 Motor less op M A DRU E 688 Servo A985 DO Forced Out S A 24 bo forces ror R Serv A985 DO Forcedout soe zm P 690 Servo A985 DO Forced Out M A FU 4e 691 Servo A985 DO Forced Out MA DO 2540 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC GOT 2 When A97 GOT A960GOT is used Function Details Stored Screen Data For MR J2S For MR J2S For MR J2M For MR J2M IA monitor CP monitor P8A monitor DU monitor Servo amplifier monitor data common information 18416 700 Servo A97 Monitor ALL 4132 713 Servo A97 Alarms ALL 715 Servo A97 Alarms Hist ALL 7 Sewo A97 VODispay S 2346 718 Servo A97 I O Display S CP 19 Sewo A97 VODispay MAlFU 45 720 Servo A97 VO Display m a Do 3 l l 724 Servo A97 Function Dev S CP PE A er ndevice es Servo A97 Function Dev M AIEU 49 726 Servo A97 Function Dev m a DRU 498 Diagnostic 728 Servo AQ7 Ampint S A 212 function Amplifier 729 Servo A97 Amp inf S CP as A ee cess information display 730 Servo A97 Amp inf M A IFU DI DO display ro See
15. 61 62 003D 003E 65 66 0041 0042 003F 0040 1 Zero Rtn Reques6 Pos Address P2 01234567890 Upper Limit 01234567890 ero Rtn Start ower Limit 01234557890 Zero Rtn Comple7 Pos velocity V1 012345 PL amp Bear Ratio 0123 0123 Stop 8 Pos velocity V2 012345 PLS elocity Limit 012345 PLS s In position 9 Pos Pattern 0 ccel Time 0123 ms Uf sp Switchover v P Mode 0 ecel Time 0123 ms 0 Positioning M WOT Error 10 1 Velocity IIn Positian Range 0123 Excessive Error Errar Detection Error Code 1 018 2 012 Positioning Mode 0 23 i SET Data MONIT AD7O Zero Return Data Monitor Screen RESET Chg Meny END T vit Ab Posit Start2 Feed Position 01234567850 Present Value 01234567890 106 107 006A 006B BEN Forward Start Reverse Start 3 Actual Position 01234567890 Travel Dist 01234567890 D cud Jog start 61 62 003D 003E Rev Jog Start 4 Error Counter 01234567880 Velocity 012345 PLS s Vel Pos Restart 41 42 SJ Posit Complete5 Pos Address P1 01234567890 Jog Velocity 012345 PLS s 00 00 1 Zero Rtn Reques6 Pos Address P2 01234567890 Iravel Dist After Near zero Wero Rtn Start Point Signal Turned ON zero Rtn Comple7 Pos velocity V1 012345 PLS s 01234567890 Stop 8 Pos Velocity V2
16. sees 3 22 3 7 4 System configuration for servo amplifier connection sese 3 22 3 7 5 Monitor screen types and memory capacities necessary to use the servo amplifier monitor functions 3 23 4 OPERATING THE UTILITY FUNCTION 4 1104 21 4 1 Utility function table secina naia aa aa ena cde en eee dne e ben cd de dena 4 1 4 2 Selecting the utility FUNCTION eee eree ereer eee eee 4 2 4 3 Selecting the required function on the utility menu screen Adjusting the brightness contrast of the monitor screen 4 3 4 4 Copying the monitor data OS data between the internal memory and memory card Screen amp OS copy sese eee eee eee 4 5 4 5 Setting the operating environment of the GOT Setup sse 4 7 4 6 Running diagnostic checks on GOT hardware self test sss 4 14 4 7 Displaying GOT memory information memory information esses 4 15 4 8 Setting the Clock Clock cccceccecesseseeceeeeseeseceeceeeeaeeaecaeseeeeaesaecaeeeaeeaesaecaeesaeeaeeaeseseaesaesaseastaesaeeeeseaeeas 4 16 4 9 Displaying the display area cleanup screen screen cleanup esses 4 17 4 10 Changing security levels security password sss nnns 4 18 4 11 Controlling limited access to the utility menu password sees 4 19 4 12 Adjusting the brightness of the monitor screen on the dedicated s
17. 25 TFU Station don No of communicated TFU is selected NR J2H POA Axis Number The axis which becomes a communicated object is selected MR J2H P88 Capacity The capacity of the servo amplifier is selected NR HA MR HS MR HRC NR HTN Fix The function selection menu screen appears MP JeS h 600 bps Servo arp Monitor Lost End setup Faraneters Monitor Test Alarm Diagnostics Select the servo amplifier monitor function to be used Setup Section 26 3 Selects the model to be monitored baudrate and station number presence absence Monitor Section 26 4 Displays the monitor data of the servo amplifier in real time Alarm Section 26 5 Displays resets the alarm currently occurring Diagnostics Section 26 6 Runs various diagnostics on the monitored servo amplifier servo motor ON OFF states of external I O signals and I O function devices Indications of the servo amplifier software number servo motor model ID and encoder resolution Listing of the absolute position data and unit composition Parameters Section 26 7 Displays the parameter data list and changes the parameter setting Test Section 26 8 Performs various test operations JOG operation positioning operation motorless operation DO forced output 25 2 25 2 26 OPERATIO
18. AD71 M Code Comment Monitor Screen SETS RESET Data MONIT Che meno END MM Prosit Start Zero Request Zero Start jJ stop Started F N Code ON Batt ErrX Hi Error Wii Interpolation Posit Compl Zero Complete Fwd Jog Start Rev Jog Start HOT Err Man Pulse E 3 X Axis M Code 012 ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOF ABCDEFGHIIKLMNOP ABCDEFGHIIKLMNOP ABCDEFGHIIKLMNOP t ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP ABCDEFGHIIKLMNOP ABCOEFGHIJKLMNOP ABCOEF G4 JKLMNOP i ABCDEFGHIIKLMNOP ABCDEFGHIIKLMNOP ABCDEFGHIIKLMNOP ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP ABCDEFGHIIKLMNOP 1 ABCOEFGHIJKLMNOP BBCDEFBHIJKLMNUP ABLDEFGHIIKLMNOP ABCOEFGHIJKLMNOP ABCOEFGHIJKLMNOP y Axis M EEE 012 ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP X Axis executing Data No Pointer Error Code status Y Tw Executing Data Na Pointer Error Code Status MELSEC GOT Buffer memory address 12 34 12 34 12 OPERATION OF EACH SPECIAL MODULE MONITOR SCREEN MELSEC GOT MORS ANC dec nex dec hex
19. MEA LEA ML d oooooooo annel annel annel annel annel annel annel annel annel annel annel annel annel annel annel mnmmodcmciuoc 1mumscmeoeso FEDCBR9876543210 B oT Error D A Conversion 0110110110110110 0 Disabled Output Enable 0110110110110110 1 Enabled mn Error 12 25 12 25 12 OPERATION OF EACH SPECIAL MODULE MONITOR SCREEN 12 18 A616TD Module Monitor Screen Image A616TD Operation Monitor Screen INPUT 0 F Channel No FEOCBA9876543210 Error Code 01 Conversion 0110110110110110 Enable 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Error FEDCBRS98 76543210 CNT No 0110110110110110 Channel Nn FEDCBA9676543210 Data Format 0110110110110110 Sampling Time 01234 ms Input Status For Data Format 0 Refer to left hand side values x Format 1 Refer to right hand side values 01234 01234 01234 01234 01234 01234 01234 01234 01234 01234 01234 01234 01234 01234 01234 01234 01234 01234 01234 01234 01234 01234 01234 01234 01234 01234 01234 01234 01234 01234 01234 01234 SOPRANO mG 09T 0 SOPRANO WB dizital value error M tem values Error BER Discontinuity Error SET Data MONIT CONNECT Wo RESET Chg meno END AG167D Operation Monit
20. 618 Servo A985 I O Display S CP 619 Servo A985 VO Display MAIFU 482 620 Servo A985 VO Display MA Dot 348 Pes 625 Servo A985 Function Dev MAIFU 488 626 Servo A985 Function Dev m a DRU mu Diagnostic 628 Servo a985 Ampinf S a 2u2 function Amplifier 629 Servo A985 Amp inf S CP information display 630 Servo A985 Ampint MAIFUY zo2 631 Servo A985 Amp int M A DRU 224 635 Servo A985 ABS data S A 270 ABS data display 636 Servo A985 ABS data s cP 296 637 Servo A985 ABS data m a DRU 298 st compositn ie 692 Seno ASES Unt Comps MAU 044 display 640 Servo A985 Unit Comp M A DRU _ ae 643 Servo A985 Parameters S 3656 Parameter setting 644 Servo A985 Parameters MA FU az 645 Servo A985 Parameters M A DRU 4462 78 Servo A985 Jog op S 23802 uia 79 Servo A985 Jog op M A DRU Po ewe Positioning 82 Servo A985 Positioning S 3056 e A operation 83 Servo A985 Positioning M A DRU Motor less 85 Servo A985 Motor less op S EE om o 3 o 8 o e o D 2 o gt LO Qo E
21. Buffer a a EET address Screen Image Torque limit 01234567890 0123456 7830 012345567890 01234557890 0123456783 0123456709 0123456783 0123456709 0 to 65535 msec 0 00 not 1 Bo 0123456709 J 0123456709 0123456789 0123456789 01234567590 F 01234567830 E 01234567090 01234567090 0123456709 0123456789 0123456709 0123456789 12 67 MELSEC GOT E 229 00E5 379 529 017B 0211 2 82 232 0052 00E8 017E 0214 382 532 83 233 0053 00E9 017F 0215 383 533 86 236 0056 O0EC 386 536 0182 0218 80 to 81 0050 to 0051 88 238 0058 OOEE 388 538 0184 021A coe ee 389 539 0185 0218 370 520 0172 0208 E 371 521 0173 0209 oo ee 2 378 528 017A 0210 72 to 73 0048 to 0049 372 to 373 0174 to 0175 76 io 77 376 to 377 0178 to 0179 526 to 527 020E to 020F 12 67 12 OPERATION OF EACH SPECIAL MODULE MONITOR SCREEN MELSEC GOT Buffer memory address Screen Image tee ee 0D75H 1 0 si as 1016 1116 03F8 0450 1017 1117 03F9 045D EH D 818 to 819 0332 to 0333 p eon 0396 to 0397 1018 to 1019 O3FA to 03FB In 1118 to 1119 045E to 045F 1 802 to 803 0322 to
22. When comment is not displayed max 8 devices When comment is displayed max 4 devices Display when system monitoring TIO meer rene current value set value T 2 oM 150 SV 150 Contact point coil 9 ON Production line C 1 O4 OFF T 3 PV 0 SV UTE v Production line D Displays the keys that are used with the operation of the TC Monitor screen shown in 2 Touch input Displays the monitor station network No station No and CPU No 1 When connected to QCPU and QnACPU the execution file name is displayed If there are more than one file the first file name is displayed Displays the current value set value contact point and coil status of the monitor device The screen above shows when the monitor module is 16 bits 1 Displayed for QCPU monitor only 2 Key functions The chart below shows the function of the keys that are used with the operation of the TC Monitor screen Function Move to basic screen function change menu screen for changing to another monitor function or ending the system monitor See Sec 9 1 1 Move to display change menu screen for changing the numerical display on the TC monitor screen decimal hexadecimal or changing the comment display on off See Sec 9 1 2 Move to device setting menu screen to change the monitor device or execute a test e Change of monitor device See Sec 9 1 3 Test See Sec 9 6 Scroll the display c
23. y Mode is displayed other mode 0 ERR STEP 25 It Error step number is displayed SP UNIT DOWN step number of D9010 i E S S z S i Error message is displayed Error code is displayed error code of D9008 Error detail code is displayed error code of D9091 Error history if available is displayed Example of next display for the display of 4 above error history is available Mode is displayed other mode Error history number is displayed history control No of ACPU Error step number is displayed Error message is displayed Error code is displayed Error detail code is displayed Second minute hour date month and year of the error are displayed Displayed if other error history is available When an error message of the PLC CPU appears refer to the ACPU programming manual Common Command and the user s manual for each CPU for corrective actions 21 4 21 4 21 ERROR DISPLAY AND CORRECTIVE ACTIONS FOR LIST EDIT MELSEC GOT 21 3 Error using list editor function on the link system When the list editor function is used on the link system the PLC communication error may appear In this case check the error details and the corrective actions Error No Error message Action Time out error 2 Check the cable wiring No response to the request New process request was given to the list editor function while the CPU is pr
24. gt E A v lt gt EAERI 4 5 Me e la e o ol 1 to 64 Control station 1 to 64 Normal station 6 OPERATING THE VARIOUS LADDER MONITOR SCREENS MELSEC GOT From the previous page A V Select input area Alphanumeric Input network No and station No Touch Input confirmation READ STATE READ SELECTION PARAM READ PROGRAM COMMENT PROG CMNT MAIN PROGRAM 1 SETTING EX CMNT SUB PROGRAM 2 A4U NON SETTING NETWORK NO 0 SUB PROGRAM 3 A4U PLC NO FF c SWITCH TL SEL SET ext Ladder Break Menu t E LA 3 In Read Selection specify the sequence program to be read from the object station Specify whether or not to perform comment read Setting item switch Read program comment Select program Read program Select comment read enabled disabled Comment 4 Input the keyword that is registered to that station If no keyword has been registered nothing has to be entered 5 The contents and capacity of the read procedure are displayed When you touch Break the read procedure is interrupted When reading resumes it stars at the beginning 6 Completed is displayed To the following page 6 OPERATING THE VARIOUS LADDER MONITOR SCREENS ME
25. vio viso los vto Y 100 rep U Ext 2 ISP ky 200 xy 280 x vaso v Specify the module to be monitored Display the special module monitor menu Ut Select from the menu y i Display the monitor screen for the special module Check the data for the module with the displayed contents Change the data y Change the current value of the specified area Er 1 When starting the module format and related data are not displayed When reading of module data from the PLC CPU is complete the module format and related data is displayed When using the QCPU Q mode you can also check the PLC CPU status PC Infomation and module error information etc Unit Dtail info See Sec 12 1 1 When END is selected the special module monitoring ends and the display moves to the original screen where the special module monitor function was begun See Secs 12 1 3 12 1 4 See Sec 12 1 4 The Special Module Monitor Screen is displayed by selecting it from the menu See Sec 12 1 4 See Sec 12 1 2 See Secs 12 2 to 12 27 Carry out the following operation when changing the current values of the buffer memory that is displayed on the monitor screen See Sec 12 1 5 Touch the key where the touch switch expanded function was set with the drawing software an
26. 406 D148 H D150 H M801 H M820 H M815 H TS D142 D144 D146 D148 D150 20 1 17 HEH Oooo Sequence program Max 8 lines 1 line Max 11 contacts displayed When the display screen type is the EL the Print Screen Cancel Print JUMP 1 and JUMP keys are not displayed A985 A97 960GOT exit Paas dere H nenu seco Boris I sev Pl reno 6 OPERATING THE VARIOUS LADDER MONITOR SCREENS MELSEC GOT 3 MELSEC Q ladder monitor Used GOT PLC read screen Ladder monitor screen t nc 1 neworkno o ST rr cru o ve t owe 1 Program Memory m6 Screen HI 4o0 D Ho KO 024 SET M10 M10 Name Tune Size Date Time Title 1 2 i H M10000 Ea M10000 Cancel Base process line H M1 Print 8i Base setup line M1 M20 CARRY PROG Product carry line HEL K0 DIO Xo ko D209 Hz TEST PROG Process test line MONITOR PROG Operation monitor system END MAIN PROG Main TEST COMM 304 2 18 00 Process test line CARRY COMM Product carry line SETUP COMM 00 Base setup line PROCESS COMM 00 Base process line Qn n 985GOT c A Exit JLadderf foreak f f nenu f setvo Bus ud zm Patel D2 D6 D24 D10 D20 0 0 0 0 0 CIRCUIT END Sequence program Max 15 lines 1 line Max 11 contacts displayed PLC 1 NETWORKNO O ST FF CPUNO O RERD SELECTION DRIVE B Program Memory 024 SET M10 Type Size Time Title M1000
27. 829 Servo A95 VO Display m a Do 2808 DI DO display 833 Servo A95 Func Dev S cP as 834 Servo A95 Func Dev Int M A FU 249 835 Servo A95 Func Dev In2 M A FU 266 837 Servo A95 Func Dev Qut2 MAIFU 288 838 Servo A95 Func Dev In1 M A DRU TONNES 9 840 Servo A95 FunoDevOut M ADRU 278 5 841 Servo A95 Func Dev Out2 M A DRU 2836 843 Servo A95 Amp inf S AY 138 844 Servo A95 Ampint s cp wz 845 Servo A95 Amp int M A FU wee 1846 Servo A95 Amp int M A DRU 148 850 Servo A95 ABS data Cur S A 174 851 Servo A95 ABS data Orig S A Leia s doe li ABS data display 852 Sevo e ABSdaaCu SCP 190 ED 853 Servo A95 ABS data Orig s cp 2s 854 Servo A95 ABS data Cur M A DRU 197 855 Servo A95 ABS data Orig M A DRU 244 E ETE H display 858 Servo A95 Unit Comp M A DRU o 861 Servo A95 Parameters S 2860 Parameter setting 862 Servo A95 Parameters M A IFU A e 3064 863 Servo A95 Parameters M A DRU 3300 pron laea SE
28. R68RD Input Output Monitor Screen o0 Write Data Error Disconnected Disconnected Disconnected Disconnected Disconnected Disconnected Disconnected Disconnected Errar Reset o 00 1 1 Enabled 0 Disable 0110110110110110 Sample Ruerage Count Time 36 6765432167654321 0110110110110110 4 5 E 1 Averaging 1 Time Average 0 Sampling 0 Count Average 2 3 4 5 6 E 8 SET Data MONIT AGSRD Graph Monitor Screen RESET Che MENU END 500 r Disabled Enabled 87654321 500 0110110110110110 400 300 c 200 100 moceomomoam 0 B DT Error Merror Code Temp Sensor Type 0 2012945 O Neu JIS DIN 1 01d TIS B cHi disconn B cH disconn B CH3 disconn B CH disconn B cH5 disconn B cHe disconn E CH disconn B cHe disconn 12 21 12 21 12 OPERATION OF EACH SPECIAL MODULE MONITOR SCREEN 12 15 A1S68DAI A1S68DAV Module Monitor Screen Image ALS6BDAY Movement Monitor Screen IM H 87654321 Analog Output 01101101 oO 1 Enabled Disabled Output Status Limit Low Limit OD12345 012345 012345 GOLE 512345 012345 012345 012345 dll ll oo000000 20000000 Up Low Limit A1S68DAY Input Output Monitor Screen MONIT MENU HOT Error Ready Error Detect Enable Enab
29. essent tenentes 12 6 12 1 6 Specifying monitor module and selecting monitor menu sese 12 7 12 1 7 Test for special function module sess tette tette tette trt tnter tenete tenens 12 8 12 1 8 Changing the screen eee enrere 12 10 12 2 ABILS module MOMO osuisi kiini rite AAA CH Ie ee Tei e ad 12 11 12 3 AD6 1 module Monopies deri oed fe neri ele rn 12 11 12 4 ATSD61 module aiea 5 rrt nnn nth nbn nn bun nhe n n nan ENR 12 12 12 5 Aec2DA S1 module frioDllOoE sectas enarrant en rena eer aee enu e eu nen en enean 12 13 12 67 ATS62DA Module MONO ceci 3 20 22 rok e doi an ire IR eats b A i ERR Cs Dai DONA Ra CER ERE ERR RUE MERE RALFA dA 12 13 127 A62ES Module MONON ova ete t ite teo te ec tenete ete eae hades en ad did 12 14 12 8 A1S62RD module monitor sss sese eee ee eee 12 15 12 9 A1S63DA module monitor a asa3 a 2453A 4 aa 24347492 2343 A23 A deaa nnne nennt innen 234 a 12 16 12 10 A1S64DA module motrice iactata rna nh ta nhu ek fn nh a nhi ba tate n 12 17 12 11 A68AD module Montor aae a aai aap e a aai aaa a a aaa aaa aa nnne nnne nnne aaa innt stern aata nnns 12 18 12 12 A1S68AD module monitor sss sese sese eee eee 12 19 12 13 AGBADN Module monitor 2 2 aa Lond eee ea Hl D EET Fa doa da fe Rb sena ex 12 20 12 14 Ae8RD module eins TT 12 21 12 15 A1S68DAI A1S68DAV module monitor eee ee eee 12 22 12 46 A616AD module Monitor s RE rennen meten teet rein teres 12 2
30. OS version number Memory s Status of communications with the PLC CPU Section 4 7 information Available space in the internal memory e Availability of memory cards and available space in a memory card e Availability of the ladder monitor function ET This function can be executed only when the GOT the GT Designer to the GOT Network Ph This function can be executed only when the GOT monitor Monitoring the line status of MELSECNET memory is extended and the OS is installed from Chapter 17 the GT a ses mendis oered GST to the GOT password and objects Dosen Ser lvls canbe amd security levels can be changed This function c can be executed only when the GOT List edit List editing of PLC programs in PLC CPU memory is extended and the OS is installed from Chapter 19 the GT Designer to the GOT Motion controller CPU Q172CPU Q173CPU This function can be executed only when the GOT Motion monitor Changing of servo ione parameter memory is increased and the OS is installed from Chapter 22 setting GT Designer to the GOT Bea Servo amplifier monitor servo parameter setting change test operation Chapter 25 Section 4 4 4 OPERATING THE UTILITY FUNCTION MELSEC GOT 4 2 Selecting the utility function This section describes how to select the utility function The utility function can be activated with a touch of the screen To select the utility function follow either of the following two steps 1 Touch the upper rig
31. The CPU No is displayed as the CPU and the control CPU No as the loaded module Only the CPU is displayed when the A95 GOT A956WGOT is used To choose the motion controller CPU for servo monitor servo parameter setting touch its display position The keys used for performing operation on the system configuration screen shown in 2 are displayed Touch input 2 Key functions The following indicates the functions of the keys used for performing operation on the system configuration screen Function Used to end monitoring and return to the screen where the motion monitor function was started Used to select the motion controller CPU where servo monitor servo parameter setting will be performed Used to change the system configuration screen to the motion Motion Monitor monitor menu screen Refer to Section 23 4 Used to change the system configuration screen to the parameter Parameter Set setting screen Refer to Section 23 5 Used to scroll the display data up down one level to display the currently undisplayed preceding succeeding level of the system v configuration Y Scrolls down one level A Scrolls up one level 23 1 23 1 23 OPERATIONS OF VARIOUS MOTION MONITOR SCREENS 23 2 Changing the screen MELSEC GOT This section describes how to change the screen when executing each monitor function of the motion monito
32. V 7 1171 0493 1221 o4cs 1271 o4F7 O Dec init liData Nn O Completer liReg i O Disable l Enable pten Mode prip Command EXT Start Enable SETZ MONIT RESET MENU d Vs Soe Mae win Axist Axis fAxis3 Ru mU sia sees sia fos 0390 1012 03F4 Target Speed x10 3 degzmin 012345678 012345678 012345678 md 2 Taa osep 913 oset 03F5 x107 5 mm min 10 3 inch min Current Speed 10 3 deg min PLS sec x10 5 mm min axis Speed n EU 012345678 012345678 012345678 PLS sec 12 43 12 43 Screen Image Destination Mechanical Val MONIT MENU Axist Axis2 Axisa x10 1 gum x10 5 inch x10 5 deg IPLS echanical i0 1 um Address D 10 5 inch x10 5 deg PLS Destina 01234567890 01234567890 01234567890 01234567890 01234567890 01234567890 RDTSP external I D External Input Output SETZ Status Info RESET status Info DriveUnitReady Zero Phase Signal In Positio Signal DOG Signal Stop Signal Upper Limit Lower Limit External Start WP Switch i DCC Signal output V Contral NP Switch Latch Cmd In Position OPR Request OPR Completion Axis Warning Speed Change 0 OP ABS Over OP ABS Under Positionin Information SETZ RESET Data chg
33. 2 14es set values contact points and coils subsequent to specified device Monitoring of x points of current BM monitor Values subsequent to specified buffer memory of specified special module Setting resetting of bit device BERE of current value for er memory BERE word device Sa of current value for TIC Section can be used while monitoring 9 6 T C A EAS be used while monitoring Te Changing of device values using Section A EU RN Device comment display comment Device comment display EE E Decimal and hexadecimal display wo of word device values and buffer 9 1 2 memory values Special module Monitoring of buffer memory of monitor function Special module on special screen Network monitor Monitoring of network status of mg 1 lms o n function MELSECNET B Il or 10 Sequence program in the ACPU is E List editor function i edited Ch ox E Monitoring of servo related items Such as current values and positioning errors on various Ch 22 monitor screens Parameter Changing of servo parameter setting values s Servo amplifier monitor servo ac d parameter setting change test Ch 25 operation 1 Subprograms 2 3 of the A4UCPU for computer link connection cannot be monitored 2 Can be monitored only when the A8GT J61BT13 is used in the intelligent device station 8 When the A8GT J61BT15 is used in the remote device station only the link devices assigned to the GOT can be
34. Outputs tv We Tx Complete No 1 ME Tx Complete No 1 299 Rea Tx Complete No Rea Tx Complete No Rea Request Read Request E Tx Complete No 1 Request R Read Request g Tx Complete NG 1794 Request Read Request Tx Complete No Rea Tx Complete No Read Request Harduare Fault Request Link Working Tx Complete No Rea Tx Complete No Rea Request Request Test Mode Tx Complete No Link Errar Rea MT Complete No ROM Error Rea Tx Complete No Read Request Link Comms Request Request Tx Complete No Read Complete NN Tx Request No R 7 Request No Tx Request No Tx Request No A Tx Request No Read Complete Read Complete Tx Request No Tx Request No Read Complete Read Complete Tx Request No N Tx Request No Read Complete Read Complete Tx Request No Read Complete Tx Request No Read Complete Tx Request No RTU Error Clear Read Complete Tx Request No Read Complete Link Comms Start Read Complete FROM TO Response Faulty Sta Clear Switch BM Chann rrar Reset Read Complete Ns Request No RxData Clear be 12 46 12 46 12 OPERATION OF EACH SPECIAL MODULE MONITOR SCREEN MELSEC GOT 12 25 AJ711D1 ID2 R4 A1SJ711D1 ID2 R4 Module Monitor Buffer memory address Screen Image 100 0064 4100 1004 1 s en 41 a 1 d AJT1ID Movement Monitor Screen CH1 Addr Addr 100 116 101 117 102 118 103 119 104 1
35. PTS ss OO NN BHNG O00000 PC DI3 MBR PT4 Su HH LH RES OVR BWNG MEND ci OM OOM STP cro CH2 sT2 TPO zP ec NE Ln c LLLI TP1 POT r1 CCC RS2 When MR J2S LICP is monitored No tem Perscription _ O jj R Indicates the ON I OFF state of each I O signal Function 2 About the key functions The following table indicates the functions of the keys used for the operations of the function device display screen Key Function ooo In 1n Func Changes the indication of the I O signal w E ed only when the A95 GOT A956WGOT is used MA Changes to the DI DO display screen refer to Section 26 6 1 to the DI DO display screen refer to Section 26 6 1 aBsdatal Changes to the ABS data screen refer to Section 26 6 4 asal O Changes to the amplifier information screen refer to Section 26 6 3 Changes to the unit composition list screen refer to Section 26 6 5 Confirms the settings and returns to the function selection menu screen Terminates the servo amplifier monitor functions Scrolls the I O signal items in units of 10 items Displayed only when the A95 GOT A956WGOT is used 26 12 26 12 26 OPERATIONS OF SERVO AMPLIFIER MONITOR SCREENS MELSEC GOT 26 6 3 Amplifier information display screen This section describes the display data of the amplifier information display screen and the key functions displayed on the screen 1 About the display data MR
36. n he pee b c er e dn 23 15 23 5 About Hardcopy QUIDUL 22 tici at ritieni eee PE UD HERR RUE URS ELHDE UD HER ERR EE HERE CERES 23 16 24 ERROR DISPLAY AND HANDLING WITH MOTION MONITORING 24 11024 2 SERVO AMPLIFIER MONITOR FUNCTION 25 OPERATION PROCEDURES FOR SERVO AMPLIFIER MONITOR FUNCTION 25 11025 2 25 1 Operation procedures before starting motion monitoring sene 25 1 25 2 Operation procedures from user created monitor screen display to start of motion monitor 25 2 26 1 Screen Transitiofr a s nie cn Re rivals tet dite anid de aoa Re tat a sra Le Ete 26 1 26 2 About the Servo Amplifier Monitor Functions sss 26 2 A NA 26 3 20 9 Mot NA O 26 3 26 4 Monitor FUNCIONS 23 0 cei cial dildo 26 4 26 4 1 MOnltOrSCrGel ai ood ete eia etae a etaed ate ene ide ei er ata es 26 4 26 5 Alarm EUDCLOPL coii deese ipe dis stele dd eC Edgar ebd ace apa EE P A 26 6 26 541 Alarm diSplay SCIeeri c cL e ERR RE 26 7 26 5 2 Alarm history SCTOeri ir e Ed D E de de ede t Dl dee pte RR DR ads 26 8 26 6 Diagnostics FUNCION oc o ot ce er t tt aaa 26 9 26 61 DUDO display Soren incaico eo 26 11 26 6 2 Function device display Screen e eeeeeeeenen entente nnne tenete tnn nnne nennt tnnt 26 12 26 6 3 Amplifier information display screen sese 26 13 26 6 4 ABS data display screen eei esisse tenen sntn ta tante ta aiaiai tenet sn ss se
37. 15 OPERATING THE NETWORK MONITOR FUNCTION MELSEC GOT CHAPTER15 OPERATING THE NETWORK MONITOR FUNCTION This chapter describes how to operate the network monitor function 15 1 Steps in getting started with the network monitor function The following flowchart outlines how to transmit and install an operating system OS for the network monitor function in the GOT internal memory using the Personal computer For further information on screen displays and key operations see the online help of the GT Designer Y Connect the GOT and the Personal computer Start up the GOT tenes The GOT does not require further setup procedures or operations after the startup Start up the Personal computer and start the GT Designer 15 With the GT Designer transmit the OS for Transmit the data in the installation dialog box the network monitor function from the Personal computer to the GOT and install it in the built in memory After the installation is finished the network After the installation is complete a message indicating monitor is ready to start through the GOT End appears in the installation dialog box Finish operating the GT Designer Proceed to Section 15 2 to operate the network monitor 15 1 15 1 15 15 OPERATING THE NETWORK MONITOR FUNCTION MELSEC GOT 15 2 Steps in starting the network monitor function from the user created monitor screen 15 2 The following flowchart outline
38. END RDT2 R1SD 1 Zero Return Data Monitor Screen X Y Posit Start osit Start Posit Compl Present Value zero Request LI 129456700 nenes 1 a Dn 34 em zero Complete 0123456789 A 0 PG Zero Point T cubile J e oca se 0150 Stop a EC P sto0 Tine out 7 7912 1EE8 7922 1EF2 i i op signa fos Started HT Sup A aein 7913 1EE9 7923 1EF3 M Code DN SN X Axis O12 In position i 01234567 Y Axis 012 Seer Creep Speed i 01234567 zero Dwell Time Ei 7874 1EC2 7894 1ED6 getter MCode Errtde o12 01 j 012 01 s Met ori hof 40 0028 0154 error wini 7914 1EEA 7924 1EF4 7915 1EEB 7925 1EFS 2 13 14 002E 015A cer mes Lans inl ze reso 7s ere 12 36 12 36 12 OPERATION OF EACH SPECIAL MODULE MONITOR SCREEN AD72 A15071 Parameter Data Monitor Screen MELSEC GOT Buffer memory address Data Che MONIT MENU END zero Zero stop BUSY Error Posit Posit Posit Start Start Request Start Zero Complete Fud Jog Start Rev Jog Start Pos Started M Code ON In position i ig Excessive Err i ias HDT Err Han Pulsel Batt Err Hi iHi Compl Backlash Coma poer Limit 10 Xx RBCDDEFF Wir SGAM ME ACUERDA ase sige te te CQ 0110110110110110
39. Move to ladder monitor screen 2 Touch Input confirmation 6 OPERATING THE VARIOUS LADDER MONITOR SCREENS 1 When specifying and reading the step number in the program Touch Y 0Ojto 9 Input step No 41 Move to ladder monitor screen Touch Input confirmation When specifying and reading the final ladder in the program End Sea H gt Move to ladder monitor screen Touch 1 Data being entered can be cleared by the following keys AC Clears all data being entered to the target area DEL Clears one character at the cursor position 2 When specifying and reading a device contact point or coil used in the program the search targets all programs starting from the step number displayed on the previous ladder monitor screen to the program immediately previous to the one displayed After moving to the screen monitor screen continuous reading by the same device is enabled by touching on the screen If you touch any other key but JJ the continuous read function is canceled 6 OPERATING THE VARIOUS LADDER MONITOR SCREENS MELSEC GOT 8 When device search contact point search or coil search is performed during ladder monitoring only the ladder block which includes the read search device is displayed Example 1 When the device name to be searched is entered as X0001 Lad
40. Start The memory board applicable for the PLC CPU at the monitoring destination is installed on the GOT Start up GOT Y Display the user created monitor screen y Start the ladder monitor function 1 1 When not reading the When reading the sequence program from sequence program from the PLC CPU the PLC CPU 5 Display the PLC read screen See Sec 6 2 1 Specify the PLC CPU for the ladder monitor and the program to be read The PC program is read Pit Display the ladder monitor screen When you touch Mo See Sec 6 3 Touch PLCRD Touch Menu Y Read the sequence program that is displayed on the ladder monitor screen 5 the circuit monitor starts gt 1 See Sec 6 2 2 1 The ladder monitor function can be started in either of the following two methods Starting from the touch key Touch the touch key where the extension key ladder monitor has been set Starting from the utility menu of the GOT Touch LADDER MON in the utility menu 6 OPERATING THE VARIOUS LADDER MONITOR SCREENS MELSEC GOT CHAPTER6 OPERATING THE VARIOUS LADDER MONITOR SCREENS The following sections describe each screen operation when using the ladder monitor function The screens used for explanations in this chapter are mainly those of the A975GOT The ladder monitor display screen varies slightly with the GOT used Refer to
41. With the displays module installed in the monitor station the special function module displays the format and the initial no of the I O signal with the sequencer CPU the I O module Input Output and the I O points For a special function module that cannot be monitored Special and the initial no of the I O signal are displayed The display position of the module is the key for moving the special function module monitor of that module to the screen where it is executed Touch input The keys used for the operation with the System Configuration screen shown in b are displayed Touch input b Key functions The chart below shows the functions of the keys that are used with the System Configu END ration screen operation Function Monitoring ends and display returns to the screen where the special module monitor function was begun Module display position Moves to screen where the special module monitor for that module is executed Slots 0 through 7 are valid for each base module Scrolls display up or down one level to display the system configuration of the level number just before or after the one that is currently displayed Operation of these keys is enabled when the system configuration extends to three levels or more Y Scrolls down one level A Scrolls up one level 12 1 12 OPERATION OF EACH SPECIAL MODULE MONITOR SCREEN MELSEC GOT 2 When using the QC
42. 01234 01234 16 to 23 0010 to 0017 SET AGL6AD Operation Monitor Screen 1 CONNECT No 0 RESET 0004 FEDCBRS8 76543210 Enable 0110110110110110 Error Code 01 256 to 383 0100 to 017F 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Error CNT No FEDCBAIG 76543210 0110110110110110 0005 Data Format Setting 0110110110110110 Sampling time 01234 ms 0006 For Data Format 0 Refer to Format 1 Refer to Input Status x 0003 left hand side values right hand side values 01234 01234 01234 01234 01234 01234 01234 01234 01234 01234 01234 01234 01234 01234 01234 01234 OOOO mmmmoomom 01234 01234 01234 01234 01234 01234 01234 01234 0001 0002 01234 01234 01234 01234 01234 01234 01234 01234 Direct Access INPUT CH 0 MX CH 101234 01234 AG16AD Input Output Monitor screen x HOT Error READY Error Direct Access 12 23 GCO O O OW A ee SS T 3 o qom o 12 23 12 OPERATION OF EACH SPECIAL MODULE MONITOR SCREEN MELSEC GOT Buffer memory address SUUM ND des ex 48 to 63 0030 to 003F SETS A616AD Graph Monitor Screen RESET Input 070 50 100 50 100 annel Channel Scale A 0 Channel Data Format 0 Channel Scale B 0 Channel Data Format 1 Channel Channel Channel
43. 20 1 When the list edit has started whether the upper or the lower key available for two purposes is valid is displayed on the second line at the left end of the display The GOT controls and displays the valid key A user may switch the valid key with the following keys SHIFT Upper character key is valid SET Lower character key is valid The following keys can be input if the valid key is at the lower character Input of SHIFT key is not required Comparison symbol key at the command input of comparison operation instruction KKE e Minus key at the source data of command The valid key after setting each mode switches as follows Read mode Write mode Insert mode Upper character key When the cursor position is at the setting value and the device step is in the Write mode the lower character key is valid Parameter mode and other modes Always lower character key Help of each mode Always lower character key When Command Read is selected from the Help in the Read mode the upper character key is valid When SHIFT key is input and the valid key is switched the switched side is valid until the mode key and the control key are input For details of each key refer to 3 5 4 20 20 1 20 OPERATION OF EDITING SCREEN FOR EACH LIST MELSEC GOT 20 1 2 Command input procedures Command input procedures can be classified as follows 1 Input the command key to use the
44. 22 OPERATION PROCEDURES FOR MOTION MONITOR FUNCTION MELSEC GOT CHAPTER22 OPERATION PROCEDURES FOR MOTION MONITOR FUNCTION The operation procedure when using the motion monitor function is explained in this chapter 22 1 Operation procedures before starting motion monitoring This section contains a summary of the procedure for transmitting the system program 22 OS for the motion monitor function and the motion monitor data from the personal computer to the GOT until it is installed in built in memory For details please refer to the Help in GT Designer Details of the screen display and key operation are shown in the Help y Connect GOT and personal computer Start up GOT It is not necessary to set up and operate the GOT after startup Start up personal computer and start GT Designer With the GT Designer transmit the OS Transmit the data using the installation dialog box for the motion monitor function from the personal computer to the GOT and install it in the built in memory Installation is complete When installation is finished Completed is displayed on the installation dialog box With the GT Designer transmit the Transmit the data using the download dialog box motion monitor data from the personal computer to the GOT and install it in the built in memory Download Y When download is finished the motion When download is finished Completed is displayed monitor can be operated th
45. 25 c Channel 1 01234 Channel 2 01234 2 Channel 3 01234 Channel 4 01234 Top Scale 0 For module codes 06 97 16 amp 17 Bottom Scale 0 For all other module codes Channel 4321 WOT Error O P Enable valid 0110110110110119 D B Enabled 0000 Module 1 Fault Module 2 Fault 0 Effective Module 3 Fault 1 Invalidity Module 4 Fault 12 27 A1S64TCTT BW S1 A1S64TCRT BW S1 Module Monitor s2 oozo 64 Jon4o os ooso 128 0080 a se 0020 64 0040 se foso 128 oso A1S64TCTT RT S1 Operation Monitor Screen ALL CH 3 ES E peces o Js fol 12 Joso Measurement unit C eF C 5 34 0022 66 oo42 98 oos2 130 0082 pecine so tin Fey ss oro 14 loooe 15 oor 16 ooo Temp i 012345 012345 012345 process t E 7 value Decimal Pv point 1 y i 8 Decimal Set value J setting i SV point 1 i E L 0 Manipulation value MV I 2 T Alert occurrence flag Write error flag n 5 oos e foooe 7 foooz 8 oooi Screen Image Buffer memory address No A1S64TCTT RT S1 Alert details PY exceeds the specified temperature measurement range in the input range PV is below the specified temperature measurement range in the input range Hardware error occurs Alert alarm 1
46. 99929999 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 90 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 100 00 00 00 7 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 TE S529925 2 12 62 fxg afofofo ofofolo 9 m m F3 00 00 00 00 100 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 100 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 99999988 ell MELSEC GOT No Buffer memory address de mex 1517 1617 O5ED 0651 1717 1817 06B5 0719 1518101519 OSEE 10 O5EF 1618101619 0652100653 i7i810 1719 06B61006B7 1818 to 1819 071A to 071B 1534101535 OSFEtoOSFE 1634101635 062100663 178401735 0606 to 0607 183419 1835 o72At0 0728 153619 1537 0600100601 163619 1637 0664100665 173619 1737 06C81006C9 1836 to 1837 072C to 072D 1212 to 1292 04BC to 050C 1293 to 1356 050D to 054C 1358 to 1421 054E to 058D 12 62 MELSEC GOT 12 OPERATION OF EACH SPECIAL MODULE MONITOR SCREEN hex Buffer memory address dec Screen Image 2000 to 25999 07D0 to 658F 01234 01234 01 01 01 830 01234567890 0123456789 01234 1234 0
47. DELETE OTHER a r A O ri mera A 4 Function indicated at the upper part of each key is e y Function indicated at the lower part of each key is available mm o D y FROM CALL RET DEC MRD Example FFO key H I J JLK E C ME A Function indicated at the upper part of the key is 7 available FROM masa zz x5 0 Ls MOV lt P M JL O PJLaQ x S LD C TU BCD BIN y I y M iw Function indicated at the lower part of the key is Y Y Ly AND f OR f vc NOP E available bj SP JR JUN Ea NZ iw E Y LDI f ANI TT ORI MCR 4 C 8 8 e ser 1 NI SET ANB ORB PLS 55 9 989 55 eee RST SFT CJ OUT sp GO oJU Ji To switch between two functions of keys functions indicated at upper and lower parts of the keys press the SHIFT and SET keys For details see Section 20 1 1 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC GOT 2 Cursor display The GOT controls the display of the cursor when the user has to input data it displays a gg at the cursor position For more information see Paragraph 6 below If the cursor overlaps the display of a character however the character and yy alternate on the display 3 Indication of the selected line When a program list is displayed the line currently selected for editing is indicated by K appearing imm
48. EE MELSECNET 10 Program No 10 A Line KUMITATE Program 06 10 17 37 B Line HANSOU Program 10 17 40 C Line KENSA Program 2184 1999 06 10 17 42 D Line MONITOR Program 2164 1999 06 10 17 43 Monitor System KUMITATE Comment 2184 1999 06 10 17 45 A Line HANSOU Comment 2184 1999 06 10 07 21 B Line MONITOR Comment 1083 1999 06 10 17 50 Monitor System KENSA Comment 1903 1999 06 10 13 02 C Line To the following page 6 OPERATING THE VARIOUS LADDER MONITOR SCREENS MELSEC GOT From the previous page 6 The Drive Selection Window is displayed Select the drive DRIVE 0 j DIPLE RAM dowd Memory Card applicable memory with the following keys 0 to 4 Inputthe drive number E ERES AC Clear all input data on the drive ul Define the input 7 The file list of the selected drive is displayed Select the ladder to be read with the following keys coe 5 T Move the cursor upward Y Move the cursor downward eroaren S108 1399 05 10 ne Page Display the previous page HG Coment 294 1399 08 10 17 38 A Line Page 4 Display the next page HANSOU Comment 2184 1993 06 10 07 21 Line Frage y 9 D y p g MONITOR Comment 1083 1933 06 10 17 50 Monitor System TZ A A E E SEL Move the cursor and touch the key to change select cancel READ Start reading the selected ladder MELSEC Q ladde
49. MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC MELSOFT Human Machine Interface Operating Manual A900 Series GT Works Version5 GT Designer Version5 Art no 136210 05 200 2 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC INDUSTRIAL AUTOMATION 01 2 SH NA 080118 G e SAFETY PRECAUTIONS e Always read these instructions before using this equipment Before using this product please read this manual and the relevant manuals introduced in this manual carefully and pay full attention to safety to handle the product correctly The instructions given in this manual are concerned with this product For the safety instructions of the programmable controller system please read the CPU module user s manual In this manual the safety instructions are ranked as DANGER and CAUTION 7 4 N l Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions l d DANGER resulting in death or severe injury l l T CAUTION Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions L resulting in medium or slight personal injury or physical damage J Note that the NCAUTION level may lead to a serious consequence according to the circumstances Always follow the instructions of both levels because they are important to personal safety Please save this manual to make it accessible when required and always forward it to the end user PRECAUTION WHEN PERFORMING THE TEST OPERATION N CAUTION e Read the manual carefully and fully und
50. PHR OFF3 17 9 13 10 OH 0H FFFFFFEOH 92290 0000 Od PNR ON4 7 9 13 10 Encoder PV Multi Rev 1Rev SV CMD Val Monitor PV ALM D7EDH 19495H OH 92322 0000 Description The axis No of the axis currently monitored is displayed HP Data The following values monitored at home position return are displayed e Home position return completion time e Encoder present value Multi revolution data of absolute position reference point data Within one revolution position of absolute position reference point data e Servo command value e Monitor present value MON Val The following present monitor values are displayed e Present time e Encoder present value Present multi revolution data of encoder present value Present within one revolution position of encoder present value e Present servo command value Present monitor present value PWR ON PWR OFF 23 12 The four past present values of the ABS axis at servo amplifier power on off are displayed At power on e Power on time e Encoder present value Multi revolution data of initial encoder Single revolution data of initial encoder e Servo command value after recovery e Monitor present value after recovery e Alarm occurrence information at present value recovery error code of minor major error At power off e Servo amplifier power off time Encoder present value Multi revolution data of encoder present value before s
51. Screen Image Buffer memory address No X Y SETZ Data MONIT AD71 Input Output Monitor Screen RESET Che MENU Outputs Y IB x Posit Start Y Posit Start Interpolation zeroing Start Y Zeroing Start X Stop Y stop X Fud Jog Start g X Rev Jog Start E v Fwd Jog Start Y x x Fl Y HOT Error READY Posit Completel Y Posit Completel Axis BUSY Axis BUSY Zero Request Zero Request Posit started Posit started Battery Error j Error Detection X Zero Complete JU Y Zero Complete X M Code ON Y M Code ON Rev Jog Start M Code OFF M Code OFF LC READY AMOO ANA SET Data MONIT Positioning Data Monitor Screen RESET Che MENU END Address Speed Duell M Code x Address Speed Duell M Cade 01234567 01234 012 012 01239567 01234 012 012 01234567 01234 012 012 01234567 01234 012 012 01234567 01234 012 012 01234567 01234 012 012 01234567 01234 012 012 01234567 01234 012 012 01234567 01234 012 Ole 01234567 01234 012 012 01234567 01234 012 012 01234567 01234 012 ole 01234567 01234 012 012 01234567 01234 012 012 01234567 01234 912 Ole 01234567 01234 012 012 01234567 01234 012 012 01239567 01234 012 ole 01234567 01234 012 012 01234567 01234 012 012 01234567 01234 012 012 01234567 01234 012 012 01234567 01234 O12 012 01239567 01234 012 ole 01234567 01234 012 012 01234567 01234 012 012 01234567 01234 012 012 01234567 01234 012 ole 01234567
52. See NETWK No 0 STATION FF Sec 9 1 2 D 15 2147483648 DW When you touch SET you can specify the monitor station Ye 32767 and device X 001 e M 25 O T 30 100 2001 C4 W 200 43 R 50 68378428 DW Gr 5 300 3004 SET Touch DEVICE MONITOR MENU FORM SET NETWK No 0 STATION FF ENTRY DELETE ALL CLR TEST ENTRY Touch 9 OPERATION OF THE VARIOUS SYSTEM MONITOR SCREENS MELSEC GOT 1 Specify network No station No 1 and CPU No 2 of object PLC CPU For data link system NET WK No 0 Ear a el SEARMON E FE oi NETWK No 0 STATION FF 0 Master station naves Dil 16b 0 32b 1 0 1 to 64 Local station For network system FP NET WK No 0 Host loop Gib w R NA EN 1 to 255 Specified loop STATION FF Host station 0 Control station 1 to 64 Normal station For Ethernet connection 3 NET WK No 1 to 239 STATION 1t064 For multi CPU system CPU No 0 to 4 CPU number 2 Specify the device to be monitored Arrow Select input area 14 Ki Left right Character Input network no station CPU no 2 device name device no 3 When specifying the word device or buffer memory as a monitor device specify the monitor module 0 16 bit 1 word module 1 32 bit 2 word module O 1 Enter monitor module Match the data to be entered
53. Shows the status of the secondary loop lines of the own station Normal LoopBK Trans D Link Impo FLoop Back Station Indicates the station number of a station 5 LoopBK Info that executes the loopback along the primary loop RLoop Back Station Indicates the station number of a station that executes the loopback along the secondary loop of Loop Switching Indicates the cumulative number of times for which loops have been switched is displayed when coaxial bus connections are established 4 Constant LS 17 6 17 6 17 USING THE NETWORK MONITOR SCREENS MELSEC GOT Section Contents of Display e Parameter Setting Common Param Common Spec if Default Param Default Specif Reserved Sta Indicates the availability of a reserved station Have None TsSt Sta e Communication Mode Indicates either of Normal mode or Constant LS e Transmission Mode Indicates either of Normal Trans or Multipl Trans e Transmission Stat Indicates either of Normal Trans or Multipl Trans ox is displayed when coaxial bus connections are established 2 Key functions The table below shows the function of keys that are used on the detailed own station monitor screen Function Returns to the own station monitor screen Exits the detailed own station monitor screen and returns to the previous monitor screen where the network monitor function was executed Changes the details o
54. When only one servo amplifier RS 232C cable is connected Max 15m RS 232C Servo amplifiers RS 422 RS 232C converter RS 422 cable cable When multiple 2 to 32 servo L l i amplifiers are connected Max 30m Multidrop communication up to 32 servo amplifiers can be connected 1 Connect the GOT side connector into the RS 232C interface at the bottom of the GOT used for downloading the monitor screen data 2 Connect the servo amplifier side connector to CN3 3 As the servo amplifier to be monitored select one from among the 32 servo amplifiers 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC GOT 3 7 5 Monitor screen types and memory capacities necessary to use the servo amplifier monitor functions The monitor screens used for the servo amplifier monitor functions change depending on the GOT model and monitored servo amplifier model The following tables indicate the monitor screen types and memory capacities necessary to use the servo amplifier monitor functions 1 When A985GOT is used Memory Capacities Bytes Function Details Stored Screen Data For MR J2S For MR J2S For MR J2M For MR J2M IA monitor CP monitor P8A monitor DU monitor Servo amplifier monitor data common information 18416 Monitor ALL 4132 Alarm Alarm display 613 Servo A985 Alarms ALL 2268 Alarm history 615 Servo A985 Alarms Hist ALL 3020 617 Servo A985 VO Display s a 2488
55. servo amplifier changing password is illegal Please confirm forward or The LSP LSN signal of the servo Turn ON the LSP LSN signal of reversal stroke end LSP amplifier is OFF the servo amplifier 27 1 27 ERROR INDICATIONS AND CORRECTIVE ACTIONS FOR SERVO AMPLIFIER MONITOR MELSEC GOT MEMO 27 2 27 2 INDEX A Adaptor address sees eee 4 8 B Ba dirate cara rta dde 4 9 10 Batch monitor sse eee eee eee eee eee ee 9 10 BM monitor ren ec eee 9 14 Brightness contrast adjustment of monitor screen 4 3 Brightness contrast adjustment screen ssesseess 4 20 BUZZERSOUNO derer es 4 8 C Capacity of special module monitor data 3 5 Connection transmission speed 4 8 Clock setting UT 4 16 C C U monitor registration 4 10 D Deleting a registered device 9 9 Detailed own station monitor 17 3 E Entry monitor seen 9 7 Error display and handling Ladder monitor function 7 1 Network monitor function 18 1 Special module monitor function 14 1 System monitor function 10 1 List editor function 21 1 Servo amplifier monitor 27 1 Error List ici sian ia 23 6 Error List AXIS oer ape critt 23 7 F Feat
56. 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 o0 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 KLL zeige ololelojojejejo mm los ra le 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 8999998 ofofefofofofafo 12 73 1517 1617 O5ED 0651 1717 1817 06B5 0719 1518101519 OSEE 10 O5EF 1618 to 1619 0652 to 0653 1718 to 1719 06B6 to 06B7 1818 to 1819 071A to 071B 1534 to 1535 O5FE to 05FF 1634 to 1635 0662 to 0663 1734 to 1735 06C6 to 06C7 1834 to 1835 072A to 072B 1536 to 1537 0600 to 0601 1636 to 1637 0664 to 0665 1736 to 1737 06C8 to 06C9 072C to 072D 04BC to 050C 1836 to 1837 1212 to 1292 050D to 054C 054E to 058D 1293 to 1356 1358 to 1421 Nk 12 73 12 OPERATION OF EACH SPECIAL MODULE MONITOR SCREEN MELSEC GOT Buffer PE address iil d 2000 to 25999 07D0 to 658F o1 o1 o1 ox o1 01234 01234 1 01234 01234 0126456 76590 01234567890 0123456789 20 0123456183 n e 01234 o1234 01284561850 0123456 7830 0122456 783 S 01234 01234 01254561830 0173456 7830 0123
57. 1012 03F4 3 809 0329 909 0380 1009 03F1 5 sos 0328 eos ossc 1008 o3Fo Ho soe Losas soe uosa one fost SS DR 83 2 MONIT MENU SET RESET Operation Monitar Screen Axis 1 Axis 2 Axis 3 Duo 1 um x10 5 inch 3107 5 deg 01234567830 01234567090 i 01234567890 Address l te 12105 m min l 10 3 inch min x107 3 deg min PLS sec Axis Speed 012345578 012345678 012345678 Axis Status Pattern D ETUR E i 01234 S Method o Dec i 8 0346 938 03AA 1038 040E i i 0 E ja 11 n n o ooo 150 0096 30 1 001 151 0087 30 penne 152 cose oo 3 2 ADISP Basic Parameter 1 12 39 Parameter Valid Range unit Pulse Per Travel Per Unit Pulse Output Mode Rotation Revolution Multiplier Direction O mm 1 inch 2 degree 1 to 65535 1 x1 10 100 x100 1000 d H O PLS SIGN Mode CH CCH Mode R B Mode Reverse Pulses Revolution i 1 2 D Foruard Pulses i 1 1 12 39 12 OPERATION OF EACH SPECIAL MODULE MONITOR SCREEN MELSEC GOT Buffer memory address 1 2 3 s Le nos 156 onec aos onse 7 Tan 157 oosp 307 0133 ADTSP Basic Parameter 2 MENU END 2 e 0008 158 oot 308 0194 10 5 mm min 1 to 600000000 Speed Lim
58. 1804 1510 to 1511 Buffer memory address de he hex 1700 1800 06A4 0708 1701 1801 06A5 0709 DB ER 1702 1802 1703 1803 06A7 070B 1712 1812 06B0 0714 1716 1816 06B4 0718 B 1708 to 1709 O6AC to 06AD 1808 to 1809 0710 to 0711 MELSEC GOT O5DE 0642 6A6 070A 05E0 0644 06A8 070C O5E6 to 05E7 1610 to 1611 064A to 064B 1710 to 1711 O6AE to O6AF 1810 to 1811 0712 to 0713 1720 1820 06B8 071C 1721 1821 06B9 071D 1722 to 1723 O6BA to 06BB 1724 1824 06BC 0720 1725 1825 O6BD 0721 1738 1838 06CA 072E 1748 1848 1749 1849 1550 1650 4 1750 1850 1540 1640 1740 1840 1541 1641 1741 1841 1542 1642 1742 1842 1543 1643 1743 1843 060C 0670 06D4 0738 060D 0671 06D5 0739 060E 0672 06D6 073A 0604 0668 06CC 0730 0605 0669 06CD 0731 0606 066A 06CE 0732 0607 066B 06CF 0733 12 72 12 OPERATION OF EACH SPECIAL MODULE MONITOR SCREEN MELSEC GOT Buffer memory address Screen Image No de he 01234 01234 01234 01234 I 01234567890 J 0123456 7890 01234567890 01234567890 0123456789 0123456789 0123456789 D 0123456789 G 0123456789 01235456705 G GIGI D gt G aaa uj 2 o 2 OO o2 a Rejo123 99629229 L 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
59. 41 48 45 52 49 56 53 50 57 64 61 01101101101101101101101101101101 0110110110110110 2101101101101101 01101101101101101101101101101101 01101101101101102101101101101101 01101101101101102101101101101101 01101101101101101101101101101101 01101101101101101101101101101101 01101101101101101101101101101101 01101101101101102101101101101101 0110110110110110 101101101101101 01101101101101102101101101101101 01101101101101101101101101101101 01101101101101101101101101101101 01101101101101101101101101101101 01101101201101101101101101101101 01101101101101101101101101101101 01101101101101101101101101101101 01101101101101101101101101101101 01101101101101101101101101101101 01101101101101101101101101101101 01101101101101101101101101101101 01101101101101101101101101101101 01101101101101101101101101101101 01101101101101101101101121101101 01101101101101101101101101101101 01101101101101101101101101101101 01101101101101101101101121101101 01101101101101101101101101101101 01101101101101101101101101101101 01101101101101101101101101101101 01101101101101101101101121101101 01101101101101101101101101101101 12 45 MELSEC GOT 12 45 12 OPERATION OF EACH SPECIAL MODULE MONITOR SCREEN MELSEC GOT Buffer memory address dec hex 300 to 363 012C to 016B 600 to 663 0258 to 0297 Screen Image SET Data MONIT AJTIPT32 53 Partial Refresh Data Monitor Scr 1 8 RESET Che menu END
60. B d Ax 1 Ax 0 a 01234 30138 30238 075BA 0761E Encoder output pulse setting 30338 30438 07682 076E6 O Output pulse setting 1 Division ratio setting hxisilBl ezis axis i4 m 12 76 12 76 12 OPERATION OF EACH SPECIAL MODULE MONITOR SCREEN MELSEC GOT Buffer memory address E 2 1 30143 30243 075BF 07623 30343 30443 07687 076EB 0D75k Servo extended parameter 2 30144 30244 075C0 07624 Slight vibration control selection 1 Position loop gain 2 changing ratio wart 30344 30444 07688 076EC h tines 120 Stines 320 Stines 3 0 25tines Ax Wax doe Ax 0123 ic 0123 5i 0123 REE 0123 30145 30245 075C1 07605 Position gain 2 shift arnt dB loop gain 2 changing ratio fe ae ergo H H H A BIER is 0123 eo 0 129 ci 0123 30345 30445 07689 076ED era ion 21 2 FEE Slight cae control selection e PE INTER COMES gan 2 cnengin Dus 30149 30249 075C5 07629 0 1000 ms i i i i wa k RR 1 RR o E SS s 30349 30449 0768D 076F1 c T 11 Voltage compensation o 100 Avance SA uith OW Maz 31 A uith CH 30150 30250 075C6 0762A Axis Axisel Ax iso aisi oxisdE B orisa isa 30350 30450 0768E 076F2 Gain changing malid LM sigel frenavtroie Notch filter MR J2S B Only 5 selection iomad frequency 3 Drocp pulses 4 hodel speed Freeney 00 dlo dyk ol HL Bxist axis exis axisa MM fe cope Sw Even Pie FIE
61. CE IE jeu si X Fen 9600 bps Serva Bee Monitor E seu en WCG 9600 bos Serve scan E au Ew gt gt nlt maines Lit mm ior Papiifier Flemere Version acb seexne0 s Sut Tee nane LDE rotor eret S H version HERES SE rag UE aer Fu H m m sre A sa cor moms rotor 20 re Suec R 1 o1 TSS Iar 80 Ui WK ee Encoder resolution 131072 pulserev suote2 LRS z ce uc uossewr sioes Sanr en EN oo w me m E T Ma Fe Suc mi om wa ra EA moon rn E ws sess reb m Sm sir ora Sues mo m 2 utin EN n ii e ul sas Function device F Amplifier information Cano inf Unit composition display screen A 26 9 esas E A ic itCompo ABSdat a gt m RUE 1505670958 display screen list screen j AA npo Lancia MR J25 A 9600 bps Servo ap Monitor Tosti Menu Erd a apsdata ABS data display screen 26 9 26 OPERATIONS OF SERVO AMPLIFIER MONITOR SCREENS MELSEC GOT If the DI DO display screen data or function device display screen for MR J2MLIDU monitor only data has not been downloaded to the GOT Monitor data not found appears and the subsequent screens are not displayed 2 Display screens The screens that can be displayed are indicated on a servo amplifier model basis Servo Amplifier MR J2M A Series Display Screen Tg Meee Mie CP MR J2M P8A MR J2M CIDU DI DO displa
62. DISPLAY NOTHING CANCEL EXECUTE v Change comment display DEC HEX YES NO v Change display form 1 Touch the display position of the selected menu EXECUTE Touch Y Return Monitor screen POINT After starting the system monitor if the PLC CPU comment or comment capacity is changed the comment may not be correctly displayed on each monitor screen When changing the comment or comment capacity re start the GOT 9 OPERATION OF THE VARIOUS SYSTEM MONITOR SCREENS MELSEC GOT 9 1 3 Specifying the monitor station and device SET An explanation of the procedure for specifying the monitor station and the device for executing the system monitor is explained below using the Entry Monitor window as example The operation procedure is the same for specifying the monitor station and device when selecting windows other than Entry Monitor When there is a Keywindow touching it to returns to the monitor screen Operation procedure Select monitor function with basic screen Pp cut See Sec 9 1 1 Or display 777 monitor screen or imenuscreen See the explanatory section for each monitor screen and the menu screen en When you touch MENU you return to the basic screen DEVICE MONITOR TEST MENU FORM SET When you touch FORM you change this display
63. Enable Ext Preset Error Flag Fuse Power OFF Sampling Per iod AMS GZ 12 12 12 12 12 OPERATION OF EACH SPECIAL MODULE MONITOR SCREEN MELSEC GOT 12 5 A62DA S1 Module Monitor Screen Image he 0000 0001 SET Data Tau y 0002 to 0005 A62DA 51 Operation Monitor Screen RESET Che MENU Channel 1 Output voltage check 0129 Channel 2 Output voltage check 0123 01234 6 1 Current check 2 0123 01234 6 X 1 x HDT Error READY 15 0000 0001 0002 0004 MONIT 0003 0005 A62DA 51 Graph Monitor Screen MENU Dutput X Error Channel 1 A Channel 2 A B vor Error X 1 1 1 12 6 A1S62DA Module Monitor Screen Image MONIT A1S62DA Operation Monitor Screen che MENU 2 3 Analog Output Enable Disable Channel 1 Channel 2 Digital I P Digital I P Channel No 1 0110110110110110 012345 012345 WOT Error Flag CH2 D A Output Enable Flag D amp Conversion READY CH1 D A Output Enable Flag Error Flag Error Reset v Output X AC Output X 0001 0002 Channel 1 0 50 100 Channel 1 Q 1 4000 17 4000 T i4 8000 14 8000 gt 1712000 1 12000 Channel 2 0 50 Channel 2 1 4000 14 4000 1 8000 14 8000 112000 1712000 CHI Check Code CH2 Check Code 0123 0122 Resolution Settin qu 2 1 8000 3 1 12000
64. If access to the Utility Menu screen is password protected a screen asking you to enter a password is displayed when you touch the upper right and left corners of the screen or when you touch a touch key on the screen A dialog box for defining a password is contained in the common settings menu of GT Designer e f the characters entered match a password the Utility Menu screen appears e f the characters entered do not match a password an error message appears on screen Touching Exit will return to the previous monitor screen s Numerical numbers and alphabets A to F can be used for a password 3 Procedure a To enter a password follow these steps e Touch 0 to 9 and A to F to enter a password e Touch to confirm the password entered e To correct the password entered touch DEL to delete wrong characters and then enter correct characters again b To quit entering a password e Touch Exit to return to the previous monitor screen 4 OPERATING THE UTILITY FUNCTION MELSEC GOT 4 12 Adjusting the brightness of the monitor screen on the dedicated screen Brightness adjustment 1 Display screen Screen Example 2 Function Used to adjust the brightness of the monitor screen 8 Operation a Basic operation e Touch any of to O to select the brightness e Touch xt 8 and at top of the screen to make contra
65. In virtual mode only Display example When axis 1 is monitored 1ax Virt Axis Used to change the axis to be monitored RET Used to return to the previous screen Used to return to the monitor menu screen Used to end the error list designated axis monitoring and return to the screen that was being displayed when the motion monitor function was started 23 8 23 8 23 OPERATIONS OF VARIOUS MOTION MONITOR SCREENS MELSEC GOT 23 3 5 Display data and key functions of positioning monitor screen Positioning Monitor Real This section explains the display data of the positioning monitor screen and the key functions displayed on screen 1 Displayed data In real mode RET EA END In virtual mode Positioning Monitor Cam ser kenu eo MON Val Status CMD Signal 1 e mon yal Status CMD Signal Feed PV 359054 PLS POS StartCompletion stop Command A Feed PV 99999 PLS In Position EO REST SERA fictual PV 358127 PLs APOS Completion Rapid Stop Comman Actual PV 53144 PLS Zero Point Passage ervo Error Rese Dyt Counter 927 PLS 8B ie 3 Eum ee 2 lt pvt counter dass Gist putes ee fga C ENRETE EXE Prog No 4 speed controlling Completion Sign OFF Min Major SV ERR 0 1000 0 ZERD Request E servo OFF Command Min Major SV ERR 0 Pispeed Pos CHG Latch Enable Speed POS CHG T Limit 300 ZERO Completion M Code
66. Refer to Section 26 8 3 amplifier if the servo motor is not connected Refer to Section 26 8 5 1 15 1 15 2 BEFORE BEGINNING OPERATION MELSEC GOT CHAPTER2 BEFORE BEGINNING OPERATION The required equipment for using the monitor functions in this manual are described in this section 2 1 Before getting started with various functions To use in this manual such as the utility function ladder monitor function system 2 monitor function special module monitor function network monitor function motion monitor function and servo amplifier monitor function an operating system OS for each function must be installed first on your GOT by using GT Designer To install an OS for your desired function on your GOT see GT Works Version5 GT Designer Version5 Reference Manual 2 2 Required equipment The chart below shows the equipment required for using the monitor functions O Required X Not required Special Ladder System function Network List Motion monitor monitor module monitor editor monitor function function monitor function function function function Servo amplifier monitor function Required ee Utility equipment App cation function GOT main unit A95 GOT BD M3 t is required to use the option function installed on the A95 GOT e Needed to execute A985 97 960 the option functions GOT 1 Bond installed in the GOT A956WGOT Memory Required for installing the
67. Section3 1 1 Section3 4 3 Section4 3 Section4 5 Section4 8 Section5 2 Section6 2 1 Section6 2 4 Section6 3 1 Section6 3 5 Chapter 7 Section9 1 3 Section9 2 2 Section9 3 2 Section9 4 2 Section9 5 2 Section9 6 1 Section12 1 1 Section12 1 2 Additions Section6 1 Partial additions Section2 1 Section2 2 Section2 3 Section3 1 1 Section3 3 3 Section3 4 3 Section3 5 1 Section4 1 Section4 2 Section6 2 1 Section9 1 2 Section9 1 3 Section12 3 Section17 1 1 Section17 2 3 Additions Section1 1 7 Section3 6 Section3 6 1 Section3 6 2 Section3 6 3 Section3 6 4 Section12 32 Chapter22 Chapter23 Chapter24 Partial additions Section1 1 1 Section2 1 Section2 2 Section2 3 Section3 1 2 Section3 6 4 Section4 1 Section4 2 Section4 3 Section4 4 Section4 5 Section4 6 Section4 12 Section5 2 Section6 1 Section6 2 1 Section6 2 3 Section6 2 4 Section6 2 5 Section6 3 1 Section6 3 5 Section9 1 2 Section23 5 Additions Section1 1 8 Section3 7 Chapter25 Chapter26 Chapter27 Japanese Manual Version SH 080113 G This manual confers no industrial property rights or any rights of any other kind nor does it confer any patent licenses Mitsubishi Electric Corporation cannot be held responsible for any problems involving industrial property ights which may occur as a result of using the contents noted in this manual O 2000 MITSUBISHI EL
68. T Limit 0 300 Zero Point Passage Error Reset 3 gt EXE Cam No 1 External Signal FLS error Detection servo Error Reset EXE Stroke 100000 PLS External Signal RLS L ZInval STOP in start 4 Servo Error Detect f Cam Ax 1 Rev 1014 PLS External Signal STUP ZERO Request eee 5 A External Signal DOG CHANGE ZERO Completion SEIN Signal Servo ON OFF Status external Signal FLS Torque Limiting Signal External Signal RLS v Mode Cont Op Warning External Signal STOP Y external Signal DOG CHANGE Servo ON OFF Status Torque Limiting Signal IM code Outputting Description The axis No of the running axis being monitored is displayed For the virtual axis the axis type is displayed Data Item S ROLET e Ballscrew e Rotary table s Cam The data during positioning control of the PCPU are displayed Feed present value Target address output to the servo amplifier value of the roller surface speed for the roller axis e Actual present value Actually traveled present value no Feed PV value is displayed for the roller axis Deviation counter Difference between feed present value and actual present value Executed program No Servo program No in execution e Minor major servo error Error code of the latest minor major servo error EXE Cam No The cam No currently controlled is displayed ExE Stroke The stroke amount currently controlled is displayed Cam Ax 1 Rev The present value within one cam axis rev
69. WDT setting watchdog timer in the unit 6 2 input unit 10 ms of 10 ms Setting of I O control system only for ASHCPU Set the I O control system and A3MCPU cai When parameter setting is 2 TT CLEAR gt END 7 uS g complete write the PLC anz M EHE items is CPU also available GO End of writing is displayed 20 15 20 15 20 OPERATION OF EDITING SCREEN FOR EACH LIST MELSEC GOT 20 3 7 Operation in Other modes O Procedures key input sequence Operation that checks the error step number error T 12 Except AnA AnUCPU Error check code for the current error 7 AnA AnUCPU in the ACPU other than AnA and AnUCPU Check the program gt Go Program check double coil command d code END command gt Step number OTHER gt Top I O Monitor the buffer memory number of unit M details of the special monitoring gt H ig Buffer memory GO function unit Ly address K i K Monitor the clock data of Clock monitor SHIFT gt OTHER gt 3 gt L1 gt 12 the ACPU Clear all memories in the Clearing of all PC memories ACPU SHIFT gt OTHER gt 3 gt 2 gt GO gt 4 GO Clear all sequence program microcomputer program and T C setting value areas Clear all details of the bit device and the word device in the ACPU
70. a Data is linked in the b Data is linked in the sub c Loop back is performed Primary loop loop in the Primary sub loop direction Hr a d Loop back is performed e Loop back is performed f Data link is not available in the Primary loop in the sub loop direction direction only only 2 Key functions This section describes the function of keys to be used on the own station monitor Screen Function Exits the own station monitor screen and returns to the previous monitor screen where the network monitor function was executed Switches to the detailed monitor screen that corresponds to the 17 module displayed on the current monitor screen This key is effective for each screen Switches to the other station monitor menu that corresponds to the network displayed on the current monitor screen This key is effective for each screen Changes the details on the window only for A95 GOT Changes the monitoring destination CPU using the CPU No For multi PLC system connection only The CPU No is displayed according to the number of CPUs loaded 17 2 17 2 17 USING THE NETWORK MONITOR SCREENS MELSEC GOT 17 2 Detailed own station monitor This section describes the structure of the monitor screen and the common operations used when executing the detailed own station monitor 17 2 1 Display contents and keys functions acting as a MELSECNET B or MELSECNE
71. and RGB screen H Position etc may be set only when the A985GOT V is used 4 OPERATING THE UTILITY FUNCTION MELSEC GOT GOT Screen Example Used P BUZZER VOLUME SCREEN SAVE TIME 0 Z MIN 0 FREE SCREEN SAVE LIGHT OFF _ LANGUAGE AAS REVERS DISPLAY NO A95 GOT Page 1 2 T SELECT CHANGE Page 2 2 T SELECT CHANGE H m Hu m This screen example assumes that the communication driver other than Bus A QnA has been installed The grip switch setting and grip switch cancel time key OFF setting are available only for use of the A950 handy GOT 2 Functions a Data that can be set on any GOT e Buzzer volume You can select the length of the beep sound Factory set to SHORT Outside speaker sound You can select whether or not voice output is provided from the external speaker only the voice specified for the touch input sound on the GT Designer Factory set to OFF eScreen save time Set the time until the monitor screen display is switched off by the screen saver function You can set the time between 00 minutes and 60 minutes When this setting is 0 the monitor screen is always displayed Factory set to 0 e Screen save light When this setting is OFF the backlight goes off as soon as the display is erased by the screen saver function When this setting is ON the display will disappear but the backlight will not go off e Language You can select the language J
72. bd 30151 30251 075C7 0762B Gain changing condition O 9999 6 400 10k 00 ie 0 46 2 k dessen CF 3o pb 10 281 3 6 nx is IEEE ais RED oi 0 1 2 3 n isa 01 2 5 se e 25006 espe Y 2504 2 308 15 24 5H4 30351 30451 0768F 076F3 Gain changing time constant 100 ms Eze REIER Ts D E13 Le o E Dind 30152 30252 075C8 0762C xis RET ais REE ax is IER Axi prz mel vues 7 i Load moment of inertia ratio fich depto 0 Aid Lo W zo amp b th 30352 30452 07690 076F4 rapo Axis laz iso ax isofix isa lx is 0123 ni RER a so 0125 Le o ENEE o EEE o FE o 30353 30453 07691 076F5 30354 30454 07692 076F5 30355 30455 07693 076F6 30360 30460 07698 076FC 12 30161 30261 30361 30461 07699 076FD 12 77 12 77 13 OPERATING I O MODULE MONITOR SCREENS MELSEC GOT CHAPTER13 OPERATING I O MODULE MONITOR SCREENS This section explains how the various screens are operated in the special module monitor function when monitoring input or output modules 13 1 Specifying the module to be monitored This describes how to start monitoring an optional special input or output module Operation procedure Display the System Configuration screen See Sec 12 1 1 Specify the module to be monitored Touch the position at which the module is displayed 1 From among the modules installed in the corresponding base unit specify the module whose Inp
73. 01 e mail infoGprivod ru RUSSIA RUSSIA RUSSIA RUSSIA RUSSIA MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC NDUSTRIAL AUTOMATION Gothaer Stra e 8 D 40880 Ratingen Phone 4 49 2102 486 0 Hotline 49 1805 000 765 Fax 49 2102 486 7170 www mitsubishi automation de megfa mail meg mee com www mitsubishi automation com
74. 012 Y Axis 012 Y Axis 012 h 0 PG Zero Point 1 Mech Stop l Rev 0 Stop Time Out 1 Stop Signal Torque Limit Zero Duell Time K Axis 012 Data 10110 Data 10110 la 46 346 mal as f wo ss orso EX Rn er I aA BI j eos oe e 605 Sie oral areal mar ud e as 12 33 o zera seco raoa ios o 40 ooze 340 0154 14 cer mes Lans inl ze reso 7s ere 12 33 12 OPERATION OF EACH SPECIAL MODULE MONITOR SCREEN Screen Image AD71 Parameter Data Monitor Screen Data MONIT Chg meno END Posit Start Iravel Pulse Interpolationfinching Trav Posit Compl 7 Speed Limit 0123456789 Zero Request Jog Spd Limit zero Start zero Comp letepce Dec Time Fwd Jog G Comp Rev Jog Start pper Limit 9 0123456789 ower Limit 10 0123456789 stop Pos Started Error Coman E BUSY M Code ON HOT Err Man Pulse Batt Erra Hi Error triWi Code Errcode 14 01234567 0123456789 01234567 01234567 01234567 01234567 01234567 0123456789 0123456789 K ABCODEFF 0110110110110110 Y ABCODEFF 0110110110110110 A Pulse DP Made B Type A Type Code Timing WITH Mode AFTER Made C M Code ON OFF OFF 1 UN DD Posit Method 00 ABS 01 INC 10 ABS INC E Direct ion O Fwd 1 Rev FF Unit Setting 00 mm 01 inch 10 deg 11 PLS
75. 01234 012 012 01234567 01234 012 012 01234567 01234 012 Ole 01234567 01234 012 012 01234567 01234 012 012 01234567 01234 012 ole 01234567 01234 012 012 01234567 01234 012 012 01234567 01234 912 Ole 01234567 01294 012 012 01234567 01234 O12 012 01239567 01234 012 012 12 35 12 35 12 OPERATION OF EACH SPECIAL MODULE MONITOR SCREEN MELSEC GOT 12 22 AD72 A1SD71 Module Monitor Buffer memory address Screen Image No X Y SET Data MONIT AD72 R15D71 Positioning Data Monitor Screen RESET Che meny END X v soo iS axis i y axis Xx 0c eme mde dE beeee 01012 012 Mrosit start Exec Data N 012 Pt Ol 0P 012 012 M Interpolatiun teee mr bene e etse 03 012 012 El Posit ComplS Present 04 012 012 A o R 05 012 012 6 SENE SE 0029 Ea 0155 A C let 08 012 012 Fud Jog T 4 09 012 012 9 e 002A 342 0156 El Rev Ji Start 10 012 012 A a e m nw o 7912 1EE8 7922 tEF2 gs sdb RD TUE 13012012 7913 1EE9 7923 1EF3 15 012 oj a 0258 601 0259 ki Li 12 01234567 i 01234567 T 015 i 7874 1EC2 7894 1ED6 E Tu 012 01 02 01 T ae Ei a 0028 340 0154 xL l 44 002C 344 0158 ha res secs vaes 1007 346 13 DECKEN ESE r3 EUN RESET Che MENU iom rds zero beta s Ter m rs Y Axis Zero Ep 025B 605 025D
76. 070D 12 60 12 PERATION OF EACH SPECIAL MODULE MONITOR SCREEN e MELSEC GOT Doo Sem a Screen Image No QD75P QD75D A tr 1700 1800 06A4 0708 1701 1801 06A5 0709 oe ee 1702 1802 6A6 070A 3 1503 1603 O5DF 0643 1703 1803 06A7 070B 1504 1604 1704 1804 05E0 0644 06A8 070C 5 6 1512 1612 05E8 064C 1712 1812 06BO0 0714 7 1516 1616 05EC 0650 1716 1816 06B4 0718 1508 to 1509 05E4 to 05E5 8 1510 to 1511 05E6 to 05E7 1720 1820 06B8 071C 1721 1821 06B9 071D 1722 to 1723 O6BA to 06BB 1724 1824 06BC 0720 1725 1825 O6BD 0721 1738 1838 06CA 072E 12 61 1748 1848 1749 1849 1550 1650 1750 1850 1540 1640 1740 1840 1541 1641 1741 1841 1542 1642 1742 1842 1543 1643 1743 1843 060C 0670 06D4 0738 060D 0671 06D5 0739 060E 0672 06D6 073A 0604 0668 06CC 0730 0605 0669 06CD 0731 0606 066A 06CE 0732 0607 066B 06CF 0733 12 61 12 OPERATION OF EACH SPECIAL MODULE MONITOR SCREEN Screen Image i H 01234 01234 01234 01234 01234567890 I 01234567830 J 01234567830 01234567890 Ji 0123456789 0123456789 0123456789 0123456789 JE 0123456783 0123456783 O O00 o O O BSSSSSMB Cx
77. 10 to 11 000A to 000B 1 12 to 13 000C to 000D a 01234567 01234567 012345567 01234567 i 318 to 319 013E to 013F x 3 lao o 0123456 A a 0123456 7830 33 0021 23 173 0017 OOAD 323 473 0143 01D9 5 326 476 0146 01DC 327 477 0147 01DD 328 478 0148 01DE 329 479 0149 O1DF 174 to 175 OOAE to OOAF 324 to 325 0144 to 0145 474 to 475 01DA to 01DB 330 480 014A 01E0 334 484 014E 01E4 331 481 014B 01E1 12 65 12 65 12 OPERATION OF EACH SPECIAL MODULE MONITOR SCREEN MELSEC GOT Buffer memory address Screen Image No 36 to 41 0024 to 0029 1 0D75H Detailed para 42 to 47 002A to 002F 50 200 0032 00C8 350 500 015E 01F4 4 351 501 015F 01F5 0D7S5H Detailed paramet A 352 502 0160 01F6 353 503 0161 01F7 356 506 0164 O1FA 357 507 0165 01FB 358 508 0166 01FC 54 to 55 0036 to 0037 204 to 205 00CC to 00CD 854 to 355 0162 to 0163 O to Q 1 to 163840 PLS O Can t Restart 504 to 505 01F8 to 01F9 7 59 209 003B 00D1 359 509 0167 01FD 60 to 61 003C to 003D 8 iL 0123326 783 0123456709 362 512 016A 0200 64 to 65 0040 to 0041 214 to 215 00D6 to 00D7 364 to 365 016C to 016D 514 to 515 0202 to 0203 12 66 12 66 12 OPERATION OF EACH SPECIAL MODULE MONITOR SCREEN
78. 1649 e mail gts turk net CSC Automation Ltd UKRAINE 15 M Raskova St Fl 10 Office 1010 UA 02002 Kiev Phone 380 0 44 238 83 16 Fax 380 0 44 238 83 17 e mail csc a csc a kiev ua TURKEY AFRICAN REPRESENTATIVE CBI Ltd Private Bag 2016 ZA 1600 Isando Phone 27 0 11 928 2000 Fax 27 0 11 392 2354 e mail cbi cbi co za SOUTH AFRICA MIDDLE EAST REPRESENTATIVE TEXEL Electronics LTD Box 6272 IL 42160 Netanya Phone 972 0 9 863 08 91 Fax 972 0 9 885 24 30 e mail texel meGnetvision net il ISRAEL EURASIAN REPRESENTATIVE AVTOMATIKA SEVER Krapivnij Per 5 Of 402 RU 194044 St Petersburg Phone 7 812 1183 238 Fax 7 812 3039 648 e mail pavOavtsev spb ru CONSYS Promyshlennaya St 42 RU 198099 St Petersburg Phone 7 812 325 36 53 Fax 7 812 325 36 53 e mail consysOconsys spb ru ELEKTROSTYLE Ul Garschina 11 RU 140070 Moscowskaja Oblast Phone 7 095 261 3808 Fax 7 095 261 3808 e mail ICOS RUSSIA Industrial Computer Systems Zao Ryazanskij Prospekt 8a Office 100 RU 109428 Moscow Phone 7 095 232 0207 Fax 7 095 232 0327 e mail mail icos ru NPP Uralelektra Sverdlova 11a RU 620027 Ekaterinburg Phone 7 34 32 53 27 45 Fax 7 34 32 5327 45 e mail elektra etel ru STC Drive Technique Poslannikov Per 9 str 1 RU 107005 Moscow Phone 7 095 786 21 00 Fax 7 095 786 21
79. 3 sett ing range sec 314 t0 315 013A to 013B 464 to 465 01D0 to 01D1 01234567 01234567 01234567 JE 01234567 318 to 319 013E to 013F 01234567830 Tm EEG z ed 567 EEES 333 483 014D 01E3 322 472 0142 01D8 5 23 173 0017 OOAD 323 473 0143 01D9 326 476 0146 01DC 327 477 0147 01DD 328 478 0148 01DE 329 479 0149 O1DF 174 to 175 OOAE to OOAF m 324 to 325 0144 to 0145 ETERNENNN ve 3 ne Net Ne it 32 182 0020 00B6 332 482 014C 01E2 12 55 12 55 12 OPERATION OF EACH SPECIAL MODULE MONITOR SCREEN MELSEC GOT Buffer pig address iid iE 36 to 41 0024 to 0029 l 42 to 47 002A to 002F 50 200 0032 00C8 350 500 015E 01F4 Em 351 501 015F 01F5 etailed pa 352 502 0160 01F6 D Ramp S E 353 503 0161 01F7 356 506 0164 O1FA 357 507 0165 01FB 358 508 0166 01 FC 0036 00CC 354 504 0162 01F8 359 509 0167 01 FD 62 212 003E 00D4 362 512 016A 0200 MESH bos 12 56 12 56 12 OPERATION OF EACH SPECIAL MODULE MONITOR SCREEN Q D75P QD75D OPR detailed parameters Buffer a a EET address Screen Image 01234567890 01234567830 01234567890 01234567830 0123456789 0123456789 0123456789 OPR Speet 0123456789 0123456789 0123456789 01234567
80. 59 6152 562 e mail consys autocont cz CROATIA CZECHIA louis poulsen DENMARK industri amp automation Geminivej 32 DK 2670 Greve Phone 45 0 43 95 95 95 Fax 45 0 43 95 95 91 e mail IpiaQlpmail com UTU Elektrotehnika AS P rnu mnt 160i EE 11317 Tallinn Phone 372 0 6 51 72 80 Fax 372 0 6 51 72 88 e mail utu utu ee ESTONIA Beijer Electronics OY FINLAND Ansatie 6a FIN 01740 Vantaa Phone 358 0 9 886 77 500 Fax 358 0 9 886 77 555 e mail infoGbeijer fi MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B V Irish Branch Westgate Business Park IRL Dublin 24 Phone 353 0 1 419 88 00 Fax 353 0 1 419 88 90 e mail sales info meir mee com SIA POWEL LATVIA Lienes iela 28 LV 1009 Riga Phone 371 784 22 80 Fax 371 784 22 81 e mail utuGutu lv UAB UTU POWEL Savanoriu pr 187 LT 2053 Vilnius Phone 370 0 52323 101 Fax 370 0 52322 980 e mail powelOutu lt INTEHSIS SRL MOLDOVA REPUBLIC OF Cuza Voda 36 1 81 MD 2061 Chisinau Phone 373 0 2 562 263 Fax 373 0 2 562 263 e mail intehsis mdl net IRELAND LITHUANIA Getronics b v NETHERLANDS Control Systems Donauweg 2 B NL 1043 AJ Amsterdam Phone 31 0 20 587 67 00 Fax 31 0 20 587 68 39 email info gia getronics com NORWAY Beijer Electronics AS Teglverksveien 1 N 3002 Drammen Phone 47 0 32 24 30 00 Fax 47 0 32 84 85 77 emai
81. FUNCTION MELSEC GOT When input of a keyword is requested all parameters and sequence programs can be cleared together with the keyword registered in the ACPU using the operation below Step 1 Display the keyword input request Step 2 Stop operation of ACPU Step 3 Operation of PC memory all clear Input ALLCLR and press the GO key lle Le Re GO r Eit Step 4 Display of PC memory all clear process When the GOT starts clearing the process the display in the left appears column and the total number of bytes change sequentially ALL CLEAR 20KB T maximum 10 per process is displayed according to the memory capacity to be cleared As the clearing process proceeds each is deleted One shows 10 of memory capacity The memory capacity total number of bytes to be cleared is displayed in kbytes As the clearing process proceeds 1 kbyte is decreased Step 5 Completion of PC memory all clear process When the GOT completes the clearing process the screen in the left appears status before the mode selection MODE SELECTION READ INS PARAM PRESS MODE KEY Step 6 Select the mode as in 19 2 2 and start the following operation 19 4 19 4 19 OPERATION PROCEDURES FOR THE LIST EDITOR FUNCTION MELSEC GOT 19 2 2 Selection and operation of mode 19 5 After the keyword input select the mode in the list editor function for oper
82. Feedback Pulses 012345 PLS ee Fud Jog Start Rev Jog Start Electronic Gear 4 01237 0123 vel Pos Restart Rotation Direction 0 Posit Complete Bystem Setting 5 0 Torque Limit 012345 Z 1 ML zero Rtn RequestRegen Resistance 6 0 zero Rtn start elocity Limit 0123456 PLS s zero Rtn Comple Motor Type 7 0 Accel Time 012345 ms stop otor Capacity 0123 5 kH Pecel Time 012345 ms In position otor Rotations 012345 rpm Positioning Mode 0 10 servo OFF Mos Loop Gain 012345 rad s Amplifier Ver RO1H012 RBC WP Switchover 4 el Loop Gain 012345 fest Mode 0110110110110110 MDT Error 12 Errar Detection Wel Integration 012345 ms Brswitch 07654321 0110110110110110 RD7OD Input Output Monitor Screen SET Data MONIT RESET Chg MENU Outputs Y HOT Errar READY Zero Rtn Request zero Rtn Comple BUSY Posit Complete In position Zero Return Error Detection verf Low Undert low Servo Ready Near Zero Point Stop External 1D Upper Limit LS Lower Limit Ls LF AMOO NANA zero Rtn start Posit Start Forward Start Reverse Start Fwd Jog Start Rev Jog Start Vel Pos Restart Stop Error Reset Overflow Reset Underf low Reset Servo OFF V P Switchover PLC READY 12 32 MELSEC GOT Buffer memory address dec hex al
83. HONIT MENU Monitar Screen Nn 1 io address Arc Address i Speed Duell M Time Code 201 01234567890 01 01234567890 01 01234567890 01 01234567830 i 01 01234567890 01234567890 01234567890 01234567890 01234567830 01234567830 012345678 012345678 012345678 012345678 012345678 101234101234 101234101234 01234101234 101239 101234 191234 101234 Address Arc i Address Speed Duell M Time Code 01234567890 01234567090 01234567890 01234567890 01234567890 0123456 7830 01234567830 01234567830 012345578390 01234567890 012345578 012345678 i 012345678 012345678 012345678 101234 01234 101234 101204 101234 101234 01234101234 101234 101224 Address Are H Rddress Speed Dwell M Time Code o 01234567890 01234567890 012345678390 01234567890 01294567890 ooo BeBe gt 01224567890 01234567890 01234567830 012345578390 01234567890 012345678 012345678 012345678 012345678 012345678 101234 101234 101234 101234 101234 101234 101234101234 101224 101224 12 OPERATION OF EACH SPECIAL MODULE MONITOR SCREEN MELSEC GOT E Buffer TE address N El 1 1300 0514 2 to to 3 2299 08FB 2300 08FC 3300 OCE4 to to to to 3299 OCE3 4299 10CB 12 44 12 OPERATION OF EACH SPECIAL
84. HTR HALT Curr 20ms Contents of Display 1 This shows the action mode of the own station On line Off line loop test 2 This shows the status of the F loop primary loop OK NG This shows the status of the R loop Secondary loop OK NG 3 4 This shows whether the loopback was executed or not Executed Not executed 17 1 5 This shows link scan time required for the control station and the ordinary station for the remote master station and the remote I O station and for the mater station and all the sub stations a Maximum the maximum value of link scan time b Minimum the minimum value of link scan time c Current the current value of link scan time 2 This shows the network category network number and station number This shows the loop status of a network system as follows Primary loop F Secondary loop R a Primary loop OK b Primary loop OK c Primary loop NG Secondary loop OK Secondary loop NG Secondary loop O F F d Executing e Primary loop NG f MELSECNET 10 g MELSECNET 10 loopback Secondary loop NG coaxial bus OK coaxial bus NG n D TEES SE Ns E ue ti R L D RED wks m 1 S L E J 17 1 17 1 17 USING THE NETWORK MONITOR SCREENS MELSEC GOT Contents of Display The following loop status in the data link system is displayed Primary loop F Sub loop R
85. J2S R 9600 bps Servo amp Monitor 1 Amplifier Firmware Version BCD B26H000 BO 2 Motor model HC PQ053 MF 5 053 3 Motor 1D 02F05300 4 Encoder resolution 131072 pulse rev No tem Perscription EE vmware Displays the software number of the servo amplifier connected to the GOT Motor model Displays the model of the servo motor connected to the servo amplifier 3 Motor ID Displays the ID of the servo motor connected to the servo amplifier Encoder resolution Displays the encoder resolution of the servo motor connected to the servo amplifier 1 Not displayed for MR J2M P8A monitor 2 About the key functions The following table indicates the functions of the keys used for the operations of the amplifier information display screen JnitCompo Changes to the unit composition list screen refer to Section 26 6 5 Confirms the settings and returns to the function selection menu screen Terminates the servo amplifier monitor functions 26 13 26 13 26 OPERATIONS OF SERVO AMPLIFIER MONITOR SCREENS MELSEC GOT 26 6 4 ABS data display screen This section describes the display data of the ABS data display screen and the key functions displayed on the screen 1 About the display data MR J2S A 9600 bps Servo amp Monitor Absolute position data 1 Value of each motor edge pulse Command pulse value 1529942003 1529942003 Encoder data lt Current position gt lt Position at power loss gt Ab
86. Ladder monitor function specifications sss sese eee eee eee eee eee eee eee eee 3 1 3 1 1 PLC CPUS to be monitored sese 3 1 3 1 2 Access ranges to be monitored esset tette tete tete tete tete tete tete tete tete tete tee 3 1 3 2 System monitor function specifications sese eee eree ee eee eee eee 3 2 3 2 1 PLC CPUs to be monitored acia a e ia caet euer eR 3 2 3 2 2 Access ranges to be monitored sesenta te tette te tete te tette tete tete ard tete tette 3 2 3 2 3 Names of devices to be monitored sss nnne nre tnn nnnm nennt 3 2 3 2 4 Precautions when using the system monitor function sese es esse eee eee eee eee eee 3 2 3 3 Special module monitor function specifications sese eee eee eee ee eee eee eee 3 4 3 3 1 Access ranges to be monitored seen tete tete tete tete te tete ttn te tete tete tete tete tene 3 4 3 3 2 Special function modules to be monitored esse essen 3 4 3 3 3 Required memory spaces for use of special module monitor function sss 3 5 3 3 4 Precautions when using the special module monitor function eene 3 6 3 4 Network monitor function specifications sese nne 3 9 3 4 1 Network information to be monitored essere tnnt tnt tnter tnter tnter 3 9 3 4 2 Access ranges to be monitored eceeesesscceceeeeeeeeeecenenenenenenene
87. Limit Digital Value Simple Loop Contra 012345 012345 8 9 012345 10 012345 Code 012 Resolution Setting O 1 1 4000 2 1 8000 3 1 12000 SET pale MONIT END 0006 A1S63ADA Simple Loop Control Monitor Screen RESET Chg MENU 0007 0008 0009 Exec Enable 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Paint Channel 1 Channel 3 YLL Coordinate Coordinate control Mode 012345 4 5 0012 to 0025 012345 012345 012345 012345 012345 012345 0011 012345 012345 012345 012345 0010 012345 012345 012345 012345 000E 012345 012345 012345 012345 012345 012345 Normal Day AXL Bx2 C Dy AKL D Ke Coordinate Designation A B C Constant y CHS D A Digital value K1 CH1 A D Digital Value K2 CH2 A D Digital value WOMAN Constant A 012 45 Constant B 012 45 Constant C 012345 of Points Error Code 012 Resolution Setting 11 4000 2 1 8000 3 1 12000 Data MONIT A1SG3ADA Input output Monitor Screen Chg MENU Inputs X uts Y HW CH3 Output Loop Control d Error Reset CH3 Unlimited WOT Error 10 Conversion READY 11 Error Detection 12 CH3 Up Limit 13 CH3 Low Limit Loop Control 12 16 Resolution Resolution CHi Volt Current CH2 Volt Current MN CHS Volt Current D Resol Selection Resol Selection CH1 Volt Curren CH2 Yolt Curren CH3
88. MODULE MONITOR SCREEN 12 24 AJ71PT32 S3 A1SJ71PT32 S3 Module Monitor Screen Image AJTPT32 S3 I O Monitor Scr 140 Dedicated Mode RESET SETS Inputs K Duto Hardware Fault NE Test Link M Link Mode Error Detect Comms Error Link Comms Start FROM TO Response Faulty Sta Clear Y Error Reset AJTIPT32 583 Link Data Monitor Screen SET Data MONIT RESET Chg MENU n of Remote Stations 01 Communication Error Code 01 Remote I Units Card Data 16 Accumulative Faulty Station Detection 0 Normal 1 Error 1011011011011011 32 170110110110110110 48 330110110110110110 64 490110110110110110 16 Faultu Station Detection El 1011011011011011 32 170110110110110110 Card Data 00 No remote unit or no 48 330110110110110110 initial communication 54 490110110110110110 01 Input partial refresh Accumulative Input Error Detection or remate terminal 10 Output remote unit 0110110110110110 Remote Terminal Unit Faulty Station Input Faulty Error Detection for Partial Refresh AJT1PT32 53 Batch Refresh Data Monitor Screen RESET Che MENU SET Data MONIT Station Number Transmission Data 76543210765432 Receive Data 76543210765432 10765452 1076549210 4 1 8 5 12 9 16 13 20 17 24 21 26 25 32 29 36 33 40 37 44
89. Main Sub in GOT operations in each omes are ne Remote RUN STOP Forcibly changes the ACPU running status between RUN and STOP Others Machine language Performs a read or write operation to the ACPU memory in the read write machine language PC clear 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC GOT 3 6 Specifications of the motion monitor function POINTS Refer to Section 2 3 for the restrictions on the motion monitor function 3 6 1 PLC CPUs that can be monitored The motion controller CPUs that can be monitored are only the Q172CPU and Q173CPU Refer to Section 2 3 2 for details 3 6 2 Access ranges that can be monitored For the access ranges where the motion monitor function can be performed refer to Chapter 2 of the GOT A900 Series User s Manual GT Works Version 5 GT Designer Version 5 Compatible Connection 3 6 3 Precautions for use of the motion monitor function When using the motion monitor function use the motion controller CPU Q172CPU Q173CPU that satisfies the following conditions e Installed motion controller OS version OOE or later e Serial No K or later Q172CPU ver or later Q173CPU 3 6 4 Memory space necessary to use the motion monitor function The following indicates the memory spaces for motion monitor data The memory space needed to store data into the built in memory of the GOT is the same as the memory space needed to store data into the hard disk of the personal computer Mem
90. MstSta o E NETWK No 255 ak E b sume L imPLCNer teme ES f a cecal E IE dq y El E cur me Car gg eei E Com Status D Link P MTR CPU OP UNITS UNITA x war ERE iu Lf F i RET CPURUN Loop capud oe MELSECNET IO aros Y MELSECNET 2 ado dope e OSta RmtSta 64Sta LocSta ke ed NETWK No 1 at dea Rmt VO Net cCOM SA Mex jane PARE WALT Nin tome E E Cum Sime vun V J z gt Touch a box Select a menu item RET Select a box RET Detailed own station monitor screen Other station monitor screen TeSt Unite END END Es EN Ba FEES E10 END ation p Normal i ok Lal d OK Ll OK Lad OK gt 4 RLoop Normal e Ex E This Station s Master Eo T OMEN Non ER EN Wis Eis E 20 D Link Info RLoop Back Station c d ox Lud dl ok Lag OK d OK Total of L Sta 3 EE 24 EN og RR 29 Elo B ok gj 3 ok gl OK d OK Ela EN Ran SR as E 40 i ok Lad dl ox Lag OK d OK EB EE Bag EEso d OK Lol d OK gj OK EN sq EN Eso EE 60 OK di OK dd d OK Lal OK Ela E fees mea B OK ok Bi 16 1 16 1 16 SWITCHING THE NETWORK MONITOR SCREENS MEMO MELSEC GOT 17 USING THE NETWORK MONITOR SCREENS MEL
91. Number Station 65432107654321 1654321 16543210 Lus RECEIVE Data os4321016549210765432 1076543210 91 91 91 01 01 01 o1 oi 01101101201101102 101101101101101 011011012101101102101101101101101 01101101101101101101101101101101 01101101101101101101101101101101 01101101401101101101101101101101 01101101 101101101101101101101101 01101101 101101101101101101101101 01101101101101101101101101101101 01101101101101101101101101101101 01101101101101101101101101101101 01101101 101101101101101101101101 01101101101101101101101101101101 01101101101101101101101101101101 01101101101101101101101101101101 01101101101101101101101101101101 01101101101101101101101101101101 01101101101101101101101101101101 01101101101101101101101101101101 01101101101101104101101101101101 01101101101101101101101101101101 011011011011011011011011P1101101 01101101101101101101101101101101 01101101 10110110 1101101101101101 01101101101101101101101101101101 01101101101101101101101101101101 01101101101101101101101101101101 01101101101101101101101101101101 01101101101101101101101101101101 01101101101101101101101101101101 01101101101101101101101101101101 01101101101101101101101101101101 01101101101101101101101101101101 Station 0 Invalid Data Either Transmission or Receive Data valid AJ71PT32 53 140 Monitor Screen Extension Mode RESET Che meno END SET Data MONIT ES
92. O101 010101 01 010101 01 01 O1 POL C1 01 01010101 01 01010101 z 5 i 1060 1160 0424 0488 861 961 035D 03C1 862 962 035E 03C2 863 963 035F 03C2 864 to 869 0360 to 0365 964 to 969 03C4 to 0309 1064 to 1069 0428 to 042D 1164 to 1169 048C to 0491 ME Se A 12 69 12 69 12 OPERATION OF EACH SPECIAL MODULE MONITOR SCREEN MELSEC GOT Buffer memory address Screen Image No Am L 0110110110110110 amp Mo 0110110110110110 pe 0110110110110110 AAA 1 C E w 0110110110110110 w pap 5 0110110110110110 EH 0110110110110110 110110110110110 1011011011011 0110110110110110 CE 0110110110110110 alsom Le Le Le Le Le e e ll e Le e e KOS mo mo Mo 3 0110110110110110 0110110110110110 0110110110110110 0110110110110110 LE s Mo 0110110110110110 0110110110110110 0110110110110110 011011011011011 0110110110110110 T 0110110110110110 E E B E pia EP B I mie sa4oa7oo0 ores sseveso o1 224567502o oresiseresa i a LO ir E 0123456709 0123456789 0123456709 0123456789 12 70 1070 1170 042E 0492 1071 1171 042F 0493 1072 1172 0430 0494 1073 1173 0431 0495 874 974 036A 03CE 1074 1174 0432 0496 1077 1177 0
93. Operation Monitor Screen CH1 2 RESET Chg MENU Present 3 11 000B DUUM Count Enable Limit Switch Output Value 0123456783 Decremental Count Counter Function Start Counter Function 12 to 147 000C to 0093 Preset Command Count Value Ring Counter Counter Setting 12 to 147 000C to 0093 Sampling Periodic 5 Preset External Preset Latch counter Ring Counter 6 5 0005 Reset Ext Preset Sampling counter Value 0123456789 aaa Periodic pulse counter Error Reset Counter disable Pulse I P Mode 012345 Bn honed 8 0000 0001 Mor Error Ls D P 87654321 0 A Phase I P and la Error Code 012 Status decremental count No ofl No of Dogs ON CH 1 OFF Dogs 0002 0003 2 3 A Phase and B Phase moe ore UF 0006 0007 2 Phase I P X 1 1234567890012345678501 1239456789001234567890 3 2 Phase I P X 2 if 89 0008 0009 i i D D ob O 1 bi23456763001234567890 0 1 hi23456 78900123456 7890 G 8 2p p i 0 o 123456 78900123456 7890 123456789001234567890 4 2 Phase I P X 4 12345678900 1234567890 123456 78900123456 7890 l SET Data MONIT A1S061 Input Output Monitor Screen RESET Che MENU Inputs X Dutputs Y Count Enable Decrement Count Preset Command Ring Counter Counter Funct io LS Dutput Reset Preset Error Reset HOT Errar CH1 Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output
94. Refer to Section 23 3 1 Displays the history of errors that occurred in SFC programs from when the motion CPU was powered on or reset Refer to Section 23 3 2 Displays the history of errors eight latest errors that occurred on and after the leading edge of PLC ready M2000 Refer to Section 23 3 3 Displays the latest errors that occurred on the specified axis Refer to Section 23 3 4 Monitors the details of the positioning data set to any axis Refer to Section 23 3 5 Monitors the servo motor servo amplifier Refer to Section 23 3 6 Displays the history of encoder present values servo command values and monitor present values of the ABS axis at servo amplifier power on off or at home position return Refer to Section 23 3 7 Not displayed when the A95 GOT is used 23 3 23 OPERATIONS OF VARIOUS MOTION MONITOR SCREENS MELSEC GOT 23 3 1 Display data and key functions of present value monitor screen 23 4 This section explains the display data of the present value monitor screen and the key functions displayed on screen 1 Displayed data 3 Mon Present Value Monitor Lien eno PC READY M2000 Ax Feed PV SIR BROT VER poeu removimso7a gt A All Ax Servo ON M2O42 All Ax SY ON Acpt M2049 1 1313409 O O 2 PLS Cx e o 3 PLS O O zv P zetting M3079 Module Fault Det M2047 O Sustem setting ERR M2041 4 PLS O O WoT Error mso7a JOG Simul Etart M2094B
95. SET TIME CLEAN MON INFO OSCOPY UP SET If ROM BIOS is not installed an error message is displayed Touch the END button and install the S T ROM BIOS H version or later HORD CHECK MELSEC Qn LADERHONITOR 2 The key window is displayed Set the network No station No CPU No 1 of the applicable PLC CPU with the following keys 4 K Select the input area Alphanumeric Input the network No and the station No o p o p p x A E AC Clear all input data to the applicable area E SE E lt gt DEL Clear one character at the cursor position MAE zj A Y ll Defi E Define the input ARES eee A P 1 E Designate the network No the station No and CPU No 1 of the applicable PLC CPU For CC Link system Network No 0 Station No 0 mask station For network system Network No 1 to 255 self loop Station No 1 to 64 control station 1 to 64 normal station For Ethernet connection 2 Network No 1 to 239 Station No 1to64 M For multi CPU system CPU No 0 to 4 CPU number Lone 1 Displayed for MELSEC Q ladder monitor only 2 The monitor target must be preset using GT Designer 53 8 Cine For MELSEC A ladder monitor specify the network rogram Program 1999 06 10 17 40 C Line Rm pue n ee ee number station number set on GT Desig
96. Section 6 1 for differences between the display screens 6 1 Display screens The ladder monitor display screen varies with the used GOT and target PLC CPU 1 MELSEC A FX ladder monitor Used GOT PLC read screen Ladder monitor screen READ STATE READ SELECTION PARAM PROG COMMENT CMNT EX CMNT SUB PROGRAM1 SUB PROGRAM A4U SUB PROGRAM3 A4U NON SETTING NETWORK NO 0 PLC NO FE lt gt SWITCH gt TU SEL J SET D144 D146 D148 D150 80 10 17 1 1G Sequence program Max 8 lines 1 line Max 11 contacts displayed When the display screen type is the EL the Print Screen and Cancel Print keys are not displayed A985 A97 960GOT Exit Ladder Break pI 2 MELSEC QnA ladder monitor Used GOT PLC read screen Ladder monitor screen PLC 1 NETWORKNO O ST READ SELECTION D142 H L DRIVE PLC RAM Di44 H Tupe Size Date Time Title D146 H PROG PROG PROG PROG PROG PROG COMM COMM COMM PROCESS COMM 5248 2001 04 06 09 49 5196 2001 04 06 09 49 5192 2001 04 06 09 50 5396 2001 04 06 09 50 5448 2001 04 06 09 50 5192 2001 04 06 09 50 304 2001 04 06 09 50 164 2001 04 06 09 50 524 2001 04 06 09 50 214 2001 04 06 09 50 Base process line Base setup line Product carry line Process test line Operation monitor system Main Process test line Product carry line Base setup line Base process line SM1038 M800 Lir
97. Set when seconds to start communication with the PLC CPU after power on of the GOT Factory set to 16 seconds for the GL series or 1 second for other than the GL series e Send message delay Set the waiting time from when the GOT has received data from the PLC CPU until the GOT send the next data to the PLC CPU Factory set to Omsec 6 When communication driver for SIEMENS PLC connection is installed e Baud rate Choose the transmission speed 4800 9600 19200 38400 Factory set to 19200bps e Adapter address Specify the MPI address on PROFIBUS assigned to the HMI adaptor connected to the GOT Factory set to 2 Host FF address Specify the MPI address on PROFIBUS assigned to the HMI adaptor connected to the GOT The specified PLC CPU is the host when monitor device setting is made on GT Designer For details of monitor device setting refer to the help of GT Designer Factory set to 2 7 When communication driver for Allen Bradley PLC connection is installed e Baud rate Choose the transmission speed 4800 9600 19200 38400 Factory set to 19200bps e Adapter address Set the address on the DH 485 network assigned to the HMI adaptor connected to the GOT This setting is required only when multiple CPUs are connected to the GOT Set the same address as the DH 485 Node Address specified for the adaptor The DH 485 Node Address specified should not overlap the Node Address of the PLC on the DH 485 network Factory s
98. Setting the operating environment of the GOT Setup After changing any of the items in Setup touching automatically resets the GOT and shows the monitor screen 1 Display screen The display screen differs with the GOT used GOT Screen Example Used P BUZZER VOLUME NONE SHORT LONG OUTSIDE SPEAKER OFF ON SCREEN SAVE TIME OO MIN 0 FREE SCREEN SAVE LIGHT OFF ON LANGUAGE 0455 EINGLISH A97 GOT MICRO Baud rate 4800 9600 19200 A960GOT MICRO COM FORM FORM 1 FORM 2 T gt SELECT CHANGE BUZZER VOLUME NONE HUMAN SENSER Invalid Effective OUTSIDE SPEAKER Ma oN SENSER DETECT 10 MAX 10 SCREEN SAVE TIME 0 MIN 0 FREE SENSER OFF DELAY 00 MIN 10 SEC SCREEN SAVE LIGHT OFF LANGUAGE Haz E QBUS STAGE No T STAGE 1777 QBUS SLOT No sLOT 0 9 T SELECT CHANGE Page 2 2 T SELECT CHANGE A985GOT CV A CH2 CH3 CLOCK PHASE 000 E i SIGNAL PAL i VIDEO WIDTH 120 H Position B O00 L R U COLOR BALANCE 0x 100 V Position 000 DOWN uP SEU TES Ke d RGB FULL L UP L DH R UP R DH NONE COLOR POKER 0x toox CLOSE KET L a E Page 8 3 T l SELECT CHANGE Page 3 3 1 TRB j Hum BB B This screen example assumes that the communication driver Bus Q has been installed A video window channel etc
99. Speed Integral Comp 20 rad sec Notch Filter Not Used ck AAs cs led Notch Filter Not Used Feed Forward Gain i pss Feed Forward Gain 1 1 wa wu E Change auto tuning from 1 to 2 Parameter setting is changed No Auto 1 By performing write operation from the parameter setting screen write the servo parameter setting basic parameters adjustment parameters to the motion controller CPU 2 When changing any servo parameter setting enter the necessary numeral or option number from the automatically displayed key window to change the servo parameter setting and write it to the motion controller CPU 1 13 1 13 1 1 8 Features of the servo amplifier monitor functions You can perform various monitor functions parameter setting changes test operations and others for the servo amplifier connected to the GOT The features of the servo amplifier monitor functions are described below 1 Servo amplifier status is displayed in real time detailed description Section 26 4 Section 26 5 The status and alarm definition of the servo amplifier connected to the GOT can be listed in real time Display example A975GOT Monitor Alarm display diae irae Print Lists the monitor data of the servo amplifier Displays the definition number name occurrence time Refer to Section 26 4 1 occurrence factor of the alarm currently occurring in the servo amplifier It also allows the alarm to be reset Refer to Section 26 5
100. W 112 K123 E 113 LD X0000 114 gt N0P 115 NOP 3 For commands other than above MELSEC GOT Input the SP_key between the command and the device the source data and the destination data Ex 1 When FMOV K 2 DO K5 is input oa w 2 M3 M MM M G On oooz 1 1 1 1 v 22 vu F Lo MOV hi Kia a 2 SP Lc H SP GO Ex 2 When OUT T1 K10 is input w 1 a 1 1 1 2 a K D x0000 0 0 OUT gt T gt 1 gt SP KP 1 20 3 20 3 20 OPERATION OF EDITING SCREEN FOR EACH LIST MELSEC GOT Ex 3 When MC N3 M5 is input W 115 MC N3 2 115 M5 120 NOP 121 NOP LD gt K f 1 f o f SP D 1 f o H Go w 130 K 10 2 130 D10 13 B KN 0 p 1836 NOP Ex 5 When ANDD H7FFFF D20 is input w 130 K 10 2 130 D10 135pNOP 136 NOP Fe Fo FSP D T 4 Handling of devices M L and S Devices M L and S in the Test Monitor Write and Insert modes change the display depending on the set parameters If LD LO is input for the parameter setting of MO to 999 and L1000 to L2047 the result is LD MO 20 4 20 4 20 OPERATION OF EDITING SCREEN FOR EACH LIST MELSEC G
101. WSE Posit Start Feed Position 01234567890 Present Value 01234567890 eee Forward Start Reverse Start hctual Position 01234567890 Travel Dist Brud Jog Start 4 af Rev Jog Start Error Counter Vel Pos Restart 5 dros LT OE ress P1 01234567890 01234567890 Velocity 012345 PLS s 01234567890 Pog Velocity 012945 PLS s zero Rtn RequestPos Address P2 012345 zero Rtn Start 7 Zero Rtn Comple Pos Velocity V1 012345 PLS s 8 01234567890 Torque Limit otor Speed 012345 rom In position Serva OFF YZP Switchover WOT Error E Error Detection DS TIL V2 012345 PLS S otor Current 012345 Pos Pattern D Regen Level 012345 4P Mode 0 0 Pos 1 Vel ax Torque 012345 amp Torque Control Mode 0 Test Mode 0110110110110110 r fode 1 012 2 0123 3 0123 87654321 0110110110110110 B Switch 10 11 12 19 14 AD OD Zero Return Data Monitor Screen SET Data MONIT RESET Che menu END UM Posit Start WR Forward Start reverse Start Fud Jog Start Rev Jog start B velsPos Restart Posit Complete zero Rtn Start zero Rtn Comple In postion ils servo OFF UM v P Switchover WDT Error Error Detection zero Rtn Request Feed Position 2 01234567890 Present Value 01234567890 Actual Position 3 01234567890 Travel Dist 01234567890 Error Counter 4 01234567890 elocity 0
102. Yolt Curren Offset Gain Set 12 16 12 OPERATION OF EACH SPECIAL MODULE MONITOR SCREEN MELSEC GOT 12 10 A1S64AD Module Monitor Screen Image SET Data MONIT AIS64AD Operation Monitor Screen RESET Che meno END Channel No 4321 0 A D Conversion Disabled Setting 0110110110110110 1 AD Conversion Enabled Sample Average Time Count Samp le Average Time Count Chann No 4321 4321 0 Sampling Le Count Average Setting 0110110110110110 1 Averaging 1 Time Average Time Count Input Status Input Status Input Status X Value Resolution 1 Resolution 2 Resolution 3 Channel 1 01234 0123 5 0123 5 0123 5 Channel 2 01234 0123 5 0123 5 0123 5 Channel 3 01234 0123 5 0123 5 0123 5 Channel 4 01234 0123 5 0123 5 0123 5 4 5 Error Code Resolution Setting 0 1 174000 2 17 8000 3 1712000 Data MONIT A156460 Input Output Monitor Screen Chg MENU Inputs X uts Y HOT Error Flag READY Error Flag IE Error Reset 10to 13 000A to 000D 0014 _ _ rv p Resalutian 1 1 4000 2 1 8000 3 1712000 zac cori Input 3 50 100 50 10 50 100 Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 3 Channel 4 Resolution Setting m HOT Error 12 17 12 17 12 OP
103. al to a ff HE o mj s 0 09 12 32 12 OPERATION OF EACH SPECIAL MODULE MONITOR SCREEN 12 21 AD71 Module Monitor AD71 Positioning Data Screen Image Monitar Screen Data Che MENU MONIT END F M bade ON Batt ErrX Hi Error NOM E 01234567 O nt E 012 x 01 012 02 012 03 012 04 012 05 012 06 O12 07 012 08 012 039 012 10 012 11 012 12 012 13 012 14 012 gt 15 012 16 012 17 012 18 012 19 012 20 012 01 D12 D12 012 012 012 ole 012 012 b12 ULZ 012 012 012 012 ole O12 ole 012 012 012 MELSEC GOT Buffer memory address NEUEN on T ons O 42 ooa se 0156 a ERE EE REM 44 002C 344 0158 2 zers secs 7s 1007 SETS RESET Data Che MONIT MENU END H Prosit Start ero Request Zero Start Zero Complete Fud Jog Start i Rev Jog Start d stop Pos Started HDT Err Man Pulser Batt Err Hi Error y Hi AD 1 Zero Return Data Monitor Screen HCode Errcodel 012 4 Y Axis Ole Pt 01234567 01234567 01234567 012395 creep speed Tian m 012345 012 01 83 83 67 67 01 X Axis Zero 01101101101 Y Axis zero 01101101101 0 Fwd X Axis
104. an incorrect key eT 20 6 20 2 Basic operation of list Clit ziaz isai a TaTari a TAE a3 paa TEA THAER Ttaran 20 7 20 2 1 Reading sequence program cnica 20 7 20 2 2 Changing overwriting commaxnd eee 20 8 20 2 3 Adding inserting command esses senes tete tete tete te tete tete tete tete tete tete tene 20 9 20 24 Deleting COM N eee ete Tore pU Ope OR 20 10 20 2 5 Using Help tineto O 20 11 20 3 Operation procedure list of list edit sss eenn 20 13 20 31 Gommionoperaliori z 2 2 raa daa ie gaa ie at a a a eene 20 13 20 3 2 Operation in Write mode W sese 20 13 20 3 3 Operation in Read mode R noianu enaar aeaaaee adeuda adea tete ae ee tette teen tht tate aaar 20 14 20 3 4 Operation in Insert mode sss essere essere 20 14 20 3 5 Operation in Delete D mode sss essen 20 14 20 3 6 Operation in Parameter mode PL seene 20 15 20 3 7 Operation in Other modes Olsen 20 16 21 ERROR DISPLAY AND CORRECTIVE ACTIONS FOR LIST EDIT 21 1t021 6 21 1 Error detected with the list editor unction ssssssssesses sese sees ee eers ereenn enen 21 1 21 2 Error ot PEG GP s acaso meten t ce m o ce po t ie a A emt 21 4 21 3 Error using list editor function on the link system sese eee eee eee eee eee eee eee ee eee eee eee 21 5 MOTION MONITOR FUNCTION 22 OPERATION ROCEDURES FOR MOTION MONITOR FUNCTION 22 11022 4 22 1 Operation procedures before starting motion mon
105. are used on the other station data link status monitor screen Key Function Returns to the own station monitor screen executed 17 13 Exits the other station data link status monitor screen and returns to the previous monitor screen where the network monitor function was 17 13 17 USING THE NETWORK MONITOR SCREENS MELSEC GOT 17 3 4 Display contents and keys functions other station parameter status monitor This section describes the other station parameter status monitor screen and the function of on screen keys 1 Display contents When the A985 97 960GOT is used When the A95 956WGOT is used The display details are the same as the ones on the A985 97 960GOT Disp lay example S Revorsing part is P SR Reversing part is Bl connecting station H JE an abnormal station No Contents of Display 1 Station numbers are shown up to the maximum number of linked stations 2 Any station whose parameters are monitored is highlighted on screen 3 Any station that stays in an abnormal condition is highlighted on screen 4 A station specified as a reserved station is treated as a station that stays in a normal condition Not highlighted wh
106. aves word at start up registered in the ACPU Syo Mode selection Switching of valid key Basic Mode key READ PARAM SHIFT gt Mode key WRITE OTHERS Select the mode Switch the valid key function indicated at the upper lower part of the key by a user operation Action for Perform the operation for a Mode key or SHIFT j Mode ke incorrect input incorrect key input Ea y Operation of command help function 1 Perform program display gt HELP gt 1 Input the capital letter Perform operation with the operation in the Write Insert mode of the command Help function command acid Input the capital gt Input the corresponding GO specification letter of the command command number Display of Display the comment Perform program display operation HELP Comment stored in the ACPU in the Write Read Insert Delete mode Command code Input the command code Command gt GO only only Command code and 1 device Other than above command key input Other than above device key input Command input operation Input the command code and 1 device Command SP gt Device Device No Input the command other than above with t
107. board as required Hence installing the extended function OS into the GOT decreases the memory space for monitor screen data storage available for the user If the free space is insufficient fit the extension memory board to increase the memory space a List of extended function and option function OSs installed N for llation Expanded Function OS Name Space Necessary Tor Alaro Remarks in Terms of Memory Count Systm monitor L MELSEC A ladder monitor MELSEC QnA ladder monitor Only one may MELSEC Q ladder monitor be installed MESES FX ladder monitor E c ee SEAS SSA TENEN Special module recipe sound ooo 00000 1 00000 gt Network monitor oo gt List editor MELSECA ao gt ECT o 02 o a SN ESC printer bar code report CSV file external key input PCL printer bar code report CSV file external key input ESC printer bar code report CSV file proximity I O PCL printer bar code report CSV file proximity I O ESC printer bar code report CSV file video RGB input PCL printer bar code report CSV file video RGB input Only one may Chinese Big 5 printer bar code report CSV file external key input be installed Chinese Big 5 printer bar code report CSV file proximity I O Chinese Big 5 printer bar code report CSV file video RGB input Chinese GB printer bar code report CSV file external key input Chinese GB printer bar code report CSV file proximity I O Chinese GB print
108. brightness adjustment screen For details of the adjustment method on the brightness adjustment screen refer to section 4 12 POINTS e If the OS is not installed on the GOT items are displayed on the system monitor but they cannot be selected e If the following conditions for use of the corresponding functions are not satisfied the special function module monitor ladder monitor network monitor motion monitor and servo amplifier monitor items are displayed in the utility menu but cannot be selected a A985 97 960GOT 956WGOT e The memory board is loaded in the GOT s The extended function OS is installed in the GOT b A95 GOT e The compatible model A95 GOT BD M3 is used e The extended function OS is installed in the GOT e If the GOT is connected to the PLC CPU without clock function items are displayed on the clock window but they cannot be selected 4 On screen error messages Message Corrective Action Can t be selected e The OS is not installed on the GOT e Install the OS When system monitor The memory board is not installed e Install the memory board special module in the A985 97 960 960WGOT in the monitor ladder e The A95 GOT used is other than A985 97 960 960W GOT monitor motion the A95 GOT BD M3 e Use the A95 GOT BD monitor servo amplifier e The GOT is connected to a PLC M3 monitor or clock setting CPU without a clock function Replace the CPU with is selected one with a cl
109. com pulse multiplu denon 1 verify 5 In posit ion range 100 pulse 6 Position control gain 1 41 rad s REAN 7 Pos com acc dec time cons 3 ns 8 Internal speed command 1 100 r min 3 Internal speed command 2 500 r min v LCS 10 Internal speed command 3 1000 r min 11 Acceleration time constant 0 ms default 12 Deceleration time constant 10000 ms 13 S pattern acc dec time cons 0 ms Cycle amplifier power to initiate changes Parameter setting screen 26 16 26 16 26 OPERATIONS OF SERVO AMPLIFIER MONITOR SCREENS MELSEC GOT 26 7 1 Password entry operation procedure The following gives the servo parameter changing password input operation procedure MR J2S A 2600 bps Servo amp Monitor Pr Name Value a change x Cycle amplifier power to initiate cl 1 Features e If the characters entered match a password the Parameter Setting screen appears e f the password does not match the error message appears Touching El returns to the function selection menu screen e Numerical numbers and alphabets A to F can be used for a password 2 Procedure a To enter a password follow these steps e Touch 0 to 9 and A to F to enter a password e Touch to confirm the password entered To correct the password entered touch DEL to delete wrong characters and then enter correct characters aga
110. command on the key 2 Input the alphanumeric keys corresponding to each character of command sequentially 3 Select and input the command to be used from the Help function Command input procedures for 1 and 2 above are as follows For command input procedure 3 from the Help function refer to 20 2 5 When the command is input the input details are displayed at the 4th line the bottom line on the display In the following description the input of SP key may be omitted when a blank space between the input command and the cursor position is automatically inserted Refer to the example in each description 1 For command code only 1 When the command available on the keyboard is input Command GO Ex When END is input Ww 112 0 U T T 0 2 112 K123 113 NO0P 114 NOP END GO Ww 1 2 K123 a 1 3 END 1 4 gt NOP 1 5 NOP 2 When the command not available on the keyboard is input Ex When FOR KS is input W Y 002 2 1 G Q G wn 0 Z Z ZG oooc vvv SET i F b 0 Hf R P SPL k 5 f GO 20 KE Z mh ooxo TUN G Q O NA v zz 20 2 20 2 20 OPERATION OF EDITING SCREEN FOR EACH LIST 2 For command code and device 1 Command gt SP DEVICE DEVICE No gt GO Ex When LD XO is input W 112 OUT TO t 112 K 123 113 NOP 114 NOP LD Le x f o Le co
111. is turned on Alert alarm 2 is turned on Alert alarm 3 is turned on Alert alarm 4 is turned on The heater disconnection alarm is detected The loop disconnection is detected The current error when the output is off is detected 12 49 12 49 12 OPERATION OF EACH SPECIAL MODULE MONITOR SCREEN MELSEC GOT Screen Image No CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 1 32 oo20 64 ooso 96 ooo 128 0080 La se foma oro os sol 128 foo EIE ARTE ios RESET che menu END SEMESTER ERR Input range Measurement unit E Dec point position 0 alla Pro Val Dec P P 0012345 Set Val Dec P P 012345 Man Val O 100 PV Dec P P 0 0123 5 SV Dec P P 0 0123 5 QD EMEN ET m S Mee m m S S 37 ooes eo o045 101 ooes 133 008s S E E SSS Set Val Dec P P 0 012345 012345 012345 012345 SV Dec P P 0 9123 5 1 0123 5 0123 5 0123 5 L L L D Mode setting o1 oi Dutput 012 4 X m Limiter Tes 012 4 11 Alert occurrence flag CT selection o o00 o owoo o oooo o lona 0029 73 0049 105 0069 63 00A3 163 00A3 163 00A3 15 57 16 25 oor 2 Expanded graph Normal Graph 2000 0 6 38 16 E e
112. ladder monitoring 3 Touch Menu and then select Fact Sea from among creen Prnt options that appear on screen If you touch Fact Sea without executing the ladder monitor Min function operation changes depending on the type of the ladder monitor used For MELSEC A ladder monitor The No MONITORING message appears and the following operation cannot be STEP 67 932 0010 uovctas Do Menu performed Operation is enabled after m execution of monitor aire For MELSEC Q ladder monitor Monitor is executed Pane pee Ee ma automatically and the following operation is enabled After termination of a defect search monitor stops PERO automatically with the search Specify a device name Specify a device number result retained uu a 4 Another dialog box where you can specify a device name or X LY lM LIS E 8 9 A B 4 N z S SISI S a DED ya device number is displayed on screen Specify any contact Dee de Ae a of which coil is not turned ON as a search device Example Specify M120 as the search device j KA Used to select a data entry field Alphanumeric Used to enter a device name o
113. link connection is enabled for the systems of the following combinations PLC CPU used Computer link serial communication module used QCPU Q mode QJ71C24 QCPU A mode A1SJ71UC24 QCPU A mode AJ71QC24 A1SJ71QC24 QCPU A mode AJ71UC24 A1SJ71UC24 2 When using MELSECNET II connection MELSECNET B connection The special function module on the base of the master station can be monitored Cannot be monitored when the master station is the QnACPU The special function modules on the bases of local stations cannot be monitored n a system configuration having remote I O stations special function modules cannot be monitored 8 When using MELSECNET 10 connection The special function modules on the bases of the control station and normal stations can be monitored Cannot be monitored when the stations are the QnACPU n a system configuration having remote I O stations special function modules cannot be monitored 4 When using CC Link connection remote device station The special function modules cannot be monitored b When using CC Link connection intelligent device station via G4 The special function modules on the bases of the master and local stations can be monitored n a system configuration having remote I O stations special function modules cannot be monitored 6 When using Ethernet connection The special function module on the base of the PLC CPU assigned the IP address can be moni
114. monitored 4 Can t monitor T C set values 5 Can t change V or Z current values 6 If you modified the set value for T C using the ladder monitor test function you need to repeat the PC readout procedure to enable the display of the modification 7 Monitor is disabled when the connection target CPU is the AnU type MELSECNET 10 network card is fitted 2 BEFORE BEGINNING OPERATION MELSEC GOT c Connection with FXCPU third party PLC or microcomputer Usable A Partly restricted X Unusable Ref FXCPU l Functions Section E Other PLC connection Microcomputer connection CPU direct connection Utility function Ladder Sequence program monitoring monitor using ladder signals 6 3 1 la Decimal and hexadecimal display Secti y of word device values EP hing 6 3 8 Device comment display l Section Changing of device values 6 3 4 Monitoring of current values by Section pre registering monitor devices 9 2 Monitoring of n points of current Section values subsequent to specified 93 Monitoring of m points of current ues set values contact points Section and coils subsequent to specified 9 4 device Monitoring of x points of current values subsequent to specified Section buffer memory of specified special 9 5 System monitor Setting resetting of bit device function Changing of current value for buffer memory of word device iti Changing of current value for T C Section i can be used while
115. monitoring 9 6 T C Changing of set value for T C can be used while monitoring T C Changing of device values using Section quick test 9 6 2 Device comment display Section 9 1 2 Quick test Decimal and hexadecimal display of word device values and buffer memory values Special module Monitoring of buffer memory of N l Ch 11 x monitor function special module on special screen Network monitor Monitoring of network status of R D S List editor function Sequence program in the ACPU is Ch 19 x list edited Monitoring of servo related items Such as current values and Vis RETE Kc x x x setting values T Servo amplifier monitor servo operation 1 Clock setting cannot be made when the GOT is connected with the PLC CPU that does not have the clock function FXO FXON FX1 FX2NC FXOS The FX2 and FX2C allows clock setting to be made only when the cassette for real time clock is used 2 Clock setting cannot be made when the GOT is connected with the PLC CPU that does not have the clock function 3 You can set the clock function only when you are using A9GT RS2T which includes a clock element 4 T C set values and coils cannot be monitored 2 BEFORE BEGINNING OPERATION MELSEC GOT 3 If a system program OS for the expanded or option functions has been installed the following space is required in the GOT built in internal memory to store user created monitor screen data Hence add the memory
116. motion monitor function MELSEC GOT Installation of the motion monitor function OS or downloading of motion monitor data into the built in memory of the GOT using GT Designer enables the servo monitoring and parameter setting of the motion controller CPU Q172CPU Q173CPU The following are the features of the motion monitor function 1 Various servo monitor data can be displayed on multiple monitor screens refer to Section 23 3 for details The motion monitor function has multiple monitor screens on which you can monitor servo data in a variety of patterns Display examples Present Value Monitor Present Value Monitor MJ ec remoy mzo00 Ax Feed PY SHY BROT SHER eed EEES oa aero HN CHEBAES Cm 1313405 s D ov nemo DE PLS SFC ERR Detect M2033 BY P Betting M3073 Module Fauit Det Mz0a7 System Setting ERR M2041 PLS PLS WOT Enror ms073 soc simui start mzoaa L zn debug made Mzos8 D in testomode M3075 PLS PLS PLS S avzz R V CHG Request Mz0aa S cavez r v CHO status Mzoaa mvzz R v CHE Error Mzoas avez pur 07 SN Warni avzz v Mode Cont op PLS v Monitors and displays the feed current values and actual current values of all running axes Refer to Section 23 3 3 Positioning Monitor Positioning Monitor Real Data Item 1Ax MON Val Status Feed PV 359054 PLS LJPOS StartCompletion Stop C
117. of the signal being monitored X or Y Displays the number and status of the input or output signal Displays keys that are used with the operation of the monitor screen shown in 2 Touch input 2 Key functions The chart below shows the functions of the keys that are used with the Monitor Screen operation Function Monitoring ends and display returns to the screen where the special module monitor function was begun The current monitoring ends and returns to the system configuration screen 13 2 13 2 14 ERROR DISPLAY AND HANDLING WITH SPECIAL MODULE MELSEC GOT CHAPTER14 ERROR DISPLAY AND HANDLING WITH SPECIAL MODULE MONITORING 14 1 The following chart shows the error messages that may be displayed when operating the special module monitor and the method of handling them Error message Can not Communication Description Communication could not be established with the PLC CPU Method of Handling 1 To try the operation again touch Retry When the operation is retried the error message disappears and monitoring resumes automatically so no action is required If monitoring is not resumed for a long period of time however check the following 1 Connections between the 14 PLC CPU and the GOT disconnected or cut cables 2 Has an error occurred in the PLC CPU Etc 14 1 14 ERROR DISPLAY AND HANDLING WITH SPECIAL MODULE MEMO MELSEC GOT
118. operation of testing a bit device word device or special module buffer memory of the PLC CPU is explained in this section 9 6 1 Basic operation The operation procedure for testing when monitoring with the system monitor function is shown below See Sec 9 7 Operation procedure When monitoring with the system monitor function display any monitor screen ni When a screen other than the monitor screen is displayed display any monitor screen according to the explanatory section for each monitor function vt When Device Monitor screen is displayed DEVICE MONITOR TEST MENU FORM SET NETWK No 0 STATION FF D 15 2147483648 DW D 10 32767 X 001 e 25 O SE tl When you touch CANCEL the display moves returns S to the previous monitor screen Display device setting menu screen DEVICE MONITOR TEST MENU FORM SET NETWK No 0 STATION FF DEVICE DELETE ALL CLR TEST Ad When you touch CANCEL the display moves returns to the previous monitor screen Display test menu screen DEVICE MONITOR MENU FORM SET NETWK No 0 STATION FF SET RST VALUE16 BM VAL16 SET VAL VALUE32 BM VAL32 9 OPERATION OF THE VARIOUS SYSTEM MONITOR SCREENS MELSEC GOT 1 1 Touch either depending on test contents SET RST SET RST set reset bit device Sel
119. other station monitor menu screen and the function of on Screen keys The menu screen for the other station monitor is displayed by touching a module number displayed on the own station monitor screen The menu screen provides many options for the other station monitor 1 Display contents When the A985 97 960GOT is used When the A95 956WGOT is used The display details are the same as the ones on the A985 97 960GOT Display example my up E Com Status D Link P MTR CPU OP Another Sta Menu a S m m mw qu CPURUN Loop s c COM STA D Link P MTR CPU OP o CPU RUN Loop Touch Key Contents of Display Switches to a monitor screen that shows the communications status of other stations Switches to a monitor screen that shows the data link status of other stations Switches to a monitor screen that shows the parameter status of other stations Switches to a monitor screen that shows the CPU action status of other stations Switches to a monitor screen that shows the CPU RUN status of other stations Switches to a monitor screen that shows the loop status of other stations This is not selectable when connected to a MELSECNET B or MELSECNET Il local station 1 Communications Status 2 Data Link 3 Parameters 4 CPU Action 5 CPU RUN 6 Loop 2 Key Functions The table belo
120. sec v Speed Ctrl Gain2 817 rad sec Speed Integral Comp 20 rad sec Notch Filter Not Used Feed Forward Gain L 2 Key functions The following indicates the functions of the keys used for operation of the parameter setting screen Function Used to change the servo parameter setting of the selected item Used to choose the servo parameter setting item Used to change the axis whose parameter setting will be made Used to return to the system configuration screen Used to end the parameter setting and return to the screen that was being displayed when the motion monitor function was started 23 14 23 14 23 OPERATIONS OF VARIOUS MOTION MONITOR SCREENS MELSEC GOT 23 4 2 Parameter setting operation The following describes the procedure of changing the setting of the Auto Tuning item as an example of parameter setting operation Auto Tuning EI 1 Choose the item whose parameter will be set with Gain Adjustment Auto Tuning Model SV Response Setting 5 the A Y key and touch the key Load Inertia Ratio 7 0 To Motor Position Ctrl Gaini 35 rad sec A Speed Ctrl Gaint 177 rad sec Position Ctrl Gain2 35 rad sec v Speed Ctrl Gain2 817 rad sec Speed Integral Comp 20 rad sec Notch Filter Not Used Feed Forward Gain TZ 1 EHE crouch J A speed 2 As the parameter setting window appears enter Gain Adjustment Auto Tuning Mode1 the parameter setting data
121. station for MELSECNET CC Link connections the following operations will always be required 1 Touch NETPCNo to display the window shown in 2 2 Touch Alphanumeric to specify the network No and PLC station No Alphanumeric Enter the network No and PLC station No El s Select the input area A ee Set the area value In the case of data link systems In the case of network systems NETWK NO 0 NETWK NO 0 Host loop STATION FF Host 1 to 255 Specified loop 0 Master station STATION FF Host 1 to 64 Local station 0 Station number of management station 1 to 64 Normal station For Ethernet connection 1 CC Link system NETWK NO 1 to 239 NETWK NO 0 STATION 1 to 64 STATION 0 master station 1 The monitor target must be preset using GT Designer For ACPU monitor specify the network number station number set on GT Designer Refer to the help of GT Designer for details of the monitor target setting for Ethernet connection When the setting is finished the system configuration of the specified station is displayed See Sec 12 1 6 for operations which come after these operations 12 OPERATION OF EACH SPECIAL MODULE MONITOR SCREEN MELSEC GOT 12 1 3 Composition of PC Information screen and key functions only when QCPU Q mode is used This section describes the structure of the PC Information screen that is displayed by specifying the QCPU Q mo
122. than the GOT the sequence program can be simply edited Example of command change in the sequence program LD X0 Change LD X0 OUT Y20 MOV DO DI LD Xi LD Xi 5 2 Interlock with the ladder monitor function only when A985 97 960GOT is used The list edit window can be started from the ladder monitor screen with a single touch The list can be edited while viewing the ladder The list can also be displayed from the step line displayed on the ladder monitor STEP 12345 18374 M999 K 1234 D100 Jer n Misa 183 ANOS K123 Bioo EDITOR 198 MOVK1 INSERT a wam baerd _ JoTHeR D162 D167 90 1 Exit pucro Mon Menu List Cans Fs Print Screen 3 The list edit screen can be recorded The hard copy function allows recording the edit screen of the list program 4 Access to other station is available The sequence program of the PLC CPU in other station can be list edited 5 Useful help functions Help functions for read write insert and delete are available on the interactive menu selection system Simple operation is facilitated 6 Comment for each device can be displayed Comment of the device at the cursor position can be displayed W 9 OUT M50 2 10 MOV 10 gt D1 Current value Comment of D1 is displayed 1 11 1 OVERVIEW 1 1 7 Features of the
123. the 4th line only will shift by a single character position to the left each time the user touches a key Each character that goes out of the display area by the left shift operation is retained in the memory The user has entered DMOVP K2147483647 D1000 8 Numerical display The following describes the display of numerical values in devices and of constants in a program input by the user Note however that only some examples are shown For details see Chapter 20 Example D1000 1 Display in decimal format Only significant digits are displayed with zero suppression M D1000 16495 2 Display in hexadecimal format Four digits are displayed without zero suppression M D1000 H423 1 3 Display in octal format Six digits are displayed without zero suppression M D1000 0041061 4 ASCII format A numerical value in the specified device is read in byte units and converted into associated character codes If a value fell outside the ranges 20H through 7FH and AOH through DFH dots will appear M D1000 ascii B 1 9 Display of an error message An error message will appear on the 4th line of the display area If an error message appears perform corrective action as described in Chapter 21 An error message on the display is cleared when you press any key Then the display resumes the state before the appearance of the error message 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC GOT 3 5 6 List of List editor functio
124. the key alternates the monitor item between the feed present value and actual present value Only in the real mode Actual PV Used to return to the monitor menu screen Used to end the present value monitoring and return to the screen that was being displayed when the motion monitor function was started Used to change the displayed axis No Displayed only for Q173CPU monitoring 23 4 23 OPERATIONS OF VARIOUS MOTION MONITOR SCREENS MELSEC GOT 23 3 2 Display data and key functions of SFC error history screen This section explains the display data of the SFC error history screen and the key functions displayed on screen 1 Displayed data SFC Error History M D Program No Err H M SFC F G K BKNo Code 7 24 SFC F G K Block fit a stat sy am pu is OFF initial processing the ap is 10 50 z f 5 1004 Mt yet installed a sy err ocorred the cable is faulty 7 24 SFC F G K Block 10 50 maed 4 Coma speed outside the rage 7 24 SFC F G K Block 10 50 22 906 Te unused axis ws started 7 24 SFC F G K Block 10 50 103 906 Te usd axis ws started 7 24 SFC F G K Block fit a start sv ap pa is OFF initial processirg the ap is 10 50 zo f 5 1004 Mt wt installed a sv err ooourred or the cable is faulty 7 24 SFC F G K Block 10 50 Eos 4 Coma speed outside the rage 7 24 SFC F G K Block 10 50 22 906 Te usd axis ws started 7 24 SFC F G K Block 10 50 103 a p 1 2 3
125. the station number 00 to 31 of the servo amplifier to communicate with 1 Valid only when the MR J2S DA is connected 2 Valid only when the MR J2M A series is connected 26 3 26 3 26 OPERATIONS OF SERVO AMPLIFIER MONITOR SCREENS MELSEC GOT 26 4 Monitor Functions All monitor data of the servo amplifier are displayed in real time 26 4 1 Monitor screen This section explains the display data of the monitor screen and the key functions displayed on the screen 1 About the display data MR J25 A 9600 bps Servo amp Monitor 1 ee feedback 0 pulse Peak load ratio 0 10 2 Servo motor speed 0 Pzmin uin 0 4 1 1 3 Ups 0 pulse ON ion 37812 pulse 4 12 4 Euer ive command O pulse BS counter 20493 rev 13 5 EIS 0 kpps Load inert ia moment 3 3 times 14 e a SESS ripis emv lt 15 7 Sinaia totae 0 06 v 8 RESTE load ox 9 Ene load 0 Clear Nof tem Description o Counts and displays the feedback pulses form the servo motor encoder e When the setting exceeds 9999999 it starts from 0 e The sign appears for reverse rotation Displays the servo motor speed Servo motor speed e The value is displayed with the 0 1r min unit rounded off e The sign appears for reverse rotation peers le smageesterewemesaion i Droop pulses e The sign appears for reverse rotation Counts and displays the position command input pulses Cumulative e Since the value befor
126. the touch key display at the bottom of the screen will change 4 Touch input confirmation EX When entering network no When entering device no Entry monitor for specified device E NETWK No 0 STATION FF E NA SNE DEVICE 16b 0 32b 1 0 DEVICE D O 16b 0 32b 1 0 CII ERE 1 For the station with either system specify FF which shows the PLC CPU to be accessed or 0 to 64 2 Displayed for QCPU monitor only 8 The monitor target must be preset using GT Designer For ACPU monitor specify the network number station number set on GT Designer Refer to the help of GT Designer for details of the monitor target setting for Ethernet connection 4 Data being entered can be cleared by the following keys AC Clears all data being entered to the target area DEL Clears one character at the cursor position 5 The form of data to be entered is displayed at the right side of the screen DEC Enter in decimal HEX Enter in hexadecimal 9 OPERATION OF THE VARIOUS SYSTEM MONITOR SCREENS MELSEC GOT 9 1 4 Changing screens This section shows the screen changes when executing each monitoring operation of the system monitor function from the status where the user created monitor screen is displayed Start 4 C User created monitor screen Touch 1 Utility screen qwe 1 Touch the key t
127. touch to close the parameter setting window 6 The parameter value changes on the parameter setting MR J2S A 9600 bps Servo amp Monitor Pr N Val Unit Screen 25 mem mode reg brake select T 0000 s 2 change a xaFunction selection 1 Mie Lirite j 8 Con pulse multiply numer 1 4 Choose the changed parameter item and touch the 4 Com pulse multiply denom 1 Verify W it k 5 In positi nge 100 pulse rite ey 6 Diese gain 1 41 rad s Write au y S 7 Pos com acc dec time cons a ms When you have changed the settings of two or more 8 Internal speed command 1 100 r min Reed an l y 3 tnteonel sbeed comend 2 00 Tmin parameter items touch the Write All key to write all the 10 Internal speed command 3 1000 r min Gran t 0 1 H TE bibis nci i ma parameter items whose settings have been changed 13 S pattern acc dec time cons 0 ms y x Cycle amplifier power to initiate changes 7 The confirmation window appears Touch the OK key to write the parameter setting to the servo amplifier When you do not write the parameter setting touch the Cancel key OK to write parameter Execute This completes the parameter setting write operation 1 The changes made to the parameter settings are written to the E PROM of the servo amplifier Hence if the amplifier is powered off the wr
128. with Alpghanumeric and touch to confirm the setting If you do not confirm it touch to close the parameter setting window SV Response Setting 5 Load Inertia Ratio 7 0 To Motor Position Ctrl Gaini A Speed Ctrl Gain1 Position Ctrl Gain2 Auto Tuning TE Pv 1 Speed Ctr1 Gain2 iti Speed Integral Comp Notch Filter Feed Forward Gain 3 As the confirmation window appears touch the OK key to write the parameter setting to the Parameter Write Execute motion controller CPU When you do not write the parameter setting touch the Cancel key OK Touch J Pitt NO Auto 4 After completion of write the parameter setting Gain Adjustment Manual Mode screen whose display has been updated to the new SV Response Setting 5 Load Inertia Ratio 7 0 To Motor parameter setting appears Position Ctrl Gaini 35 rad sec A Speed Ctrl Gain1 17 rad sec Position Ctrl Gain2 35 rad sec v Speed Ctrl Gain2 817 rad sec Speed Integral Comp 20 rad sec Notch Filter Not Used Feed Forward Gain 1 ese 23 15 23 15 23 OPERATIONS OF VARIOUS MOTION MONITOR SCREENS MELSEC GOT 23 5 About Hardcopy Output This section describes the way to print the motion monitor screen with the printer or to save it in the PC card in the BMP JPEG file format during motion monitor PC card BMP JPEG file a Printer
129. x Y i N ds i Ya xis x DDEFF 0110110110110110 7 IRH Posit Start Interpolation Y RBCDDEFF Posit Compl bM 0110110110110110 peed Limit Zero Request Zero Start Zero Complete RiPulse D P Mode J 0 B Type Fud Jog Start Rev Jog Stant Stop Pos Started Error BUSY E M Code ON Btarting Blas E Direction DERE O Fud 1 Rew FF Unit Setting 00 mm 01 inch 10 deg 11 PLS Man Pulse Batt Err Wi ee m Error emi Cod Touch 12 8 12 8 12 OPERATION OF EACH SPECIAL MODULE MONITOR SCREEN MELSEC GOT 1 When Pata Chg is touched changes current value of buffer E R l memory Display key window on monitor screen SET Dai WOW en All of the following operations can be carried out by touching A68RD Graph Monitor Screen IRESET Chg MENU En E the keys in the displayed key window 1 Enabled 0 Disabled D QN Ga e When you touch at the upper left of the key window the L Completed 0 Not Completed key window closes and the display returns to the monitor E S screen amp Gount verge 1 Move the cursor to the position where the data to be tested M CH disconn B CHS disconn W CH2 disconn B CH6 disconn 1 H au oes E Ee E EN is displayed 71 A W Up down K lt Left right 2 Use the numeric keys to specify the value to be changed 2 Th
130. 0 M10000 EM Base process line Hk M1 Base setup line ML H20 2001 04 06 12 59 Product carry line P H 0 D10 Ho 2001 04 06 12 59 Process test line MONITOR 2001 04 06 C Operation monitor sustem MAIN z 2001 04 06 Main TEST 2001 04 06 12 Process test line CARRY COMM 2001 04 06 12 59 Product carry line SETUP 2001 04 06 i Base setup line PROCESS E 2001 04 06 i Base process line D2 o A97 960 GOT Exit Ladde Break Menu Setup Drive SEL READ CIRCUIT END Sequence program Max 8 lines 1 line Max 11 contacts displayed When the display screen type is the EL the Print Screen Cancel Print JUMP 1 and JUMP keys are not displayed OSPR Oo Program Memory MAIN I PLC 1 NETWORKNo O ST FF CPUNOO M10000 I DRIVE 1 Program Memory Type Size Date SETUP 4920 2001 04 06 CARRY 4916 2001 04 06 TEST 5056 2001 04 06 MONITOR 5108 2001 04 06 28 A956WGOT MAIN 4916 2001 04 06 D10 Sequence program Max 5 lines 1 line Max 7 contacts displayed The Print Screen and Cancel Print keys are not displayed EBOdERBE Headings are not displayed in the file list 6 OPERATING THE VARIOUS LADDER MONITOR SCREENS MELSEC GOT 6 2 Screen operation and screen changes when monitoring This section includes an explanation of the PLC read operation that reads out the sequence program from the PLC C
131. 0000000 Code Time 012 00 00 00 00 012 00 00 00 00 012 00 00 00 00 012 00 00 00 00 012 00 00 00 00 012 00 012 00 012 00 00 00 00 012 00 00 00 00 012 00 00 00 00 012 00 00 00 00 012 00 00 00 00 012 00 00 00 00 012 00 00 00 00 012 00 00 00 00 012 00 00 00 00 Ax 60090000000000000 Code Time 012 00 00 00 00 012 00 00 00 00 012 00 00 00 00 012 00 00 00 00 012 00 00 00 00 012 00 012 00 012 00 00 00 00 012 00 00 00 00 012 00 00 00 00 012 00 00 00 00 012 00 00 00 00 012 00 00 00 00 012 00 00 00 00 012 00 00 00 00 012 00 00 00 00 12 41 Fu 70 onse 220 oobc sro 0172 0049 223 00DF 373 0175 e 78 oose 228 00E4 378 017A n 79 oo4F 229 ooes 379 0178 2 86 o056 236 ooEC seo o182 a 8 0051 231 O0E7 381 0170 83 009 st EA ses ero un SA neo 984 AB 02F0 02F0 12 41 12 OPERATION OF EACH SPECIAL MODULE MONITOR SCREEN MELSEC GOT Buffer memory address Screen Image ADISP start Error Start History Start Error History SET RESET MENU MONIT Start History No Ax Start NS 6009000000000000 Mode Time Res Dpo123 00 00 00 00 012 Dp0123 00 00 00 00 012 Dpo123 00 00 00 00 012 0p9123 00 00 00 00 012 Dp0123 00 00 00 00 012 Dp0123 00 00 00 00 012 Dpo123 00 00 00 00 012 Dp0123 00 00 00 00 012 Dp0123 00 00 00 00 012 Dpo123 00 00 00 00 012 0
132. 012 012 004 01234567 01234 012 012 004 01234567 01234 012 012 005 01234567 01234 012 012 005 01234567 01234 012 012 16F0 to to 3891 0F33 5891 1703 006 0123456 01234 Ole ole 006 01234567 01234 012 ole oo 01234567 01234 012 ole 007 01234567 01234 012 012 008 01234567 01234 012 012 008 01234567 01234 012 ole 003 0123456 01234 O12 ole 009 01234567 01234 012 ole 010 01234567 01234 O12 012 010 01234567 01234 012 012 011 0123456 01239 012 012 011 01234567 01234 012 ole Ole 01234567 01234 012 ole 012 01234567 01234 012 012 013 012394567 01234 012 012 013 01234567 01234 012 012 014 0123456 01234 Ole ole 014 01234567 01234 012 ole 015 01234567 01234 012 012 015 01234567 01234 012 012 016 0123456 01234 012 ole 016 01234567 01234 012 ole 017 01234567 01234 012 012 01 01234567 01234 012 012 018 01234567 01234 012 012 018 01234567 01234 012 012 019 0123456 01234 Ole ole 019 01294567 01234 012 ole 020 01234567 01234 012 012 020 012394567 01234 012 012 OoOooooooooooocoooooooxs 12 38 12 38 12 OPERATION OF EACH SPECIAL MODULE MONITOR SCREEN MELSEC GOT 12 23 AD75 A1SD75 Module Monitor 1 2 3 Screen Image No MONIT MENU I 0 Monitar Screen x M 07s Ready HB av 1Ls91 FHD JOG eisai RVS C Ma Not for use Ma Not for use 800 0820 900 0384 1000 osea cus 812 032C 912 0390
133. 012345 PLS sifravel Dist After Near zero BUSY Point Signal ON In position 9 Pos Pattern 0 01239567890 SH WF Switchover v P Mode 0 pera Address 01234567890 10 0 Positioning HDT Error 1 Velocity Eera Rtn vel O12345PLS s Excessive Error Errar Detection Error Code 1 012 2 012 Preep Velocity Oi12345PLS s 0054 0055 7 108 109 006C 006D 8 46 47 002E 002F n S 0052 0053 40 41 0028 0029 42 43 002A 002B 1 44 45 002C 002D 12 29 12 29 12 OPERATION OF EACH SPECIAL MODULE MONITOR SCREEN MELSEC GOT Screen Image MONIT AD70 Input Output Monitor Screen MENU Inputs x HOT Error 10 Y Zero Rtn start ADO READY 11 Posit Start Zero Rtn RequestiL2 E Forward Start zero Rtn Comple 13 E Reverse Start BUSY 14 Fwd Jog Start Posit Complete 15 l Rev Jog Start In position 16 Vel Pos Restart Excessive Error 17 Stop Error Detection 18 E Error Reset verf Low 13 E Overflow Reset under low 1A Underflow Reset Servo Readu 1B Near Zero Point 1L Vp Switchover Stop External 1D PLC READY Upper Limit LS HE Lower Limit Ls LF 12 30 12 30 12 OPERATION OF EACH SPECIAL MODULE MONITOR SCREEN MELSEC GOT 12 20 AD70D Module Monitor Buffer memory address Screen Image No ap 5 003D 003E SET RESET Data Chg MONIT MENU END ADTOD Positioning E Monitor Screen
134. 0123456783 1234 0 0123456789 e col C vo iN T c Y y F e c a Y l o e x x e c eJ e l e e l 0 0123456 783 1 01234 01234 0123456789 12 63 12 63 12 OPERATION OF EACH SPECIAL MODULE MONITOR SCREEN MELSEC GOT 12 32 QD75M Module Monitor Buffer memory address ii dec hex Positioning como MA 8 1012 to 1013 03F4 to OSF5 iti m a 1009 1109 03F1 0455 1006 1106 OSEE 0452 E 1007 1107 OSEF 0453 1008 1108 OSFO0 0454 1029 1129 0405 0469 838 938 0346 03AA 1038 1138 040E 0472 Screen Image N 1 58H B ST Bear 01234567890 0123456783 01234567890 0123456789 SRI 012567820 0123456789 012345678 0 89 Positioning comp fram Positioning comp L TET 0000 0096 012C 01C2 0 150 300 450 678 012345678 012345678 12 64 012345678 012345678 2to3 152 to 153 302 to 303 452 to 453 1 151 301 451 4to5 154 to 155 304 to 305 454 to 455 0002 to 0003 0098 to 0099 012E to 012F 01C4 to 01C7 0001 0097 0012D 01C3 0004 to 0005 009A to 009B 0130 to 0131 01C6 to 01C7 12 64 12 OPERATION OF EACH SPECIAL MODULE MONITOR SCREEN MELSEC GOT Buffer memory address Screen Image No
135. 0323 A gt 910 to 911 038E to 038F ES 5 912 to 913 0390 to 0391 1012 to 1013 03F4 to OSF5 1112to 1113 0458 to 0459 1030 1130 0406 046A 1031 1131 0407 046B 12 68 12 68 12 OPERATION OF EACH SPECIAL MODULE MONITOR SCREEN MELSEC GOT Screen Image No dec hex 1027 1127 0403 0467 1028 1128 0404 0468 1029 1129 0405 0469 1034 1134 040A 046E 1036 1135 040C 046F 1036 1136 040C 0470 837 937 0345 03A9 1037 1137 040D 0471 1032 1132 0408 046C 1033 1133 0409 046D 848 to 849 0350 to 0351 948 to 949 03B4 to 03B5 1048 to 1049 0418 to 0419 1148 to 1149 047C to 047D 850 to 851 0352 to 0353 950 to 951 03B6 to 03B7 1050 to 1051 041A to 041B 1150 to 1151 047E to 047F 852 to 853 0354 to 0355 952 to 953 03B8 to 03B9 1052 to 1053 041C to 041D 1152 to 1153 0480 to 0481 854 to 855 0356 to 0357 954 to 955 03BA to 03BB 1054 to 1055 041E to 041F 1154 to 1155 0482 to 0483 1056 1156 0420 0484 1057 1157 0421 0485 1058 1158 0422 0486 1059 1159 0423 0487 k 1 0123456 192000 123456 1098 0123420 78 o 1234 01234 0 12241012 34 0 1234 0123401224 BEB 0123456709 o1294567899f0123456709 Ero 1222 1252 1252p 132 132p 132p 1732 EE 0122456 709 0123456 783 0123456723 E8o123401232 01233 0 123450123410 1234 01734 SIG OL 10101 0101010101 01 01 O12 01 01 010101010101 010101
136. 1 2 Various diagnostics can be run on the servo amplifier detailed description Section 26 6 There are multiple diagnostic functions to run various diagnostics on the connected servo amplifier Display example DI DO display Amplifier information display e Lists the ON OFF states of the external I O signals of the lt Displays the software number of the servo amplifier and servo amplifier Refer to Section 26 6 1 the information model ID encoder resolution of the servo motor Refer to Section 26 6 3 1 14 1 14 8 Servo parameters can be written detailed description Section 26 7 The parameter values of the servo amplifier can be read changed and written to the servo amplifier Name acntl mode reg brake select x Function selection 1 Auto tuning Com pulse multiply numer Com pulse multiply denom In position range 100 pulse Position control gain 1 50 rad s Pos com acc dec time cons Internal speed command 1 Internal speed command 2 Internal speed command 3 Acceleration time constant Deceleration time constant S pattern acc dec time cons 4 Various test operations can be performed detailed description Section 26 8 Various test operations can be performed for the connected servo amplifier Display example JOG operation Motorless operation While the Forward Reverse key is touched the servo e Simulates the operation of the servo motor in the servo amplifier runs
137. 12345 PLS s Pero Address 5 01234567890 Hog Velocity 012345 PLS s S Rtn Vel 6 012345 PLS s reep Velocity7 012345 PLS s Torque Limit 012345 X gero Rtn Dist 8 01234567890 otor Speed 012345 rom ear Zero Dist 9 01234567890 ear Zero Set 10 01234567890 otor Current 012345 Regen Level 012345 ZP Made D 0 Pos 1 Vel ax Torque 012345 rque Control Mode 0 Test Mode 0110110110110110 E r bode 1 012 2 0123 5 0123 67654321 0110110110110119 erswitch 12 31 11 12 13 14 15 9 60 003C Mo 19 ov 1 120 0078 0079 007A 1 123 007B pal 89 009 1 2 100 101 007E 0064 0065 102 103 0066 0067 En N J LE o Em O Y 2 m m mI Jv Ie pe N m m LE ye EN 8 ez8g e 7 a n s 7 0068 0069 001E 001F 0020 0021 0022 0023 006C 006D 006A 006B 0024 0025 0077 0078 0079 007A 007B 0050 0051 0056 0057 0052 0053 0054 0055 0059 006E 006F 0070 0071 007D 007E 12 31 12 OPERATION OF EACH SPECIAL MODULE MONITOR SCREEN Screen Image AD70D Parameter Data Monitor Screen SET RESET Data MONIT Chg menu END Hres Lr Start 01234567090 Upper Limit 2 In position Range 012345 PLS Forward Start Reverse Start Louer Limit 3 01234567090
138. 172CPU or Q173CPU on the system configuration screen Controllers OS type is different It is not a version for GOT The motion controller OS installed into the monitor destination motion controller CPU Q172CPU Q173CPU is other than SV13 or SV22 The version of the motion controller OS installed into the monitor destination motion controller CPU is not compatible with the motion monitor function Install SV13 or SV22 into the monitor 24 destination motion controller CPU Q172CPU Q173CPU as the motion controller OS Install the motion controller OS whose version is OOE or later into the motion controller CPU Monitor data not found Monitor data was not installed or was deleted Download the monitor data of the motion monitoring Unused axis selected The axis No selected has not been set Choose the axis No that has been set e Set the axis using the peripheral software It is not possible to select During servo parameter setting the item that cannot be set has been selected Choose the item that can be set Incorrect setting range The value that is outside the setting range has been set Set the value within the setting range Unmatched password The password entered as the motion parameter changing password is illegal Enter the correct password 24 1 24 ERROR DISPLAY AND HANDLING WITH MOTION MONITORING MEMO 24 2 ME
139. 2 1 20041 Agrate Brianza MI Phone 39 039 6053 1 Fax 39 039 6053 312 e mail factory automation itmee com MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC SPAIN EUROPE B V Carretera de Rub 76 80 E 08190 Sant Cugat del Vall s Phone 34 9 3 565 3131 Fax 34 9 3 589 2948 e mail industrial sp mee com MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION Office Tower Z 14 F 8 12 1 chome Harumi Chuo Ku Tokyo 104 6212 Phone 81 3 6221 6060 Fax 81 3 6221 6075 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC USA AUTOMATION 500 Corporate Woods Parkway Vernon Hills IL 60061 Phone 1 847 478 21 00 Fax 1 847 478 22 83 EUROPE ITALY JAPAN GEVA Wiener Stra e 89 A 2500 Baden Phone 43 0 2252 85 55 20 Fax 43 0 2252 488 60 e mail office geva at AUSTRIA TEHNIKON Oktjabrskaya 16 5 Ap 704 BY 220030 Minsk Phone 375 0 17 2275 704 Fax 375 0 17 22 76 669 email tehnikon belsonet net BELGIUM BELARUS Getronics b v Control Systems Pontbeeklaan 43 B 1731 Asse Zellik Phone 32 0 2 467 17 51 Fax 32 0 2 467 17 45 e mail infoautomation getronics com TELECON CO BULGARIA 4 A Ljapchev Blvd BG 1756 Sofia Phone 359 0 2 97 44 05 8 Fax 359 0 2 97 44 06 1 e mail INEA CR d o o Drvinje 63 HR 10000 Zagreb Phone 385 0 1 36 67 140 Fax 385 0 1 36 67 140 email AutoCont Control Systems s r o Nemocnicni 12 CZ 702 00 Ostrava 2 Phone 420 59 6152 111 Fax 420
140. 2 02HC H Series board type Generic term of H 20DR H 28DR H 40DR H 64DR H 20DT H 28DT H 40DT H 64DT HL 40DR HL 64DR HITACHI PLC HIDIC H Series Matsushita Electric Works Generic term of FPO C16CT FPO C32CT FP1 C24C FP1 C40C FP2 FP3 FP5 FP10 S PLC FP10SH FP M C20TC and FP M C32TC abbreviation of memory flash memory in the GOT Abbreviation of GOT system software Others Setting data for dynamic image Personal computer where the corresponding software package is installed Generic term of the MR J2S LIA MR J2S LICP and MR J2M A series E71 Ethernet unit Large type H series Generic term of large type H series H 200 to 252 Series H Series board type EH 150 Series In this manual the following products are called by new names Old Name GPPW GX Developer Generic term of SWLID5C GPPW E SWLID5F GPPW E software packages A 12 A 12 EMEN MELSEC GOT CHAPTER1 OVERVIEW This manual that can be used on a GOT with an operating system installed These functions include the utility function ladder monitor function system monitor function special module monitor function network monitor function list editor function motion monitor function and servo amplifier monitor function POINT Note that some functions cannot be performed depending on the used GOT and the target CPU connection form Refer to Chapter 2 for more information on the functions available for each GOT and the restrictions on the fu
141. 20 105 121 106 122 107 123 108 124 103 125 110 126 111 127 112 126 113 123 114 130 115 131 AITLID Input Output Monitor Screen MH HOT Error LO 11 le 3 TO CommandComp Let e m ID Command Exe ID Errar 15 ID READY 16 Li La 13 LA MHz ID BUSY LB D CommandComp lete MIGCH2 1D Command Exe d 10 Error a o ooo 400 oFao FRA RAR RRR RRR RR Cc OT TTTTTTTITTIITrIT ARR ARR RRMA RRR CEIGLIGIIIIIIIIcIrrr IDIDIDIDID I IGIII II rIcIcr SET Data MONIT AJTLID Set Up Information Monitor Screen RESET chg MENU Valid range CH1 CH2 Continual Write Comparison brite 004094 1573300 Retry 0032767 01234 i 01234 r Total Communica 0123456789 l 0123456789 y Compar ison bisagreenentlikr Woissereevent Copy direction de CHL c cHe LED status A Boc poen Fer EUER HERE EH Err Record Latst betinken tare eat Ee 14 000E 4014 OFAE Pasti ter Mie hr ari 8 to to to to Past Wite Incompletion Error i Past3 Set p fares Ear mp0 db mr 18 0012 4018 OFB2 H 1 1 12 47 12 47 12 OPERATION OF EACH SPECIAL MODULE MONITOR SCREEN MELSEC GOT 12 26 A84AD Module Monitor Screen Image Buffer memory address dec hex 10 to 13 18 to 21 SET Data AS4AD Operation Monitor Screen RESET Che 28 to 31 Input Out
142. 22 H 0000 link status D 15 H 0003 D 23 H 8000 e D 16 H 0000 D 24 H 0000 Input switch 3 V D 17 H0000 D 25 H 0000 1 Changing display format The word device values for the entry monitor batch monitor T C monitor and the buffer memory monitor are monitored in decimal or hexadecimal format 2 Device comment display When the PLC CPU device is monitored the comments written into the PLC CPU are displayed 4 Other stations can be monitored Other stations in data link systems network systems or CC Link systems including the GOT or stations connected to the GOT can be monitored EE MELSEC GOT 1 1 4 Features of the special module monitor function Installing or downloading the special module monitor function operating system and special module monitor data into the GOT built in memory using the GT Designer enables monitoring and changing of data in the special function module buffer memory using dedicated screens Signal statuses of I O modules can also be monitored The features of the special module monitor function are shown below 1 Monitoring can be done with dedicated screens see Section 12 2 for details Monitoring is carried out using dedicated screens provided by the manufacturer for the special function module and I O module It is not necessary for the user to create monitor screens Sample display 1 for special function module Menu screen after module Monitor screen after menu selec
143. 3 12 17 A616DAI A616DAV module monitor a T aa rana a aA aeaa ata aa aain 12 25 12 18 A616TD module monitor sse sees eee eee eee eee 12 26 12 19 AD70 A1SD70 module monitor sse eee eee eee 12 29 12 20 A70D modu lemonltOr iii acia eiae dr ipee nda Ha eun eheu ciant ad 12 31 12 21 AD71 Module monitor T 12 33 12 22 AD72 ATSD71 Module monitor aciei trn tr rn ern nr rer kr n rfr e ri Ca ana 12 36 12 23 AD75 A1SD75 module monitor sse eee eee 12 39 12 24 AJ71PT32 S3 and A1SJ71PT32 S3 module monitor sese ee ee eee eee 12 45 12 25 AJ71ID1 ID2 R4 and A1SJ711D1 ID2 R4 module montar sss sss sese ereer eee 12 47 12 26 A84AD module monitor esessssssssssssssssssseeenee enne aaa Aa sn aaa a aaia Eaa adaa 12 48 12 27 A1S64TCTT BW S1 and A1S64TCRT BW S1 module monitor sss 12 49 12 28 Q64AD Q68ADV Q68ADI module monitor sss sse eee eee ee 12 51 12 29 Q62DA Q64DA module MONON sse 12 52 12 30 QD62 QD62D module monitor cnn cnn cnn nr non cnn nano cnn nnnnn nennen ranas 12 53 12 34 QD75P QD75D module viele T 12 54 12 32 QD75M module MONTO eene enne ennt nnns inest nnns nnns nnns 12 64 A 6 A 6 13 OPERATING I O MODULE MONITOR SCREENS 18 110 13 2 13 1 Specifying the module to be monitored sse nnne nnne 13 1 13 2 Monitor screen configuration and key functions sss sese eee eee eee eee eee eee eee eee eee 13 2 14 ERROR DISPL
144. 3F1 0455 01234 gt a BER Leno 0 0 806 906 0326 038A 1006 1106 O3EE 0452 A 807 907 0327 038B 1007 1107 03EF 0453 808 908 0328 038C 1008 1108 03F0 0454 j 829 929 033D 03A1 1029 1129 0405 0469 8 838 938 0346 03AA 1038 1138 040E 0472 0000 0096 1 1 4 150 2005460 012C 01C2 0004 009A 2 4 154 304 454 atsa aoa asa 0130 01C6 0001 0097 1 151 1 451 di 012D 01C3 0002 0098 4 2 152 2 452 132902743 012E 01C4 S tact 0003 0099 5 3 153 303 453 Hug 0120956769 18 Cee 0005 009B 0131 01C7 0006 009C 7 1 4 DUROS ES 0132 01C8 12 54 12 54 5 155 305 455 12 OPERATION OF EACH SPECIAL MODULE MONITOR SCREEN MELSEC GOT Buffer memory address Screen Image No 10 to 11 000A to 000B 1 12 to 13 000C to 000D 14 to 15 000E to 000F 164 to 165 00A4 to 00A5
145. 4 Error Definition Description M D H M The dates and times when SFC errors occurred are displayed Program No The SFC program Nos where SFC errors occurred are displayed Err Code The error codes of the errors that occurred are displayed The definitions of the SFC errors that occurred are displayed 1 Not displayed when the A95 GOT A956WGOT is used Error Definition 2 Key functions The following indicates the functions of the keys used for operation of the SFC error history screen Function Used to return to the monitor menu screen Used to end the SFC error history and return to the screen that was being displayed when the motion monitor function was started Used to scroll the SFC error history display Displayed only when the A95 GOT A956WGOT is used 23 5 23 5 23 OPERATIONS OF VARIOUS MOTION MONITOR SCREENS MELSEC GOT 23 3 3 Display data and key functions of error list screen 23 6 This section explains the display data of the error list screen and the key functions displayed on screen 1 Displayed data Error List M D SV P Err H M No Code 7 24 SV P 10 50 103 906 Te uused axis ws started AX Error Definition 7 24 Maj Mastat sy ap pi is FF initial processing the am is 10 50 5 20 1004 Mt wt installed a sv err cooured or the cable is faulty 7 24 SVP 10 50 21 q Coman speed outside the rage 24 SVP 10 50 22 90g Te nai axis ws start
146. 435 0499 1078 1178 0436 049A 1079 1179 0437 049B 1080 1180 0438 049C 2 826 926 033A 039E 1026 1126 0402 0466 2 816 916 1016 1116 0330 0394 OSF8 045C OSF6 to 03F7 J 1017 1117 03F9 045D 817 917 1017 1117 1528 1628 1728 1828 0331 0395 03F9 045D 05F8 065C 06C0 0724 12 70 12 PERATION OF EACH SPECIAL MODULE MONITOR SCREEN 2 2 MELSEC GOT Buffer memory address dec hex 1017 1117 03F9 045D PE 95 1017 1117 03F9 045D 1532 1632 OSFC 0660 1732 1832 06C4 0728 Screen Image No 1706 to 1707 O6AA to 06AB 22234567630 123456690 Gee to 1806 to 1807 070E to 070F 01234567850 01234567830 mum unit i 1514 to 1515 OBEA to O5EB 2 1614 to 1615 064E to 064F 1714 to 1715 06B2 to 06B3 1814 to 1815 0716 to 0717 1513 1613 05E9 064D command 1 Cont 1713 1813 06B1 0715 o Invalid 1544 1644 0608 066C ME oe ER 5 1745 1845 06D1 0735 ewa S 1746 1846 06D2 0736 1747 1847 06D3 0737 aes 9 1705 1805 06A9 070D 12 71 12 71 12 OPERATION OF EACH SPECIAL MODULE MONITOR SCREEN Screen Image 0123 0123 0123 Jl 0123 ff ta Sec Piz3450 ot 3 Dizsasdpizcase pie aasc p172458 oz 2 o rtcut 1 Right e Letf 12 72 3 5 1504 1604 1704
147. 456783 0123456189 01234 0123 0123456183 1 30100 30200 07594 075F8 U D 5M Servo basic parameter 30300 30400 0765C 076C0 Servo series rH c Hm 26 22 306 1258 erl Rotation direction Rotation direct tontin uih UPS 30101 30201 07595 075F9 B 2 3 El TsRevercelcu with increase ramum petu Hrs ee eB ERES nus 30301 30401 0765D 07601 xis1l Axis Axisa iss ruto tuning I3 3 2 S umi 3 30102 30202 07596 075FA egenerat ive EE option e E TET um ON 4 30302 30402 0765E 076C2 QP interpolation mode Rer i i i E ET Pans 30103 30203 07597 075FB External dunamic p Axis2 ax is EN iso ll S Axisa 30303 30403 0765F 076C3 arnam gig gag servo response S 30104 30204 07598 075FC lt MR H BN HR H BN4 MR T2 B MR J2 JP gt Axisi Axis i i 5 8tandard 8 C Friction load remedy 30304 30404 07660 076C4 6 ener EE s teLow isHe P Lou 20Hz 3 Lou 2SHz 30105 30205 07599 075FD ARIST a mom 5 Low 35Hz amp Lou 45hz 7 N o B Low SsHn B Middle T0Hz 9 High 8SHz 30305 30405 07661 076C5 En EL Sena High 105H2 B High 1302 1C High 1602 T E D Hish 200Hz E High 240Hz F High 300Hz 30106 30206 0759A 075FE cis asist scBE ecu 3 3006 30406 07662 076C6 9 30107 30207 0759B 075FF 30307 30407 07663 076C7 10 30108 30208 0759C 07600 30308 30408 07664 076C8 11 30109 30209 0759D 07601 30309 30409 07665 076C9
148. 5 mer In debug mode MzoasH PLS In test mode MS075 O Test REQ ERR M9078 b O star surfer roiitsmesoo PLS MAN PLS 1 Ensbie MzoS1 MAN PLS 2 Ensble M2052 1 HUE o epe O MeN FLs Axis ERR MSO77 8V22 R7V CHG Request M2043 B gt I MER O Ev22 R v CHO Error mzoas Y J sv2z out of 8vN Warninz mz048 8V22 V Mode Cont Op ninz AxisNo 128 6 n ry 5 Zun Enc v gt v Description 1 Ax The axis Nos of the running axes being monitored are displayed The feed present values or actual present values of the running axes are displayed Touching the display part of the monitored value switches to the positioning monitor screen of the touched axis No Refer to Section 23 3 5 Whether the servo ready signals major minor errors and servo error detection signals are ON lit or OFF extinguished are SV RDY ERR DT displayed SV ERR Touching the error indication part switches to the error list designated axis screen of the touched axis No Refer to Section 23 3 4 The common bit devices are always monitored and displayed e Error detection type bit devices Displayed red e General status type bit devices Displayed green Actual PV Feed PV 4 Bit device screen a 1 Not displayed when the A95 GOT A956WGOT is used 2 Key functions The following indicates the functions of the keys used for operation of the present value monitor screen Key Function Feed PV Touching
149. 6F 1036 1136 040C 0470 837 937 0345 03A9 1037 1137 040D 0471 cle 1032 1132 0408 0460 EA 1093 1133 046D rex 824 to 825 to 0339 Screen Image 924 to 925 039C to 039D 1024 to 1025 0400 to 0401 1124 to 1125 0464 to 0465 01234567890 5 826 926 033A 039E TT 1026 1126 0402 0466 3 EID 55 05 816 916 0330 0394 1016 1116 OSF8 045C aa aaa o oa El OOO O ois mee e e 914 to 915 0392 to 0393 S TTT 1014 to 1015 03F6 to 03F7 oissasereso it 1114 to 1115 045A to 045B 91234567830 TET 1526 to 1527 O5F6 to 05F7 EN L1 lI a p 1626 to 1627 065A to 065B Cinch k10 p HI 1726 to 1727 O6BE to 06BF 1826 to 1827 0722 to 0723 0123456783 817 917 0331 0395 1017 1117 03F9 045D 1528 1628 O5F8 065C 1728 1828 06C0 0724 12 59 12 59 12 OPERATION OF EACH SPECIAL MODULE MONITOR SCREEN Screen Image Gu x 0123456789 0123456789 0123456789 0123456789 01234567830 J 01234567890 01234567890 01234567830 aa 01234567890 01234567890 C 01234567830 12 60 MELSEC GOT sie dec hex 1017 1117 03F9 045D ee ee 3 1017 1117 03F9 045D O5FC 0660 06C4 0728 n 3 1713 1813 06B1 0715 1744 1844 06D0 0734 ER 5 1745 1845 06D1 0735 Ei S 1746 1846 06D2 0736 1747 1847 06D3 0737 E oe 9 1705 1805 06A9
150. 7 12 17 3 3 Display contents and keys functions other station data link status monitor 17 13 17 3 4 Display contents and keys functions other station parameter status monitor 17 14 17 3 5 Display contents and keys functions other station CPU action status monitor 17 15 17 3 6 Display contents and keys functions other station CPU RUN status monitor 17 16 17 3 7 Display contents and keys functions other station loop status monitor sss 17 17 18 ERROR DISPLAYS AND COUNTERMEASURES WHEN MONITORING NETWORKS 18 110 18 2 LIST EDITOR FUNCTION 19 OPERATION PROCEDURES FOR THE LIST EDITOR FUNCTION 19 110 19 5 19 1 Operation procedures before starting the list edit sse 19 1 19 2 Operation procedures from user created monitor screen display to starting list editing 19 2 19 2 1 Operation of keyword Inputs essen 19 3 19 2 2 Selection and operation of mode esen 19 5 20 OPERATION OF EDITING SCREEN FOR EACH LIST 20 1 to 20 16 20 1 Basic operation of key input nennen eene nnne nnne nnne nnns 20 1 20 1 1 Switching of valid key function indicated at the upper lower part of the key sss 20 1 20 1 2 Command input procedures sss esse essen 20 2 20 1 3 Action if
151. 8 OPERATION PROCEDURES FOR THE SYSTEM MONITOR FUNCTION 8 1108 2 8 1 Operation procedures before starting system monitoring seen 8 1 8 2 Operation procedures from user created monitor screen display to start of system monitorinigi s eec ioo irre rege iate SUED E rece nace Eee o ED E cn 8 2 9 1 Screen configuration common operations and changing screens when monitoring 9 1 9 1 1 Basic screen configuration and key functions menu eene 9 1 9 1 2 Switching the display form decimal hexadecimal and turning the comment display on off FORM 9 2 9 1 3 Specifying the monitor station and device SETT sese 9 4 9 14 Changing SChEGNS APRI PR aAa 9 6 92 Entry MOMMO ls E Dre REPRE LO tented te ede a ts ee M edat end ges 9 7 9 21 Basic operation tpe ans 9 7 9 2 2 Entry monitor screen display and key functions eee 9 8 9 2 3 Deleting a registered device eee ieiesesese tete tete tnnt tete tn tntntn tns sn sns tn sns 9 9 9 3 Batch Monitor uu Le te n viel avian een he e te e d edn ied arent 9 10 9 3 Basic Operation aie AAA 9 10 9 3 2 Batch monitor screen display and key TunciOnS sese eee eee eee eee 9 11 9 4 TC Monitor monitor of timer and counter sss esse sese eee eee nennen ennt 9 12 94 1 BASICO 9 12 9 4 2 TC Monitor screen displ
152. 89 S Ia 01234567890 Il 01234567830 01234567830 0123456783 0123456783 0123456783 0123456783 MELSEC GOT ee 229 E 00E5 379 529 017B 0211 82 232 0052 OOE8 017E 0214 382 532 TES 383 533 017F 0215 cl 386 536 0182 0218 80 to 81 0050 to 0051 87 237 0057 OOED 387 537 0183 0219 DN NEC 388 538 0184 021A ea 389 539 0185 021B e 370 520 0172 0208 Em A 371 521 0173 0209 on 378 528 017A 0210 222 to 223 OODE to OODF i 226 to 227 00E2 to 00E3 6 376 to 377 0178 to 0179 526 to 527 020E to 020F 12 57 12 57 12 OPERATION OF EACH SPECIAL MODULE MONITOR SCREEN MELSEC GOT Buffer memory address tee ee 1016 1116 O38 0450 1017 1117 03F9 045D D 818 to 819 0332 to 0333 Screen Image 1 918 to 919 0396 to 0397 1018 to 1019 OSFA to 03FB 01234567830 01234567890 11 18 to 11 19 045E to 045F IT 802 to 803 0322 to 0323 5 RE 910 to 911 038E to 038F ES 5 912 to 913 0390 to 0391 1012 to 1013 03F4 to OSF5 1112to 1113 0458 to 0459 1030 1130 0406 046A 1031 1131 0407 046B 12 58 12 58 12 OPERATION OF EACH SPECIAL MODULE MONITOR SCREEN MELSEC GOT ee IDEE 1027 1127 0403 0467 1028 1128 0404 0468 1029 1129 0405 0469 1034 1134 040A 046E 1036 1135 040C 04
153. 9GT 70LTTB A9GT 70LTT A9GT 70LTS and A9GT 50LT type backlights Debug stand Abbreviation of ASGT 80STAND A9GT 70STAND and A9GT 50STAND type debug stand PC card memory card Abbreviation of PC card with PCMCIA Ver 2 1 l Flash PC card Generic term of ABGTMEM 10MF ASGTMEM 20MF and A9GTMEM 40MF Option Compact flash PC card Compact flash PC card compliant with Compact FlashTM Memory board Abbreviation of ASGT FNB A9GT FNB1M A9GT FNB2M A9GT FNB4M A9GT FNB8M A9GT QFNB A9GT QFNB4M A9GT QFNB8M type option function memory board Attachment Generic term of A77GT 96ATT A85GT 95ATT A87GT 96ATT A87GT 97ATT attachments Ten key Panel Abbreviation of ABGT TK ten key Panel A7GT CNB Abbreviation of A7GT CNB bus connector conversion box A9GT QCNB Abbreviation of ASGT QCNB bus connector conversion box External I O unit Abbreviation of ASGT 70KBF and A8GT 50KBF type external I O interface unit Printer interface unit Abbreviation of ASGT 50PRF type printer interface unit Memory card interface unit Abbreviation of ATSD59J MIF memory card interface unit Option anit Video RGB mixed input abbreviation of A9GT 80V4R1 type Video RGB mixed input interface unit Video input interface unit Abbreviation of A9GT 80V4 type Video input interface unit RGB input interface unit Abbreviation of ASGT 80R1 type RGB input interface unit GT Works Version 5 Abbreviation of SW5D5C GTWORKS E software GT Designer Version 5 EUR ere GOTR PACKE software package and SW5D5C GOTR PACKEV GT Desi
154. A95 GOT LBD M3 can be selected Normal display is set at the time of shipment 2 Setting of human sensor may be made for the A985GOT V only e Screen save Human sensor You can select whether the screen saver is deactivated or not when the Human sensor has detected a man s motion Available for the A985GOT only factory set to Invalid e Human sensor detection sensitivity You can select the detection sensitivity of the Human sensor in any of 11 Steps levels 0 to 10 so that the sensor will not detect a motion such as a man passing before the GOT Available for the A985GOT only factory set to 10 Detection sensitivity setting 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Monitor time sec 0 0 1 0 2 0 4 08 1 15 2 25 3 4 e Human sensor OFF delay The Human sensor can be turned off when it does not detect a man s motion after it has turned on You can set that period between 00 min 10 sec and 60 min 00 sec Available for the A985GOT only factory set to 00 min 10 sec 3 Setting of grip switch may be made for the A950 handy GOT only e Grip switch You can set whether the grip switch will be used or not When the setting is USE hold down the grip switch and perform operation Setup and self diagnostic operations can be performed independently of the grip Switch May be set only for the A950 handy GOT factory set to USE e If itis released You can set whether the touch key pressed on the GOT display will be turned off or not at the tim
155. A956WGOT is used Set the start stop triggering device of the hardcopy function on GT Designer and turn that device ON OFF to output the hardcopy POINT When printing out the ladder monitor screen always install the option driver into the GOT key displayed on the ladder monitor Set the output destination PC card printer of the hardcopy in the hardcopy setting of GT Designer Refer to Help of GT Designer for details of the hardcopy setting 7 ERROR DISPLAY AND HANDLING WITH LADDER MONITORING MELSEC GOT CHAPTER7 ERROR DISPLAY AND HANDLING WITH LADDER MONITORING Error Message The following chart shows the error messages that are displayed during the ladder monitor operation and the method of handling them Description Method of Handling ENTRY CODE MISMATCH The specified keyword is different from the keyword that is registered in the object PLC CPU Check the keyword that is registered in the object PLC CPU and specify again FILE NOT FOUND 1 An attempt was made to switch to the ladder monitor screen when a sequence program had not been read 2 When the file is selected and the Read key is pressed the selected file does not exist in the PLC drive Read the sequence program that is written in the object PLC CPU Ex A sub sequence program can only be specified as A31 CPU A4UCPU PLC COMMUNICATION ERROR 1 Cannot communicate with PLC CPU of the spec
156. AY AND HANDLING WITH SPECIAL MODULE MONITORING 14 11014 2 NETWORK MONITOR FUNCTION 15 OPERATING THE NETWORK MONITOR FUNCTION 15 11015 2 15 1 Steps in getting started with the network monitor function esee 15 1 15 2 Steps in starting the network monitor function from the user created monitor screen 15 2 16 SWITCHING THE NETWORK MONITOR SCREENS 16 110 16 2 17 USING THE NETWORK MONITOR SCREENS 17 1 to 17 18 UTA Own station els cocotte entre ene A ate iain hn a Tran inu eren nen Te ra nn nii 17 1 17 1 1 Display contents and keys functions own station monitor eene 17 1 17 2 Detailed own station monitor sees sees eee eee ereenn 17 3 17 2 1 Display contents and keys functions acting as a MELSECNET B or MELSECNET Il master station17 3 17 2 2 Display contents and keys functions acting as a MELSECNET B or MELSECNET Il local station 17 4 17 2 3 Display contents and keys functions acting as a MELSECNET 10 Control station ordinary Station 17 5 17 2 4 Display contents and keys functions acting as a MELSECNET 10 remote master station 17 8 TAS Other staton MONON dd ii erae ta ere e cue een e n 2 edere d 17 11 17 3 1 Display contents and keys functions other station monitor menu sss 17 11 17 3 2 Display contents and keys functions other station communication status monitor 1
157. C GOT 9 2 2 Entry monitor screen display and key functions In this section the Entry Monitor screen display and the functions of the keys displayed at the top of the screen are explained 1 Display DEVICE MONITOR TEST o 2 NETWK No 0 STATION FF D 200 30 A When comment is not displayed max 8 devices Line 1 current units When comment is displayed max 4 devices W 200 43 Display when system monitoring Production line A Bit device ON OCOFF 3 R 50 68378428 DW Word device Current value link status X3 e Input switch3 M Displays the keys that are used with the operation of the Entry Monitor screen shown in 2 Touch input Displays the monitor station network No station No and CPU No 1 Displays the status and current value of the device 1 Displayed for QCPU monitor only 2 Key functions The chart below shows the functions of the keys that are used with the Entry Monitor screen operation Key Function Move to basic screen function change menu screen to change to another monitor function or ending the system monitor See Sec 9 1 1 Move to the display change menu screen to change the numerical display on the Entry Monitor screen decimal hexadecimal or changing the comment display on off See Sec 9 1 2 Move to device setting menu screen to enter the monitor device delete the device or execute a test e Entry of monitor dev
158. CNET II 2 There may be a possibility that the network monitor function cannot be used depending on which CPU to connect and which connection method to use Network Monitor Function CPU to Be Detailed Own Connection Method Own Station Other Station Connected f Station Monitor Monitor Monitor QCPU e connection QnACPU Be eal Direct CPU connection connection ACPU MELSECNET connection 1 connection 2 Motion controller pur FXCPU CPU direct connection Other manufacture s PLC 1 When connected to a Q QnACPU control and master stations cannot be monitored 2 When connected to an ANUCPU monitoring cannot be done with the MELSECNET 10 network card being installed 3 When the target CPU is the Q172CPU or Q173CPU monitoring cannot be done 3 When connected to a QnACPU and the master station of the MELSECNET II monitoring cannot be done with the keyword being defined 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC GOT 3 5 List editor function specifications POINTS Refer to Section 2 3 for restrictions on the List editor function 3 5 1 PLC CPU that allows for list edit PLC CPUS that allow list edit are either the QCPU A mode or the ACPU For details refer to section 2 3 2 a In using the A2USH S1 A2SH S1 A2SH A1SH A1SJHCPU the following restrictions should be observed in the range of list edit In using the A2USHCPU S1 In the range of the ASUCPU In using the A2SH S1 A2SH A1SH A1SJHCPU In the r
159. Channel C E C El C El C annel annel annel annel B 01 Error annel annel B ero annel FEDCBAIG 76543210 Data Format 0110110110110110 Enable 0110110110110110 0 Disabled 1 Enabled AB16A0 Graph Monitor Screen CONNECT No 0 Input 0 0 50 100 50 Channel annel annel annel annel annel Scale A 0 cate Format o 2 0004 Scale B 0 Data Format 1 16 to 23 0010 to 0017 annel annel annel annel annel annel annel B un Error annel annel B ero annel Connect Na Channel No FEDCBA9B 76543210 pata Format 0110110110110110 Enable 0110110110110110 0 Disabled 1 Enabled AMIOOPOODITM FOND 12 24 12 24 12 OPERATION OF EACH SPECIAL MODULE MONITOR SCREEN MELSEC GOT 12 17 A616DAI A616DAV Module Monitor Buffer memory address Screen Image Em dec COET 0000 0001 AG16DAI Operation Monitor Screen r oes 0010 to 001F Channel No FEDCBRS876543210 0030 to 003F D A Conversion 0110110110110110 0 Disal 0030 to 003F Output Enable 0110110110110110 1 Enab Output X Over Output Error 012345 012345 012345 012345 012345 012345 012345 012345 012345 012345 012345 012345 012345 012345 012345 012345 Over Under Error Error A616DAI Input Output Monitor Screen Inpi x HOT Error READY Error Output Enable 16 to 31 10 to 1F channel OO e ems Channel
160. ECTRIC CORPORATION INTRODUCTION Thank you for choosing the Mitsubishi Graphic Operation Terminal Please read this manual carefully so that equipment is used to its optimum CONTENTS SAFETY PRECAUTIONS 3 5 7 H edat idet tal A 1 REVISION Su ali ello rte rr A 2 INTRODUCTION es i ree en ren Pe t ed rente e anri Bote A 3 CONTENTS niihiin cR t o tie te ERE e P nian PU ed rne aet ene al re Ue tees A 3 About IMPER HR A 10 Abbreviations generic terms in this manual eee ee eee eee eee eee eee ee eee A 11 US MINUM RR 1 1 1 1 1 Features of the utility FUNCION 1 1 1 1 2 Features of the ladder monitor function essent tnter tette tenentes 1 3 1 1 3 Features of the system monitor function sese essen eee eee 1 5 1 1 4 Features of the special module monitor function sese esse esse eee eee eee 1 7 1 1 5 Features of the network monitor function essent tnter tenentes 1 9 1 1 6 Features of the List editor function sees 1 11 1 1 7 Features of the motion monitor FUNCTION sess 1 12 1 1 8 Features of the servo amplifier monitor functions sess 1 14 2 1 Before getting started with various functions sese eee eee eee eee eee eee eee eee eee eee 2 1 2 2 Required equipment iseessseseeese estne e sitne aaia 2 1 2 9 Precautions before USC e e atl e e nel e el e tree e eL et e P ree e x 2 2 3 1
161. EENS MELSEC GOT 6 3 4 Changing the device value D CAUTION Read the manual carefully and fully understand the operation before the test operation ON OFF of bit devices modifying current value of a word device modifying timer counter setting modifying the current value or modifying the current value of a buffer memory of ladder monitor In addition never modify data in a test operation to a device which performs a crucial operation to the system It may cause an accident by a false output or malfunction Changing the device value on the screen during ladder monitoring is described Switches for the timer counter value display format decimal hexadecimal and the comment display for the corresponding device on off can be performed 1 Device value changing method The device value changing method during ladder monitoring is described below Circuit monitor Screen Display the ladder monitor screen by touching LADDER MON 1 Display the screen shown in 2 by touching Menu 2 Display the test window by touching Test Dev Sea Step Sea 16 32BIT Cont Sea End Sea fe 16Dec Hex Coil Sea Print Fact Sea Test ew Print Screen When using A970GOT STN TFT 3 As the test window will open perform the operation by seeing Sec 9 6 After the device change is complete the changed contents can be v
162. ERATION OF EACH SPECIAL MODULE MONITOR SCREEN MELSEC GOT 12 11 A68AD Module Monitor Screen Image hex SET Data MONIT ABSAD Operation Monitor Screen RESET Chg MENU Samp le Average Time Count Sample Average Count Time 0 Count Average 1 Time Average 0022 Channel No 6765432187654321 O Sampling Setting 0110110110110110 1 fveraging Count Time Input Status Value x No of Channels Used 0 Channel Channel Channel Channel Channel Channel Channel Channel 01234 01234 01234 01234 01234 01234 01234 01234 01234 01234 01234 01234 01234 01234 01234 01234 Writing Data Error 01 QJ A A AGBAD Input Output Monitor Screen oO HOT Errar READY 1 10 to 17 000A to 0011 yf ABBAD Graph Monitor Screen MENU Input X o un e Channel 1 annel annel annel annel annel annel i annel B T Error 12 18 12 18 12 OPERATION OF EACH SPECIAL MODULE MONITOR SCREEN MELSEC GOT 12 12 A1S68AD Module Monitor Screen Image Buffer memory address 4 hex d e A1SGBAD Movement Monitor Screen b H 87654321 C 8 AFD Conversion 01101101 i Enable A D Method 01101101 Averaging 1101101 A D Conversion 01101101 Incomplete Complete Averagin
163. ERE Ax sA 30328 30428 07678 076DC offset pics PM xis 21 Error excessive alarm level Alarm data sampling time 1 1000 KpIs 30129 30229 075B1 07615 f 0 1 100 0 rev MR J25 B Sii dei 4228 aime el axis OR H ARES 30329 30429 07679 076DD azisillillasissllo iso IE ax gpl Axis BEER sx is MEE Pre alarm data PI PID control switch over 301 30 30230 075B2 07616 p MET c MEL 30330 30430 0767A 076DE 0 4 1 Droop based switching is valid 5 Command F delta T in position control 5 8 n Droop pulsesi 1 T Droop pulsesi 4 2 PID control is always valid Droop pulsest 16 9 0roop pulsesl 32 lao axis arigi ell 30131 30231 075B3 07617 Droga pulses1 64 30331 30431 0767B 076DF data 1 Axis iais ax iso axis Servo retrieve character data 2 AxisilBlaxisc Bl axis as iss gl Japanese L English axis exis axiss ais 30132 30232 075B4 07618 30332 30432 0767C 076E0 30133 30233 075B5 07619 QD7SM Servo extended parameter Part2 30333 30433 0767D 076E1 Serial communication baudrate PI PID control switch over D S amp 00 bos 1 18200 bps 0 50000 FLS Ax 2 38400 bos 3 57600 bbs MEN MEE 4 30134 30234 075B6 0761A RSS xis aisi aisi o differential comensation J 30334 30434 0767E 076E2 serial DIL response delay ax E A 2 x 3 Ax d 30136 30236 075B8 0761C D Invalid 1 Vali i Encoder output pulses 5 pss aisat B pa D mL p eem 30336 30436 07680 076E4
164. F in the ladder displayed last 2 During search result display The ON OFF of the ladder block searched last and the monitor results of word devices are displayed e When the defect search starts Menu changes into Esc Touch Esc during the defect search to stop the defect search and display the search result Further touch Esc to change Esc into Menu and display the normal ladder f The screen during the defect search operates as described below 1 If the display data exceeds one screen during the defect search The screen is scrolled automatically 2 If the ladder step searched during the defect search exceeds one screen MELSEC A ladder monitor The screen is scrolled automatically to the last line of the ladder step MELSEC Q ladder monitor The screen is not scrolled automatically to display the ladder step g Touching Esc can stop the defect search Search results are continuously displayed on screen until Esc is touched The ladder step searched last is displayed as described below e MELSEC A ladder monitor ON OFF display is not provided e MELSEC Q ladder monitor ON OFF display is provided 6 OPERATING THE VARIOUS LADDER MONITOR SCREENS MELSEC GOT 6 2 4 Touch search operation A touch search is the function designed to search for the coil of a device when its contact displayed in the ladder monitor is touched and to search for the contact of a device when its coil is touched A sear
165. G4 S3 unit Generic term of AJ71E71 S3 A1SJ71E71 B2 S3 A1SJ71E71 B5 S3 AJ71E71N B2 AJ71E71N B5T A1SJ71E71N B2 and A1SJ71E71N B5T QE71 Generic term of AJ71QE71 A1SJ71QE71 B2 AJ71QE71 B5 A1SJ71QE71 B5 AJ71QE71N B2 AJ71QE71N B5T A1SJ71QE71N B2 and A1SJ71QE71N B5T Generic term of QJ71E71 QJ71E71 B2 and QJ71E71 100 Omron PLC Generic term of C200HS C200H C200Ha series C200HX C200HG C200HE CQM1 C1000H C2000H CV500 CV1000 CV2000 CVM1 CPU11 CVM1 CPU21 CS1 CJ1 CPU unit Yasukawa PLC Generic term of GL60S GL60H GL70H GL120 GL130 CP 9200SH CP 9300MS MP 920 MP 930 MP 940 CP 9200 H and PROGIC 8 CPU unit SLC500 Series Generic term of SLC500 20 a 30 SLC500 40 SLC5 01 SLC5 02 SLC5 03 SLC5 04 SLC5 05 Generic term of 1761 L10BWA 1761 L10BWB 1761 L16AWA 1761 L16BWA 1761 MicroLogix1000 Series L16BWB 1761 L16BBB 1761 L32AWA 1761 L32BWA 1761 L32BWB 1761 L32BBB 1761 L32AAA 1761 L20AWA 5A 1761 L20BWA 5A 1761 L20BWB 5A Sharp PLC Generic term of JW 21CU JW 22CU JW 31CUH JW 32CUH JW 33CUH JW 50CUH JW 70CUH JW 100CUH CPU unit Other PLC Generic term of T2 PU224 type T2E T2N T3 T3H CPU unit Abbreviation of Model3000 S3 CPU unit Generic term of H 302 CPU2 03H H 702 CPU2 07H H 1002 CPU2 10H H 2002 CPU2 20H H 4010 CPU3 40H J 300 CPU 03Ha H 700 CPU 07Ha H 2000 CPU 20Ha Generic term of H 200 CPU 02H CPE 02H H 250 CPU21 02H H 252 CPU22 02H H 252B CPU22 02HB H 252C CPU22 02HC CPE2
166. GOT 2 Display screens The screens that can be displayed are indicated on a servo amplifier model basis Servo Amplifier MR J2M A Series Display Screen Ua EA MRS EIC MR J2M P8A MR J2M EJDU JOG operation poe 0 Al Motorless operation o o Positioning operation screen DO forced output screen E E E O Screen present Screen absent 26 24 26 24 26 OPERATIONS OF SERVO AMPLIFIER MONITOR SCREENS MELSEC GOT 26 8 1 Precautions for test operations This section gives the precautions for using the test operations of the servo amplifier monitor functions D WARNING lt Do not operate the servo amplifier switches with wet hands Doing so can cause an electric shock Do not perform operations with the front cover of the servo amplifier removed Doing so can cause an electric shock since the high voltage terminals and charging section are exposed Do not open the front cover of the servo amplifier while power is on and during operation Doing so can cause an electric shock JS CAUTION _ Before starting test operations always read the precautions for test operations in the manual of the corresponding servo amplifier Before starting operation check the servo amplifier parameters Depending on the machine unexpected operation may be performed While power is on or for some time after power off the servo amplifier s heat sink and regenerative brake resistor the servo motor and others may be ho
167. GOT Factory set to 1 e GOT PC No Set the station number of the GOT Do not set the same number as the PC No of the Ethernet module to be monitored Factory set to 1 e GOT IP address Set the IP address of the GOT GOT port No Set the port number of the GOT Factory set to 5001 e Router address When the network is connected to the other network by a router set the router address of the network where the GOT is connected Factory set to 000 000 000 000 e Sub net mask When the GOT is connected to the Ethernet network which is controlled the sub network set the sub network mask set commonly to the networks When the sub network is not used operation is performed at the default value Factory set to 255 255 255 000 e Send message wait Set the transmission wait time to reduce loads on the network and target PLC Factory set to 0 e Send message time Set the time out period Factory set to 3 e Startup time Set when seconds to start communication after power on of the GOT Factory set to 3msec 12 When communication driver for CC Link connection CC Link ID is installed e Send message time Set the time out period Factory set to 3 4 OPERATING THE UTILITY FUNCTION MELSEC GOT c Data that can be set when the specific GOT is used 1 Setting of display mode may be made for the A95 GOT LBD M3 only Reverse display The display mode normal display No highlighted display Yes is selected Only
168. GOT BD M3 has the built in memory of 3200k bytes the free space is the above value plus 2048k bytes Using the special module monitor motion monitor servo amplifier monitor function requires the built in memory to have enough memory space to store the special module monitoring data motion monitor servo amplifier monitor screens Refer to Sections 3 3 3 3 6 4 and 3 7 5 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC GOT CHAPTERS SPECIFICATIONS In this chapter the specifications of the ladder monitor function system monitor function special module monitor function list editor function motion monitor function and servo amplifier monitor are discussed separately 3 1 Ladder monitor function specifications POINTS Refer to Section 2 3 for restrictions on the ladder monitor function 3 1 1 PLC CPUs to be monitored The PLC CPUs that allow ladder monitoring are the QCPU QnACPU ACPU FXCPU and motion controller CPU Except Q172CPU and Q173CPU For details refer to Section 2 3 2 3 1 2 Access ranges to be monitored For access range for the ladder monitor function see GOT A900 Series User s manual GT Works Version5 GT Designer Version5 compatible Connection system manual When the capacity of parameter PLC program TC setting value comment and extension comment is 144 kbytes or more the comment will not be properly displayed e The local device cannot be monitored on the QCPU Q mode QnACPU 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC G
169. GOT main unit made Connection of the cable CPU main unit if any error has occurred Check the setting of RAM ROM e Correct writing was not made in the Write or ls Check the RAM mounting Insert mode Check the setting of the memory protect switch in the CPU Writing insertion or deletion was attempted PLC is runnin e Stop the CPU during running of the CPU i e Change the PLC number and set the station for PC No error s The PLC number is set to other station 9 access to the host e Set the parameter within the capacity of the memory cassette PC write error 21 2 21 2 21 ERROR DISPLAY AND CORRECTIVE ACTIONS FOR LIST EDIT MELSEC GOT Display condition s The value exceeding the range of the KS over program capacity by K steps was attempted to be set e The value exceeding the range of the file e The value exceeding the range of the file KP over register capacity by K points was register capacity by K points was attempted to attempted to be set be set Not available for QnACPU The CPU at the list edit destination is e Set the PLC number and change the station for Set the PLC No QnACPU access e Set the PLC number and change the station for list edit Or select the same station and input the keyword The PLC parameter was changed The PLC parameter exceeding the file R E 9 9 l a P e Restart the GOT system if required Restart the GOT system register capacity was set The PLC parame
170. IJKLMNOP ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP Executing Data No 012 5 Pointer 012 6 Error Code 012 7 Status 012 8 Y Ads Executing Data No 012 Pointer 012 Error Code 012 Status 012 X Axis 12 37 12 37 12 OPERATION OF EACH SPECIAL MODULE MONITOR SCREEN MELSEC GOT Buffer memory address Screen Image O Data MONIT BD72 B18D71 Input Output Monitor Screen Chg MENU Inputs X iv HOT Error X In position WA X Posit Start READY Y In position Y Posit Start X Pas Complet X Excessive Err Interpolation Y Pos Completes v Excessive Erri zero Start X Axis BUSY zero Start Y Axis BUSY stop dx Zero Request Stop Y x ns Zero Request Fud Jog Star Rev Jog Star Fud Jog Star Rev Jog Star M Code DFF M Code DFF X M Code ON Y M Code ON 5072 1BAO SET Data MONIT to to RDTZ R1SD71 Positioning Data Monitor Screen No 01 RESET Chg Menu END 5111 1BC7 o0 En ol294 oiz o12 O ool 0123457 01238 Diz 012 1880 002 01234567 01234 012 012 002 01234567 01234 012 012 io to 4291 1893 to to 4691 1A23 3872 16F0 to po 1703 3872 003 01234567 01234 012 012 003 01234567 01234
171. LSEC GOT READ STATE READ SELECTION PARAM READ PROGRAM COMMENT CMNT MAIN PROGRAM 1 SETTING EX CMNT SUB PROGRAM 2 A4U NON SETTING SUB PROGRAM 3 A4U NETWORK NO 0 PLC NO FF E gt SWITCH Ti SEL J SET Exit Ladder Break Menu Viet ll Change screen 1 Data being entered can be cleared by the following keys Exit Moves to screen where AC Clears all data being entered to the object area ladder monitor function DEL Clears one character at the cursor position starts Ladder Moves to ladder monitor Screen PLCRD Moves to PLC read Screen Once this data has been read from the PLC it does not need to be read again If data for screens created by the user is downloaded from the computer after this data has been read however the data will have to be read again 6 OPERATING THE VARIOUS LADDER MONITOR SCREENS MELSEC GOT 2 When the MELSEC Q QnA ladder monitor is executed Operation procedure 1 Touch the ladder monitor starting touch switch on the monitor oum LADDER MON he zx HI cy liii Screen prepared by the user or touch the ON on the S Piel 22 esl PLC NET LIST LADDER MOTION SP utility screen to start the ladder monitor function MON MON EDITOR MON MON UNIT 2 m rx 0 amp AMP MEMORY DATA amp
172. LSEC GOT 24 2 25 OPERATION PROCEDURES FOR SERVO AMPLIFIER MONITOR FUNCTION MELSEC GOT CHAPTER25 OPERATION PROCEDURES FOR SERVO AMPLIFIER MONITOR FUNCTION The operation procedure when using the servo amplifier monitor function is explained in this chapter 25 1 Operation procedures before starting motion monitoring This section contains a summary of the procedure for transmitting the system program OS for the servo amplifier monitor function and the motion monitor data from the personal computer to the GOT until it is installed in built in memory For details please refer to the Help in GT Designer Details of the screen display and key operation are shown in the Help Start Install memory board on the GOT Connect GOT and personal computer v Start up GOT T 25 Start up personal computer and start GT Designer y With the GT Designer transmit the OS Transmit the data using the installation dialog box for the servo amplifier monitor function from the personal computer to the GOT and install it in the built in memory Installation is complete When installation is finished Completed is displayed on the installation dialog box With the GT Designer transmit the Transmit the data using the download dialog box servo amplifier monitor data from the personal computer to the GOT and install it in the built in memory Download When download is finished the servo W
173. NCTION MELSEC GOT 8 Operation a Basic operation e Touch or y to select the necessary item e When the A985GOT A950 handy GOT is used select the last item on Page 1 2 and touch y to show Page 2 2 e For the setting item whose value will be changed highlight the digit to be set by touching gt and set the value by touching or If you are going to select another setting item after that return the highlight to the setting item by touching and make selection by touching Jor e e After setting touch 2 After touching 2 the GOT is automatically reset and the monitor screen appears b Return to each screen e If any change has been made to the Setup settings touching resets and restarts the GOT e If any change has been made to the Setup settings touching resets and restarts the GOT The display returns to the utility menu or monitor screen 4 OPERATING THE UTILITY FUNCTION MELSEC GOT 4 6 Running diagnostic checks on GOT hardware self test 1 Display screen E GRAPH IG FONTROM HE HCARD USERROW CHECK CHECK CHECK CHECK 08 Ll OS AREA CONN TOUCHSNW CHECK CHECK CHECK 2 Features Diagnostic checks on GOT hardware include the following options e Graphic Check Allows you to perform visual inspection on screen display for discoloration and lack of display e Fontrom Check
174. NIT A616TD Setting Monitor Screen Che meny END 0001 a ea per ea Pur noc Por wo E Se 0003 01234 Y 01234 Y 01234 01234 01234 01234 W 01234 W 01234 Y 01234 W 01234 01234 Y 01234 01234 01234 W 01234 Y 01234 Y 01234 Y 01234 W A A ESE Error Code If Error Code 70 ol Hrong Sensor Type p j 512 to 639 0200 to 027F ABL6TO Temperature Monitor Screen CONNECT No 0 RESET S AA 0000 2 16 to 23 0010 to 0017 al ALI O 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 9 A B C D E F Channel No mocemomoan CONNECT No CH No FEDCBA9876549210 B oT Error Data Format 0110110110110110 Conversion 0110110110110110 B Error Enable 0 Disabled 1 Enabled B Tem value Err A616T0 Graph Monitor screen INPUT 0 F Input Status X 0 0 50 100 50 Channel annel Scale A 0 annel Data Format 0 annel Scale B 0 annel Data Format 1 annel annel annel annel annel annel annel BT Error annel Merror annel WMOigital val Err annel Bie val Err annel Channel No FEDCBAS876549210 Channel Na FEDCBR9876543210 Data Format 0110110110110110 Conversion 0110110110110110 Enable 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 12 27 12 27 12 OPERATION OF EACH SPECIAL MODULE MONITOR SCREEN MELSEC GOT Buffer memory address No dec hex Eo RR R
175. NS OF SERVO AMPLIFIER MONITOR SCREENS CHAPTER26 OPERATIONS OF SERVO AMPLIFIER MONITOR SCREENS MELSEC GOT This chapter describes the screen operations to be performed when using the servo amplifier monitor funct ions The display screens of the servo amplifier monitor functions change slightly depending on the used GOT This chapter mainly uses the screens of the A975GOT for explanation 26 1 Screen Transition This section gives the screen transition from the user created monitor screen display status to the servo amplifier monitor function screen operations Start 1 User created monitor screen 4 Start the servo amplifier monitor functions by touching the key for which the touch key extended function has been set on GT Designer Touch AMP MON to start the servo amplifier When End was touched to terminate the servo amplifier monitor functions he screen on which the functions were terminated appears when the servo amplifier monitor functions are started next time 2 monitor functions 8 Ez sl Utility screen A END AMP MON 2 3 y TESA SE bas Serva aer ten ES Setup uuu mue Touch any of the functions Monitor Imo Rl RS MENU Alarm Diagnostics Parameters Function selection menu screen refer to Section 26 2
176. NS OF SERVO AMPLIFIER MONITOR SCREENS MELSEC GOT 26 8 6 DO forced output screen This section describes the display data of the DO forced output screen and the key functions displayed on the screen 1 About the display data MR J2M P8A 9600 bps Servo amp Monitor 108t cNia 3 cnip 8 cnia 23 O 0n Corr cNiA 6 O cnie 11 O cnta 22 O cN1a 8 cnip 28 cnip 25 O cNiA 11 cw18 30 cntp 24 O 1 4 cniA 28 cw18 33 cnip 23 O cN1a 30 cnip 35 cnip 22 O cnia 33 enta 27 O cN1a 35 cNi8 27 O cNiB 3 cnia 25 O CNiB 6 cNnia 24 O D01 Nof tem Description Output signal Displays the ON OFF of each output signal of the servo amplifier ON OFF state After this screen has been switched to another screen all external I O signals are turned OFF 2 Operation Touch the required output signal name to invert the ON OFF status of the corresponding signal and write it to the servo amplifier 3 About the key functions The following table indicates the functions of the keys used for the operations of the DO forced output screen CN18 3 By touching the signal name of the required output signal SET RESET the corresponding signal status ON OFF j If the current output signal is ON it is turned OFF reset output signals If itis OFF it is turned ON set Displays the external output signals of the extension I
177. O unit Signal names of e Changes to the JOG operation screen refer to Section 26 8 3 Changes to the positioning operation screen refer to Section 26 8 4 akin Without Motor Changes to the motorless operation screen refer to Section 26 8 5 Confirms the settings and returns to the function selection menu screen ramass the servo amplifier monitor functions 1 Displayed only when the MR J2M P8A is connected 26 30 26 30 26 OPERATIONS OF SERVO AMPLIFIER MONITOR SCREENS MELSEC GOT 26 9 About Hardcopy Output This section describes the way to print the ladder monitor screen with the printer or to save it in the PC card in the BMP JPEG file format during ladder monitor Tal NI BMP JPEG file E HERE Printer Depending on the used GOT output the hardcopy in the following corresponding method 1 When A985GOT or A97 GOT is used Touch the Start hardcopy or Stop hardcopy key displayed on the ladder monitor screen to output the hardcopy 2 When A95 GOT or A956WGOT is used Set the start stop triggering device of the hardcopy function on GT Designer and turn that device ON OFF to output the hardcopy POINT When printing out the ladder monitor screen always install the option dr
178. OR SCREENS MELSEC GOT 26 6 Diagnostics Function Run the following various diagnostics on the connected servo amplifier e DI DO display Displays the ON OFF states of the external I O signals Refer to Section 26 6 1 e Function device display Displays the ON OFF states of the I O function devices Refer to Section 26 6 2 e Amplifier information display Displays the model ID and encoder resolution of the Refer to Section 26 6 3 servo motor connected to the servo amplifier e ABS data display Displays the absolute position data of the absolute Refer to Section 26 6 4 position detection system Unit composition list display Displays the servo amplifier unit composition list Refer to Section 26 6 5 1 Screen transition The following shows the screen transition after selection of on the function selection menu screen Some screens may not be displayed depending on the model of the connected servo amplifier For the screens that cannot be displayed refer to 2 MR IES A 9800 bos Servo anp Honitor Tosti End setup Pareneters onitor Test Alara Diagnostics Function selection menu screen refer to Section 26 2 MR J2M ODU monitor Y ENS a CN1A 19 Func Dew mm cunis i CNLA 8 DI DO gt us bre Jpzzom lasa al DI DO display em Ca amit poi pass
179. OT 5 For extension timer extension counter of AnA and AnNUCPU When the extension timer T256 to T2047 and the extension counter C256 to C1023 are input as the first device of the command input the first device and the device number Ex When OUT T256 D500 is input OUT TH 25 5i 6 H co T T256 500 The device D500 for the T256 setting value E on the parameter is automatically displayed KK Z ams oooo When the extension timer and the extension counter are used be sure to set the 257 points or more and the setting value device D W R on the parameter for both the timer and the counter 20 5 20 5 20 OPERATION OF EDITING SCREEN FOR EACH LIST 20 1 3 Action if an incorrect key is input 1 Input the CLEAR key before the MELSEC GOT GO key Then input the correct key Input of the CLEAR key clears the command and the device number that have been input immediately The display returns to the status status before change in the Write mode when the mode is selected 2 When the GO key is input repeat the intended operation Command input procedures can be classified as follows When the CLEAR key is input in the parameter mode the GOT stops the process To continue the operation carry on the key input 20 6 20 6 20 OPERATION OF EDITING SCREEN FOR EACH LIST MELSEC GOT 20 2 Basic operation of list edit This section describes basic operations of list edit w
180. OT 3 2 System monitor function specifications Refer to Section 2 3 for restrictions on the system monitor function 3 2 1 PLC CPUs to be monitored The PLC CPUs that allow system monitoring are the QCPU QnACPU ACPU FXCPU and motion controller CPU For details refer to Section 2 3 2 3 2 2 Access ranges to be monitored For access range for the system monitor function see GOT A900 Series User s manual GT Works Version5 GT Designer Version5 compatible Connection system manual 3 2 3 Names of devices to be monitored For the names of devices that can be monitored with the system monitor function see GOT A900 Series User s manual GT Works Version5 GT Designer Version5 compatible Connection system manual 3 2 4 Precautions when using the system monitor function The precautions to follow when using the system monitor function are shown below 1 Monitor and test of real number data Real number data cannot be monitored or tested Monitoring of word devices that save real number data is all done by integer data binary data 2 Monitoring in 32 bit modules When monitoring word devices such as T C D W in 32 bit 2 word modules monitor up to the point where 32 bits remain in the monitor processing A location where 16 bits 1 word remain cannot be monitored This situation occurs when an odd number has been specified as the initial number in the monitor device Example When monitoring the A2NCPU data regist
181. OT Generic term of AB56GOT TBD A956GOT SBD A956GOT LBD A956GOT TBD M3 A956GOT SBD M3 and A956GOT LBD M3 GOT A956WGOT Generic term of AB55WGOT TBD A953GOT Generic term of AB53GOT TBD A953GOT SBD A953GOT LBD A953GOT TBD M3 A953GOT SBD M3 and A953GOT LBD M3 A951GOT Generic term of A951GOT TBD A951GOT SBD A951GOT LBD A951GOT TBD M3 A951GOT SBD M3 and A951GOT LBD M3 A951GOT Q Generic term of A951GOT QTBD A951GOT QSBD A951GOT QLBD A951GOT QTBD M3 A951GOT QSBD M3 and A951GOT QLBD M3 A950GOT Generic term of A950GOT TBD A950GOT SBD A950GOT LBD A950GOT TBD M3 A950GOT SBD M3 and A950GOT LBD M3 A950 handy GOT S AREE SBD M3 H A953GOT LBD M3 H A950GOT SBD M3 H and A95 GOT Generic term of A956GOT A953GOT A951GOT A951GOT Q A950GOT and A950 handy GOT Communica Bus connection board Generic term of A9GT QBUSS A9GT QBUS2S A9GT BUSS and A9GT BUS2S tion board Serial communication board Generic term of ASGT RS4 A9GT RS2 and A9GT RS2T Bus connection unit e term of ASGT QBUS2SU A9GT BUS2SU A9GT BUS2SU A7GT BUSS and A7GT Communica Data link unit Generic term of A7GT J71AP23 A7GT J71AR23 and A7GT J71AT23B tion unit Network unit Generic term of A7GT J71LP23 and A7GT J71BR13 CC Link communication unit Generic term of ABGT J61BT13 and A8GT J61BT15 Ethernet unit Generic term of A9GT J71E71 T Abbreviation of A9GT 80PSC A9GT 70PSC A9GT 60PSC and A9GT 50PSC type Protection sheet sin sod pubs dl db P T Backlight Abbreviation of A9GT 80LTT A
182. PU Q mode a Display The module format and related data are Suste ronf igurat ion WK No 0 STATON Tua 1 ustem Configuration NETH No 0 Bis m displayed on completion of module data a NE read from the PLC CPU lain SP Slot 12 PE o OS executes it automatically 12 160 3 Ext 1 SP 2 Slot 12 32P 1 0 zr Ext 2 Sr SP Slot 12 32P 32P 4A0 580 M 3 1 Displays the network number and station number of the monitor station For the modules installed in the monitor station their formats I O points and first I O numbers are displayed For special function modules which cannot be monitored their formats are displayed as Special 2 The module display position acts as the key to shift to the screen where the module will be monitored Touch input In case of a multi CPU system the CPU No is displayed for the CPU and the control CPU No is displayed for the installed module 3 The keys used for the operation on the System Configuration screen shown in b are displayed Touch input b Key functions The following table indicates the functions of the keys used to perform operation on the System Configuration screen Key Function END Monitoring ends and the display returns to the screen where the special 2 module monitor function was started QCPU Shifts to the PC Information screen Refer to Section 12 1 3 Basic mode Shifts
183. PU when executing the ladder monitor the ladder read operation that specifies the sequence program to be displayed on the ladder monitor screen and the screen movement when executing the ladder monitor 6 2 1 Reading data from the PLC The operation of reading the sequence program for the ladder monitor from the PLC CPU is described below The operation procedures vary depending on the PLC CPU to be monitored All of the keys used with the operation are touch keys displayed on the screen Touch the position where the object key is displayed and enter the data 1 When the MELSEC A FX ladder monitor is executed Operation procedure Sol 2 sd ev p NET LIST LADDER MOTION SP 1 Touch the ladder monitor starting touch switch on the monitor screen prepared by the user or touch the LADDER MON on the utility screen to start the ladder monitor function PLC MON MON EDITOR MON MON UNIT S 2 m eel 8 AMP MEMORY DATAS SET TIME CLEAN MON INFO OSCOPY UP SET PASS SELF MORD CHECK LADDER MON Touch 2 Specify the network No and station No for the object PLC CPU For data link system CC Link system NETNO 0 READ ST FF Own station e ew e D one ii 0 Master station ae oa 1 to 64 Local stations Screen Print For network system NET NO 1 to 255 Host Net To the following page 0 Master station READ ST FF Own station zzi
184. S S a oH SAO S 907 Servo A95 Jog operation M A DRU Moa o Ao 1752 pue E EE I operation 911 Servo A95 Positioning M A DRU Motor less 913 Servo A95 Motor less op S A O o O O operation 914 Servo A95 Motor less op M A DRU 2136 916 Servo A95 DO Forced Out S A ag zm oos BZ Sero 485 H mm Pil 918 Servo A95 DO Forced Out M A FU s 919 Servo A95 DO Forced Out MA Doi 1728 4 OPERATING THE UTILITY FUNCTION MELSEC GOT CHAPTER4 OPERATING THE UTILITY FUNCTION 4 1 Utility function table Functions Description Remarks Ref section Brightness contr Adjusting the brightness contrast of a monitor 2 ast adjustment This function changes with the GOT used Section 4 3 This function can be executed only after installing System monitor Monitoring or changing devices in a PLC CPU an OS monitor data on the GOT by using GT Chapter 9 Designer Lx This function can be executed only when the GOT Special module Monitoring or changing buffer memory of a memory is extended and the OS 9 installed from Chapter 12 monitor special module the GT Designer to the GOT Copying of screen data between internal Screen amp OS memory and memory card Refer to the HELP function GT Designer to install copy Copying of OS data between internal memory the OS from memory card to internal memory and memory card The options o
185. SEC GOT CHAPTER17 USING THE NETWORK MONITOR SCREENS This chapter describes how to use various monitor screens when you execute the network monitor function 17 1 Own station monitor This section describes the structure of the monitor screen and the common operations used when executing the own station monitor 17 1 1 Display contents and keys functions own station monitor This section describes the own station monitor screen and the function of on screen keys all of which are displayed and used when executing the network monitor function 1 Display contents When the A985 97 960GOT is used When the A95 956WGOT is used The display details are the same FI gun E ERES j l as the ones on the A985 97 E E KHode OnL i R Hode gt OnL i E ton aK MELSEENET 10 FLoop gt ak ra H 960GOT KRLoop gt DK 328ta MstSta RLOOP DK l A o hacks Stal FE i Touch Fw button to change the LS Time IntPLE Net LS Time E d H 201 H 201 i Te da e lt display Curr 20ms Curr 20ms T Display example leu 1 Es UNITS UNITS KHode OnL in T ktode LTest F KFLoop OK MELSECNET 10 Floop MELSECNET 2 Mode gt OnL in R KRLoop gt OK OSta Rmtsta KRLoop gt HE 64Sta LocSta 00 MELSECNET 10 KLoop Back i kLoop Backo ont Bene H Loop Back S rf NETHK No 255 IntPLC Net NETAK No 1i ew RMtI O Net i COH STA i j P
186. SEC GOT 12 1 6 Specifying monitor module and selecting monitor menu The operation when starting the special module monitor for an optional module is explained using the positioning module AD71 as an example Operation procedure Display System Configuration screen See Sec 12 1 1 Y Specify module to be monitored Touch display position of module 1 From among the modules installed in the corresponding base unit specify the special function module whose format is displayed For modules where the format is not Display s reen that utem EURO displayed monitor with the system monitor function See Sec 9 5 Specify input output modules according to Sec Positioning Data Monitor i 13 1 7 Zero Return Data Monitor 2 Specify the menu corresponding to the type of A data to be monitored Sys E END M Code Comment Monitor AA 5 3 With modules for which the monitor menu Positioning A 3 cannot all be displayed in one screen touch the A Y keys at the right of the screen to scroll the display menu Specify menu to be monitored Touch display position of menu MEME eee Display monitor screen of specified menu 4 Check the contents of the display Carry out rr arnt eie eren E the subsequent operation according to Sec Pena ae a 12 2 to 12 31 m p cens 5 Carry out tests for the displayed data according iie Ub dca to S
187. T Il master station This section describes the detailed own station monitor screen and the function of on Screen keys all of which are displayed and used when the own station acts as the master station on the MELSECNET B or MELSECNET Il 1 Display contents When the A985 97 960GOT is used When the A95 956WGOT is used The display details are the same foetal info TeSt unis as the ones on the A985 97 960GOT cee vera Touch S button to change the p This Station s Master Tor een ST displa RLoop Back Station us play of Loop Switching 15 Display example This Station s amp This Station s Total of L Sta Section Contents of Displa e This Station s TsSt s Info Indicates the station number of the own station e This Station s Indicates the category of the own station e Total of L Sta D Link Info Indicates the maximum number of the stations to be linked The maximum number is defined by common parameters e FLoop Shows the status of the primary loop lines of the own station Normal NG e RLoop Shows the status of the secondary loop lines of the own station Normal NG e Floop Back Station LoopBK Info Indicates the station number of a station that executes the loopback along the primary loop e Rloop Back Station Indicates the station number of a station that executes the loopback along the secondary loop e of Loop Switching Indic
188. Test 26 1 refer to Section 26 5 refer to Section 26 3 refer to Section 26 4 refer to Section 26 6 refer to Section 26 7 refer to Section 26 8 26 26 1 26 OPERATIONS OF SERVO AMPLIFIER MONITOR SCREENS MELSEC GOT 26 2 About the Servo Amplifier Monitor Functions The servo amplifier monitor functions allow various monitor functions parameter setting changes test operations and others to be performed for the servo amplifier connected to the GOT Select and display the required function from the function selection menu screen Function selection menu screen MR J2S A 9600 bps Servo amp Monitor ost End Diagnostics 1 Setup Selects the model of the servo amplifier to be monitored by Refer to Section 26 2 the servo amplifier function the communication baudrate station number setting station number presence absence station number selection and IFU station number 26 2 Monitor Displays all monitor data of the servo amplifier in real time Refer to Section 26 3 3 Alarm s Displays the currently occurring alarm and displays the Refer to Section 26 4 history Also resets the alarm or clears the history 4 Diagnostics Runs the following various diagnostics on the connected Refer to Section 26 5 servo amplifier e DI DO display Displays the ON OFF state
189. The A1SD75M AD75M is displayed as A1SD75P AD75P The A1SD75M AD75M can be monitored within the monitoring range of the A1SD75P AD75P d When monitoring the A81CPU A81CPU is monitored in the following way 64 points in first half 64 points in last half Change to module that cannot be Treatment of A81CPU Change to input module monitored System configuration Eric Display Special X Y ___1 Display Input 64 X screen Possibility of monitoring Not possible Can be monitored as input e When monitoring an I O composite module 1 With an I O composite module for which Output is displayed on the system configuration screen only the output signal can be monitored For the input signal monitor X of the PLC CPU device with the system monitor function 4 Editing and allocating of special module monitor data Data displayed on a special module monitor screen cannot be edited by modifying or adding an object except that the data can be used on a user created monitor Screen 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC GOT 5 Precaution for I O allocation setting a When the QnACPU is connected the head XY numbers are displayed in due order on the special module monitoring system configuration screen if the I O allocation setting is random as shown below When performing special module monitoring always perform the I O allocation in order from slot 0 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Slot number Input AD75 A68AD Output Op
190. Travel Pulse o1234561 01234567 Inching Trai 4 0123456789 0123456709 Y RBCDDEFF a c8 0110119110110110 Boeed Limit 15 01234567 01234567 pog Spd Limit 6 01234567 01234567 A Pulse D P Mode A URS ce few a uq eei B Type Rcc Dec Time 01234567 01234567 1 A Type B M Code Timing 01234567 01234567 0 WITH Mode nad 1 AFTER Mode 1234567899 0123456769 CiM Code ON OFF 12345678910 123456789 0 OFF 1 ON DD Pasit Method 0123456789 00 ABS 01 INC MM 10 RBS INC 01234567 E Direction ides RECESS O Fwd 1 Rev FF Modulesetting 00 mm 01 inch 11 PLS de AD72 A15071 M Code Comment Monitor Screen SETS RESET Dat Che a MONIT MENU END Ke Y Posi Posi zero zero stop Pos Batt Err Error t Start Interpolation t Compl Return Start Zero Complete Fud Jog Start Rev Jog Start Started HDT Err Han Pulse M Mi Y Hi 3 x fais H Ende 01 ABCOEFGHIJKLHNOP ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP ABCOEFGHIJKLMNOP ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP ABCOEFGHIJKLMNOP RBEDEFBHIJKLMNDP eee RBCDEFBHIJKLMNDP ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP ABCOEFGHIJKLMNOP ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP ABCDEFGHIIKLMNOP iv Axis H ode 012 ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP ABCDEFGH
191. U and the GOT communications x established with the PLC CPU disconnected or cut cables e Has an error occurred in the PLC CPU 10 1 10 1 10 ERROR DISPLAY AND HANDLING WITH SYSTEM MONITORING MELSEC GOT MEMO 11 OPERATION PROCEDURES FOR SPECIAL MODULE MONITOR MELSEC GOT CHAPTER11 OPERATION PROCEDURES FOR SPECIAL MODULE MONITOR FUNCTION The operation procedure when using the special module monitor function is explained in this chapter 11 1 Operation procedures before starting special module monitoring 11 1 This section contains a summary of the procedure for transmitting the system program OS for the special module monitor function and the special module monitor data from the personal computer to the GOT until it is installed in built in memory For details please refer to the Help in GT Designer Details of the screen display and key operation are shown in the Help Start SE Connect GOT and personal computer Y Start up GOT It is not necessary to set up and operate the GOT after startup y Start up personal computer and start GT Designer E With the GT Designer transmit the OS for the special module monitor function from the personal computer to the GOT and install it in the built in memory Transmit the data using the installation dialog box Installation is complete When installation is finished Completed is displayed on the installa
192. UICK TEST MODE SET Y DEVICE MONITOR ites Status when the quick test function is on TEST MENU FORM SET NETWKNo 0 STATION FF D 15 2147483648 DW ZR 1042431 32767 X 0001 M 25 O w 200 43 R 50 68378428 DW D 0 0 W 100 0 9 19 9 19 9 OPERATION OF THE VARIOUS SYSTEM MONITOR SCREENS MELSEC GOT 2 Operation to turn off the quick test function When TEST is touched when the quick test function is on a dialog box is displayed When OK is touched the quick test can be canceled 3 Bit device quick test i When the device monitor screen is displayed Touch the device name or device no display position for the bit device to be SET RESET DEVICE MONITOR TEST MENU FORM SET NETWK No 0 STATION FF D 15 2147483648 DW ZR 1042431 32767 3r X 0001 e M 25 O W 200 43 R 50 68378428 DW D 0 0 W 100 0 E The device name and device no touched is displayed DEVICE MONITOR TEST MENU FORM SET Det NETWK No 0 STATION FF highlighted When the on off display O of the hihglihted display is D 15 2147483648 DW ania pas touched the status is SET RESET e When the current bit device is ON then it is turned OFF M 25 O w 200 43 RESET E 50 68378428 DW When OFF it will be SET 0 0 w 100 0 Pi The on off display area O of the X0001 dev
193. UNI A Pa GEO ER Data MONIT 384 to 511 0180 to 01FF AG16TD Graph Monitor Screen CONNECT No 0 Che menu END 512 to 639 0200 to 027F Input Status X 0 0 50 100 50 Temperature 4 Channel vale ft ay ll annel 0123 0123 annel 0723 5 9 0123 0 0000 ozs e E ojs S 16 28 0010100057 0123 0123 0123 0123 16 to 23 0010 to 0017 Screen Image annel annel mnmmodcmciuo 1mumscmeoeco annel 3 annel 0123 0123 annel 0123 0123 annel 0123 0123 annel annel annel BT Error annel Merror annel WMOigital val Err annel E em val Err annel Channel Na FEDCBR9876543210 Data Format 0110110110110110 Conversion 0110110110110110 0 Scale A 0 1 Scale B 0 i Enable 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 12 28 12 28 12 OPERATION OF EACH SPECIAL MODULE MONITOR SCREEN MELSEC GOT 12 19 AD70 A1SD70 Module Monitor dec hex Screen Image No SETZ Data MONIT AD O Positioning amp Parameter Data Monitor Screen RESET Che MENU END T Minb Posit Start2 Feed Position 01294567890 Present Value 01234567890 mg Forward Start Reverse Start 3 actual Position 01234567890 Travel Dist 0123456890 Fud Jog Start ME rev Jog Start 4 Error Counter 01234567830 Welocity 012345 PLS s E Vel Pos Restart Posit Complete5 Pos Address P1 01234567890 og Velocity 012345 PLS s 1
194. Write Error M CARD Change the memory card capacity shortage Emo care lagen mon for the one having enough pacity 9 space less than written data 9 9 Data transfer error memory space i i h h M CARD error Data Write error occurred in the memory C ange t e memory card card during copying or the memory or increase the free space transfer error card used has no free space of the memory card The hardware of the installed Replace the memory card Memory card error i c memory card is defective with a new one 4 OPERATING THE UTILITY FUNCTION MELSEC GOT b Directory tree in a memory card The directory tree in a memory card is shown as follows File structure ALARMHST For alarm history file storage RECIPE 000 For recipe file storage E REPORT 6 For report file storage SNAPSHOT 00 For screen image file storage L SNAPHDCP BMP Work file for printer printout r USERDATA 0 For monitor screen data storage for screen copy E OS Sesser sae ttis For OS storage for OS copy r SYSTEMD 000 For OS system screen storage for OS copy SPCDATA For special function module monitor data storage for screen copy For motion monitor data storage for screen copy For servo amplifier monitor data storage for screen copy a The copied screen data is stored under the UserData folder Since the OS and screen data are managed by the Dlist ini file and the Flis
195. a to be enterd the touch key display at the bottom of the screen will change P lt Select input area 1 Data being entered can be cleared by the following Character Input device name and no 1 keys AC Clears all data being entered to the object area a DEL Clears one character at the cursor position Touch Input confirmation Move return to Device Monitor screen 9 OPERATION OF THE VARIOUS SYSTEM MONITOR SCREENS MELSEC GOT 9 3 Batch monitor When monitoring the function of specifying the device at the beginning of an optional device range and monitoring it is called the batch monitor The batch monitor operation when executing the system monitor is explained below 9 3 1 Basic operation The batch operation procedure is shown below See Sec 9 1 1 Operation procedure Select Batch Monitor with the basic screen When a screen other than the basic screen is displayed touch MENU at the top of the currently displayed screen display the basic screen and select Batch monitor a When you touch MENU you return to the basic screen When you touch FORM you can change this display See Sec 9 1 2 When you touch SET the monitor station and device can be specified See Sec 9 1 3 NETWKNo 0 STATION FF PRESS SET KEY SELECT ITEM THEN ENTER DEVICE TYPE amp NO Specify the first
196. ae Talne fron FF to ON again during Min ERR 204 siad n mde by PC reir Maj ERR SV ERR Program No 01 RZV CHG ERR Info H PC Link COM ERR Motion CPU HDT ERR MAN PLS Axis ERR Each 1 Pulse IM Error 17 18 1920 212223 24 25 26 2728293031 32 MAN PLS Ax ERR Each MAN PLS SM ERR Test REQ ERR Op Axis No By EEF EE REESE Test Mode Req PETER ARPA EEN e Displays the latest errors that occurred on the specified axis Refer to Section 23 3 4 1 12 1 OVERVIEW MELSEC GOT 2 Servo parameters can be set by write operation refer to Section 23 4 for details Write example Making the auto tuning function invalid Parameter setting screen Parameter setting window appears Parameter setting screen meum SER speed uto Tuning speed mU No Auto Gain Adjustment Auto Tuning Mode1 Gain Adjustment futo Tuning Model Gain Adjustment Manual Modez SV Response Setting 5 EE gt To Hot SV Response Setting 5 Load Inertia Ratio 7 0 To Motor GR eii T0 aia A Load Inertia Ratio 7 0 To Motor Position Ctrl Gaini 35 rad sec a Speed Ctrl Gaini Position Ctrl Gain1 35 rad sec a Speed Ctrl Gaint 177 rad sec m Position Ctrl Gain m Speed Ctrl Gaini 177 rad sec Position Ctrl Gain 35 rad sec v Speed Ctr1 Gain2 Position Ctrl Gain2 35 rad sec v Speed Ctrl Gain2 817 rad sec Speed Integral Comp 4 ni Speed Ctrl Gain2 817 rad sec Speed Integral Comp 20 rad sec NIKE m
197. aer Amp MA OR H e 7 P Seno AST ABS ae se mo O ABS cata ipay 736 Seno AST ABS daa SOP ae ror Sene er ABS da MADR Pa T 1 diay frao seno ar Unt Comp maDRU Tp sae 43 Seno 97 Parametes so ss it 745 Se 497 Parameter MADRU TO so soc csraton 8 Seno WT ego 89 29 gemi rre ero AST Jogo MADRE TO ear 7s2 Sevo 87 Postings se Pp 7 783 Servo A97 Positioning M A DRU SS aE T Motor less operation 785 Servo A97 Motor less op S ee eee eee 786 Servo A97 Motorlessop MADRU o 788 Servo A97 DO Forced Out S A 2724 B DO forced outout DBR Servo 977 DO Forced outs cp ars put 790 Servo A97 DO Forced Out M A FU 4 791 Servo A97 DO Forced Out M ADO1 gt 254 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC GOT 3 When A95 GOT A956WGOT is used Function Details Stored Screen Data For MR J2S For MR J2S For MR J2M For MR J2M IA monitor CP monitor P8A monitor DU monitor Servo amplifier monitor data common information 18416 800 Servo A95 Monitor ALL 2252 822 Servo A95 Alarms ALL 824 Servo A95 Alarms Hist ALL 826 Servo A95 VO Display S a 194 827 Servo A95 I O Display S CP 828 Servo A95 VO Display MAIFU 83486
198. aintained When the setting value is changed to a large value when the current value is changed to a small value 5 When an index qualified T C set value is changed only its constant part is changed Its index qualified part is not changed Example Changing the set value of T5 from 300 to 200 NETWKNo STATION DEVICE T 5 VLIK200 K300 Z2 K200 Z2 ke TB gt e T gt Constant Index qualified part part 9 OPERATION OF THE VARIOUS SYSTEM MONITOR SCREENS MELSEC GOT 9 6 2 Quick test function In addition to the existing tests for the direct input of device station No etc during monitoring with the system monitor function this function enables the bit device SET RESET word device buffer memory data to change by a single touch 1 Operation to set the quick test function on To perform the quick test functions perform the following operations Operation procedure Display one of the system monitor screen T When displaying the device monitor screen NETWK No 0 STATION FF D ZR 1042431 X 0001 M 25 W 200 R 50 D W 100 15 2147483648 DW 32767 e O 43 68378428 DW 0 0 TEST Touch DEVICE MONITOR ida The quick test is turned on by clicking on OK TEST MENU FORM SET NETWK No 0 STATION FF Q
199. ange of the ASNCPU 3 5 2 Access range that allows for list edit For information about the access range that allows for list edit see Chapter 2 of the GOT A900 Series User s manual GT Works Version5 GT Designer Version5 compatible Connection system manual 3 5 3 Precautions for List editor function Precautions for the List editor function are as follows 1 Precaution for reading with the specified command The command cannot be specified to read the ladder 2 Precaution for use with the ladder monitor function If list edit is performed while the ladder monitor function is started the edit details are not shown on the ladder monitor screen To show the edit details the ladder monitor must be read from the PLC again 3 Precaution for list edit While the corresponding PLC is at stop status perform list edit The list cannot be edited during PLC running 4 Precaution for parameter changing on the other peripheral device If parameter settings are changed on the other peripheral device during use of the list edit function they will be different from the settings of the internal parameters of the list edit function For this reason reset the GOT unit or make PC No setting again to read the parameters b Precaution for Ethernet connection To use the list editing function for Ethernet connection the host setting on GT Designer must be preset to the ACPU or QCPU A mode 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC GOT 3 5 4 List of k
200. apanese or English of the messages to be displayed on the screen Factory set to Japanese b Data that can be set when the corresponding communication driver is installed 1 When communication driver for bus connection Q is installed QBUS extension number Set the GOT extension number for bus connection to the QCPU Factory set to extension 7 s QBUS slot number Set the slot number where the GOT is assigned for bus connection to the QCPU Factory set to slot 0 2 When communication driver for microcomputer connection is installed Microcomputer connection baud rate You can select the transmission speed when the GOT is connected to a microcomputer Factory set to 19200 Microcomputer connection communication form You can select the protocol when the GOT is connected to a microcomputer Factory set to FORM 1 4 OPERATING THE UTILITY FUNCTION MELSEC GOT 3 When communication driver for computer link connection AJ71QC24 is installed s QC24 Baud rate Set the transmission speed for connection with the QC24N Factory set to 19200bps 4 When communication driver for OMRON Hitachi PLC connection is installed e Baud rate Choose the transmission speed for connection with the Omron or Hitachi PLC Factory set to 19200bps 5 When communication driver for Yasukawa PLC connection is installed e Baud rate Choose the transmission speed 4800 9600 19200 38400 Factory set to 19200bps e Startup time
201. arch for contact STEP 67 932 57Hk 0030 gt Lex RR ven weno 8 9 7 2 E E Print Screen Cancel JUMPA JUMI Print Pt N STEP 67 932 Exit Pcro Mon Menu Print Screen Cancel oves pov STEP 67 932 K50 Koo22 M23 Ti 54 HH gt Ko D235 4l M120 Y0030 0050 YO0051 T LO EZ o S I Cancel baul i 6 17 1 Touch the coil on the ladder monitor screen 2 The contact of the device whose coil was touched is searched for and the single ladder block including the contact found is added to the display The found device is highlighted 3 Touch to search the ladder downward continuously 6 OPERATING THE VARIOUS LADDER MONITOR SCREENS 6 2 5 Changing from one screen to another 6 18 MELSEC GOT This section describes the screen movements when executing the ladder monitor from the status where the user created monitor screen is displayed 1 Touch the key where the touch switch expanded function was set with the GT Designer and start the system When the Utility screen is displayed touch LADDER MON to start the system monitor The system monitor function and special module monitor function can also be starte
202. ates the cumulative number of times for which loops have been switched 2 Key functions The table below shows the function of keys that are used on the detailed own station monitor screen Key Function l Returns to the own station monitor screen Exits the detailed own station monitor screen and returns to the previous monitor screen where the network monitor function was executed Changes the details on the window only for A95 GOT 17 3 17 3 17 USING THE NETWORK MONITOR SCREENS MELSEC GOT 17 2 2 Display contents and keys functions acting as a MELSECNET B or MELSECNET II local station This section describes the detailed own station monitor screen and the function of on Screen keys all of which are displayed and used when the own station acts as the local station on the MELSECNET B or MELSECNET II 1 Display contents When the A985 97 960GOT is used When the A95 956WGOT is used The display details are the same Postal into TeSt unta as the ones on the A985 97 960GOT k mm aia Touch f button to change the E DI 1 display tof Loop Switching Display example Section Contents of Display This Station s TsSt Info Indicates the station number of the own station e This Station s Indicates the category of the own station Total of L Sta D Link Info Indicates the maximum number of the stations to be linked T
203. ation parameter Partz Servo forced stop 1 O Valid 1 Invalid axis exis esa i Electro magnetic brake interlock output O No relation to servo motor speed i Dutput in any statuses when the motor 30323 30423 07673 076D7 30124 30224 30324 30424 075AC 07610 07674 076D8 speed is less than Zero speed Lou acoustic noise mode 2 H axis axis exis om 0 2 5KHz 1 2 6 375KHz 3 9KHz axis sis axis sig 3 Serial encoder cable 0 2 line method 1 4 line method axis asis sisas is Slight vibration suppression control J O Invalid 1 Valid Axis axisEME exis 0m Motor less operation J O Invalid 1 Valid Axis sisa exis oum 30125 30225 30325 30425 075AD 07611 07675 076D9 Low pass filter O Automatic control 1 Manaul Axis Axis axis iss Adaptive vibration control EN O Invalid 1 valid 2 Maintenance axisillll Axis axis axis Adaptive vibration control sensitivity O Normal 1 Very sensitive axis oxisdEE xis uum 12 75 12 75 12 OPERATION OF EACH SPECIAL MODULE MONITOR SCREEN MELSEC GOT Buffer memory address Screen Image No 30127 30227 075AF 07613 D75M Servo extended parameter Parti 30327 30427 07677 076DB Analog monitor offset 9999 9999 zero speed Q 10000 r min Analog monitor 1 fsisi FEEE o f FEE Axis 01227 4 1 2 11222 offset miss OE c AU BPI o2 EE 01234 90128 30229 075B0 07614 Analog monitor 2 axis T
204. ation when executing system monitoring are described below 9 1 1 Basic screen configuration and key functions menu The basic screen configuration displayed in the windows and the key functions displayed on the screen are shown below 1 Display DEV MON BAT MON TC MON BM MON END 2 Key functions The functions of keys that are used with the basic screen operation are shown in the chart below Function The entry monitor is executed with the applicable window see Sec 9 2 The batch monitor is executed with the applicable window see Sec 9 3 The timer counter monitor is executed with the applicable window see Sec 9 4 BM MON The buffer memory monitor is executed with the applicable window see Sec 9 5 System monitoring ends display returns to the screen where System monitors function started DEV MON BAD MON TC MON END 9 OPERATION OF THE VARIOUS SYSTEM MONITOR SCREENS MELSEC GOT 9 1 2 Switching the display form decimal hexadecimal and turning the comment display on off FORM 1 Switching the display form decimal hexadecimal Display the word device present value or the timer counter present value or set value in decimal or hexadecimal 2 Switching the comment display on and off Display the comment that is written in the object PLC CPU Comment display priority order
205. ations in Chapter 20 1 Selection and change of mode with mode key Select the mode with the mode key Refer to 3 5 5 so that operation corresponding to the mode in Chapter 20 may be performed The mode can be freely changed when operations in Chapter 20 are performed Various operations can be continued while changing modes 1 READ _ Read mode WRITE Write mode INSERT Insert mode DELETE Delete mode PARAM Parameter mode OTHER Other mode 1 Mode key input is always valid Input of the mode key clears the input data except for the step numbers The display returns to the initial status of the mode selection 2 Operation in each mode The mode selected in 1 allows for operation corresponding to the mode in Chapter 20 Operation procedures of each mode are described in Chapter 20 Operate the GOT according to the description If an error message appears during operation take action according to Chapter 21 19 5 20 OPERATION OF EDITING SCREEN FOR EACH LIST MELSEC GOT CHAPTER20 OPERATION OF EDITING SCREEN FOR EACH LIST This section describes the operation procedures of the list edit screen 20 1 Basic operation of key input After starting the list editor function basic operations of key input are described 20 1 1 Switching of valid key function indicated at the upper lower part of the key
206. ations in which a special quality assurance system is required such as for Railway companies or National Defense purposes shall be excluded from the programmable logic controller applications Note that even with these applications if the user approves that the application is to be limited and a special quality is not required application shall be possible When considering use in aircraft medical applications railways incineration and fuel devices manned transport devices equipment for recreation and amusement and safety devices in which human life or assets could be greatly affected and for which a particularly high reliability is required in terms of safety and control system please consult with Mitsubishi and discuss the required specifications MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC HEADQUARTERS EUROPEAN REPRESENTATIVES EUROPEAN REPRESENTATIVES EUROPEAN REPRESENTATIVES MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B V Gothaer Stra e 8 D 40880 Ratingen Phone 49 0 21 02 486 0 Fax 49 0 21 02 4 86 11 20 e mail megfamail meg mee com MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC FRANCE EUROPE B V 25 Boulevard des Bouvets F 92741 Nanterre Cedex Phone 33 1 55 68 55 68 Fax 33 1 55 68 56 85 e mail factory automation fra mee com MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC UK EUROPE B V Travellers Lane GB Hatfield Herts AL10 8 XB Phone 44 0 1707 27 61 00 Fax 44 0 1707 27 86 95 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B V Via Paracelso 1
207. ay and key functions sss tenente tette teret tnter 9 13 9 5 BM Monitor monitor of buffer memory sese esse eee eee eee eee eee eee eee eee eee 9 14 9 51 Basic operation dade io deae dede de dado ded d dad doll dod dU d d d d d d 9 14 9 5 2 BM Monitor screen display and key functions essent 9 15 E nine eap pep dep pn 9 16 9 6 1 Basic operatloH ete tee e dete eee doe te e f e i Pb i he ie Pr 9 16 SRSEAMe Medium 9 19 10 ERROR DISPLAY AND HANDLING WITH SYSTEM MONITORING 10 1t0 10 2 SPECIAL MODULE MONITOR FUNCTION 11 OPERATION PROCEDURES FOR SPECIAL MODULE MONITOR FUNCTION 11 1to11 2 11 1 Operation procedures before starting special module monitoring sss 11 1 11 2 Operation procedures from user created monitor screen display to start of special module monitor 11 2 12 1 Screen configuration common operation and changing screens when monitoring 12 1 12 1 1 Composition of system configuration screen and key functions sss 12 1 12 1 2 Setting method for remote station monitoring sss esse essen eee eee eee 12 3 12 1 8 Composition of PC Information screen and key functions only when QCPU Q mode is used 12 4 12 1 4 Composition of Unit Detail info screen and key functions only when QCPU Q mode is used 12 5 12 1 5 Monitor screen configuration and key functions
208. ay the program with automatic scroll Automatic scroll 20 3 4 Operation in Insert mode l Procedures key input sequence INSERT Step number gt Insert a command in the Insert a command in the program program Display the program HELP Specify the movement in the Insert mode start step Move the program Move the whole program gt GO gt Specify the movement Specify the movement GO end step destination step Display the program HELP Specify the in the Insert mode copy start step Copy the program Copy the program Es GO Specify the GO Specity the copy GO copy end step destination step 20 3 5 Operation in Delete D mode Procedures key input sequence DELETE 3 Step number gt Delete a command from the Delete a command from program the program Display the program HELP Specify the Delete the specified range of Specify the range of the in the Delete mode deletion star step the program program for deletion L GO gt Specify the deletion GO end step Delete the whole NOP in Di
209. ayed The synchronous encoder axis No currently monitored is displayed The servo program No that was being executed at error occurrence is displayed The error codes of the minor major servo error servo program setting error real virtual switching error information error code hexadecimal personal computer link communication error code and motion CPU WDT error that are currently occurring are displayed The definitions of the errors that occurred are displayed The axes where a 1 pulse input magnification setting error occurred are displayed The errors of the axis Nos set to the manual pulse generators P1 to P3 are displayed The errors of the smoothing magnifications set to the manual pulse generators P1 to P3 are displayed No Item 1 1Ax 2 Out Module 3 Virt Axis 4 Syne Enco 5 Program No 6 Err Code 7 Err Definition Each 1 Pulse 1M MAN Error 8 PLS MAN PLS Axis AX ERR ERR Each MAN PLS SM ERR 9 Test REQ ERR The axis Nos that are being started at a test mode request are displayed 1 Not displayed when the A95 GOT A956WGOT is used 23 7 23 7 23 OPERATIONS OF VARIOUS MOTION MONITOR SCREENS 2 Key functions MELSEC GOT The following indicates the functions of the keys used for operation of the error list designated axis screen Key Function In real mode only Dut Module 1AX Sync Enco 1Ax
210. ch can be made from the beginning of a ladder to its last step This function is always valid when a normal ladder is displayed POINT The touch search function cannot be used when MELSEC A FX QnA ladder monitor is executed The function cannot be used for instructions other than contacts and coils and for word devices When the defect search function is in use the touch search function cannot be used Touch Esc to terminate the defect search Operation procedures when contact is touched to search for coil eZ rz 1 Touch the contact on the ladder monitor screen 42 a eh m Y0010 46H movc123 Do M230 K25 TO K Exit PLCRD Mon Menu sm en l 2 The coil of the device whose contact was touched is searched for and the single ladder block including the coil found is added to the display The found device is highlighted STEP 67 932 mamma Y E Print Cancel Screen Print 3 Touch to search the ladder downward continuously STEP 67 932 50 lt u gt K70 D235 M2 lt Y0030 gt K50 D230 mz e5HF Ext PLCRD Mon Menu Print Cancel Screen Print 6 OPERATING THE VARIOUS LADDER MONITOR SCREENS MELSEC GOT Operation procedures when coil is touched to se
211. ch min 10 3 deg min PLS sec k 012345678 1 012345678 012345678 12 42 Plz ze 1 to to 622 026E dick 2 to to 021D to to 622 026E to to 021D 2 e paja pe aes re to to 622 026E to to 021D 814 1014 03F6 1017 anes osn Ho een ium E 832 0340 932 03A4 1032 0408 j 1167 048F 1217 04C1 1267 04F3 12 42 12 OPERATION OF EACH SPECIAL MODULE MONITOR SCREEN MELSEC GOT Buffer memory address riginal Point Return RESET m END Es DITE eS NUES T 825 0339 925 039D 1025 0401 Absolute 107 1 un igi eee teat 01234567890 01234567890 01234567890 c 033A 039E 1026 0402 Travel Distence M o d um After DOG 10 5 deg 01234567890 01234567890 l 01234567890 E PLS i 816 0330 916 0394 1016 03F8 EN Torque Limit Ferosienald0G SignalUpperLimitLowerLimit EIN AN TE LE Screen Image SET MONIT Axis Control Data RESET chg MENU BE 0484 1206 04B6 1256 04E8 Miia See fixisi Axis Axiss correcting ties iN 3 1159 0487 1209 o489 1259 o4EB Address Depa es oe 01234567990 01234567890 01234567890 La 1172 0494 1222 o4ce 1272 oars ced UI 5 1173 0495 1223 o4c7 1273 o4F9 a NNNM Le 175 0497 1225 0409 1275 o4FB
212. coils subsequent to specified 9 4 device Monitoring of x points of current values subsequent to specified Section BM monitor buffer memory of specified special 9 5 module Setting resetting of bit device REGERE MET MI of current value for er memory REGERE MET MI word device Cure of current value for T C PEE KT can be used while monitoring T C Changing of set value for Te can pa A ee quick test 9 6 2 Device comment display comment Device comment display Decimal and hexadecimal display e of word device values and buffer 9 12 memory values monitor function special module on special screen Monitoring of network status of function MELSECNET B Il or 10 d Sequence program in the ACPU is Monitoring of servo related items Such as current values and positioning errors on various monitor Screens Servo amplifier monitor servo Seem parameter setting change test Ch 25 operation 1 Clock setting cannot be used when the connection target CPU is the QOOJCPU QOOCPU or Q01CPU for MELSECNET 10 connection 2 Clock setting cannot be used when the A8GT J61BT13 is used intelligent device station 3 When the A8GT J61BT15 is used in the remote device station only the link devices assigned to the GOT can be monitored 4 The T C set values cannot be monitored if the software version of the ABGT J61BT13 used is version W or earlier 5 Can t change V or Z current values 6 Cannot be monitored if the sof
213. connecte Error Reset mG GZ 10 11 000A 000B SALSA o 0000 ALS62RD Graph Monitor Screen RESET Che MENU 0023 pa Disabled Enabled 21 0110110110110110 1 0001 Conversion 21 0110110110110110 500 400 300 200 1 Completed 0 Not Completed 10 amp verage Sample Time Count 21 21 0110110110110110 4 l 5 1 Averaging 1 Time Average 0 Sampling 0 Count Averagel 032 GW 209 9 0 4 Wi Channel 1 disconnected Wi Channel 2 disconnected WIHDT Error Temp Sensor Type 0 W trror Code 012345 o New JIS DIN 1 01d JIS 12 15 12 15 12 OPERATION OF EACH SPECIAL MODULE MONITOR SCREEN MELSEC GOT 12 9 A1S63ADA Module Monitor Screen Image 0000 SET Data MONIT 000F A1S63ADA Operation Monitor Screen RESET Che MENU END Enable 0 Disable 1 Enable A D Conversion 0 Not Completed 1 Completed 0001 CH No 321 CH 21 setting 0110110110110110 Set 0110110110110110 0002 0003 Count Time 000B 000C i 0 Count Average Dd Time Average Sample 8verage Time Count Samp le Average ati 21 i 0 Sampling Setting 0110110110110110 1 Averaging Time Count Input Status Input Status X Input Status X Value Resolution 1 Resolution 2 Resolution 3 012345 0123 5 0125 5 0123 5 012345 0123 5 0123 5 0123 5 Upper Limit Louer
214. creen Brightness adjustment id 4 20 LADDER MONITOR FUNCTION 5 OPERATION PROCEDURES FOR THE LADDER MONITOR FUNCTION 5 1105 2 5 1 Operation procedures before starting ladder monitoring sse 5 1 5 2 Operation procedures from display of user created monitor screen to start of ladder montong eocena nn airi nnne nnne nennen enne 5 2 6 OPERATING THE VARIOUS LADDER MONITOR SCREENS 6 1 to 6 24 HSI U cei coded han annan hanna a aa 6 1 6 2 Screen operation and screen changes when monitoring sss eee eee ee eee eee eee eee eee 6 3 6 24 Reading data from the PL C app bit 6 3 6 2 2 Ladder read operatlori 5 52555p5 55 b enebebnebenebnnebentebnebettebniebuiu n bobo arar 6 9 6 2 3 Using the defect Searcli ausuus dedidit nde dide ded dd ced P lg ER 6 12 Ir ao est elle 6 16 6 2 5 Changing from one screen to another netten tette tent tnnt tentent nnns 6 18 6 3 Ladder Monito cionado ieee hien 6 19 6 3 1 Ladder monitor screen display and key functions essent 6 19 6 3 2 Precaution during ladder monitoring sss sees 6 21 6 3 3 Switching the display form decimal hexadecimal and turning the comment display on off 6 22 6 3 4 Changing the device Value sse esse essere 6 23 6 3 5 About Hardcopy OU PUE luca Bde tte dde 6 24 7 ERROR DISPLAY AND HANDLING WITH LADDER MONITORING 7 1to7 2 SYSTEM MONITOR FUNCTION
215. ction senes 1 1 Utility function list esses 4 1 Index 2 WARRANTY Please confirm the following product warranty details before starting use 1 Gratis Warranty Term and Gratis Warranty Range If any faults or defects hereinafter Failure found to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi occurs during use of the product within the gratis warranty term the product shall be repaired at no cost via the dealer or Mitsubishi Service Company Note that if repairs are required at a site overseas on a detached island or remote place expenses to dispatch an engineer shall be charged for Gratis Warranty Term The gratis warranty term of the product shall be for one year after the date of purchase or delivery to a designated place Note that after manufacture and shipment from Mitsubishi the maximum distribution period shall be six 6 months and the longest gratis warranty term after manufacturing shall be eighteen 18 months The gratis warranty term of repair parts shall not exceed the gratis warranty term before repairs Gratis Warranty Range 1 The range shall be limited to normal use within the usage state usage methods and usage environment etc which follow the conditions and precautions etc given in the instruction manual user s manual and caution labels on the product 2 Even within the gratis warranty term repairs shall be charged for in the following cases 1 Failure occurrin
216. ctions The table below shows the function of keys that are used on the other station CPU RUN status monitor screen Key Function Returns to the own station monitor screen Exits the other station CPU RUN status monitor screen and returns to the previous monitor screen where the network monitor function was executed 17 16 17 16 17 USING THE NETWORK MONITOR SCREENS MELSEC GOT 17 3 7 Display contents and keys functions other station loop status monitor This section describes the other station loop status monitor screen and the function of on screen keys This option is not selectable when connecting to a MELSECNET B or MELSECNET II local station or establishing MELSECNET 10 coaxial bus connections 1 Display contents When the A985 97 960GOT is used When the A95 956WGOT is used The display details are the same sta uni nr HEN as the ones on the A985 97 E 960GOT Display example Reversing part is inr Reversing partis an abnormal station 3 Hel an abnormal station The F loop primary loop status and the R loop secondary loop status are displayed Station numbers are shown up to the maximum number of linked stations Any station that stays in an abno
217. d 26 19 26 19 26 OPERATIONS OF SERVO AMPLIFIER MONITOR SCREENS 26 7 3 Parameter setting operation MR J25 A 9600 bps MELSEC GOT The following describes the procedure of changing the setting of the Auto tuning item as an example of parameter setting operation Servo amp Monitor ost Menu Pr Name Value Unit 2 A x Cycle amplifier power to initiate changes l OK to read parameters Execute x Cycle amplifier power to initiate changes MR J2S A 9600 bps Servo amp Monitor ost Menu Ena Pr Name Value Unit nge 7 Um 2 oe 1 Function selection 1 0002 2 Auto tuning 0105 A rite 3 Com pulse multiply numer 1 4 Com pulse multiply denom 1 verify 5 In position range 100 pulse 6 Position control gain 1 41 rad s rite All 7 Pos com acc dec time cons 3 ms 8 Internal speed command 1 100 r min 9 Internal speed command 2 500 r min Read ALL 10 Internal speed command 3 1000 r min 11 Acceleration time constant 0 ms default 12 Deceleration time constant 10000 ms 13 S pattern acc dec time cons 0 ms y xa Cycle amplifier power to initiate changes MR J2S A 9600 bps Servo amp Monitor ost Menu End Pr Name Value Unit Change 0 x Cntl mode reg brake select 0000 2 change 1 Function selection 1 0002 2 s 0105 writ
218. d from the Pic wemURKNo o ST FF L neve EN Time Title n 06 09 50 Product carry Line 524 2001 04 06 05 50 Bese setup line 214 2001 04 06 05 50 Base process line Paget Exit P a ferea ET vena Bn BHH sel H eco E Start 1 monitor function User created monitor screen meli unction Touch 1 PLE NET LIST LADDER MOTION SP MON MON EDITOR MON MON UNIT R 2 5 x LO 8 AMP MEMORY DATAS SET TIME CLEAN Hn MON INFO OSCOPY UP SET Utility screen PASS SELF HORD CHECK Utility screen Touch Exit Touch LADDER MON seb T amp o me 99 m mvi one L READ SELECTION J wri paa vf a Touch PLCRD M tann S CARRY COMM 164 2001 T5 di Dus pit DH DH Db la pee Touch L r SUS sagde Touch J End Sea Ladder monitor screen see Sec 6 3 D142 K tow D144 PK c 5 D146 PK Amv e og row 3 D150 ASET en H ASET enp H FLS M815 15 D142 pags D145 nisl as 20 Desea sese seem E ES conse En sea orense TU Screen ass Fact Sea Te e Ladder read screen see Sec 6 2 2
219. d start the system monitor function When the Utility screen is displayed touch SP Mon to start the special module monitor function 11 2 12 OPERATION OF EACH SPECIAL MODULE MONITOR SCREEN MELSEC GOT CHAPTER12 OPERATION OF EACH SPECIAL MODULE MONITOR SCREEN Each screen operation when using the special module monitor function is explained in this chapter 12 1 Screen configuration common operation and changing screens when monitoring The screen configuration and common operations used when executing the special 12 module monito r are explained in this section 12 1 1 Composition of system configuration screen and key functions This section describes the structure of the system configuration screen that is displayed after starting the special module monitor function and the key functions displayed on the screen 1 When using the QCPU A mode QnACPU or ACPU a Display The module format and related data are 1 2m Configuration NENE No 0 displayed at the end of the module data readout from the PLC CPU OS executes it automatically When connected to MELSECNET the screen shown in Section 12 1 3 is displayed DUT 64 Displays network No and station No of monitor station
220. de on the System Configuration screen and the key functions displayed on the screen 1 Display 1 Displays the network number and station number of the monitor station Displays the operating status error information and the like of the corresponding PLC CPU The keys used for the operation on the System Configuration screen shown in 2 are displayed Touch input 2 Key functions The following table indicates the functions of the keys used to perform operation on the System Configuration screen Function Monitoring ends and the display returns to the screen where the special module monitor function was started Shifts to the System Configuration screen Refer to Section 12 1 1 Scrolls the display one page up or down Scrolls one page down Scrolls one page up END v A 12 4 12 4 12 OPERATION OF EACH SPECIAL MODULE MONITOR SCREEN MELSEC GOT 12 1 4 Composition of Unit Detail info screen and key functions only when QCPU Q mode is used This section describes the structure of the Unit Detail info screen that is displayed by specifying the module in the info mode of the System Configuration screen and the key functions displayed on the screen 1 Display 1 CAE afe NETHK No on FF S95 END 3 1 Displays the network number and station number of the monitor station Displays the module information error information and t
221. depends on whether the master station itself is M9227 Loop test status ON Normal loop test and sub executing the normal loop test or the sub loop test loop test are being executed 2 When connected to the local station Device EEE T meh number ial aana afta OFF Normal The control depends on whether there is an error at the M9211 hardware of the link card The link card in the CPU link unit is for local station ON Error judged at the CPU Replace the link unit or self loopback test mode Check the mode switch OFF Not executed Das The control depends on whether the local station itself is M9257 Loop test status ON Normal loop test and sub OFF Online The control depends on whether the local station itself is online M9240 Link status ON Offline station to station test or offline or in the station to station mode or the self loopback executing the normal loop test or the sub loop test loop test are being executed 21 5 21 5 21 ERROR DISPLAY AND CORRECTIVE ACTIONS FOR LIST EDIT MELSEC GOT 8 When connected to the CPU in MELSECNET 10 An error in the MELSECNET 10 is reported using a four digit hexadecimal error number For details of the errors and corrective actions see the MELSECNET 10 Network System Reference Manual If an error code not listed in the previous page is displayed contact the nearest of our system service centers agents and branch offices 21 6 21 6
222. der monitor screen STEP 12345 18374 DT T ems Ys Displayed in the top area Lig A A e e a E ame ey EE Al zi Exit Poro Mon Menu Screen print 2 When the same search is repeated lt Ladder monitor screen gt STEP 12345 18374 X0001 10 Y0025 YH xo002 14 I opos TIT TIT TIT TIT 7 a ET nisi 4 Displayed on the next line L Y0040 J Exit PLeRD mon Menu s L6 E E E E seron omit 4 Please note that the indirect specification device index register z cannot be specified and read while the MELSEC QnA ladder monitor is executed 6 OPERATING THE VARIOUS LADDER MONITOR SCREENS MELSEC GOT 6 2 3 Using the defect search The defect search enables you to examine an ladder block that caused a failure It helps you to search from the ladder block backward so that you can determine why any coil was turned ON or OFF during the ladder monitoring or whether its contact is conductive or nonconductive While the MELSEC QnA ladder monitor is performed the factor search function cannot be used The touch key of Fact Sea is not displayed Operation procedure 1 Search for and display a ladder block where a failure occurred Example When a valve connected to Coil YOOSO does not operate properly begin searching for Coil YO030 and view its ladder block on the screen 2 Touch Mon to start the
223. e 3 Com pulse multiply numer 1 4 Com pulse multiply denom verify 5 In position range 100 pulse 6 Position control gain 1 41 rad s Write All 7 Pos com acc dec time cons 3 ms 8 Internal speed command 1 100 r min 9 Internal speed command 2 500 r min D 10 Internal speed command 3 1000 r min 11 Acceleration time constant 0 ms default 12 Deceleration time constant 10000 ms 13 S pattern acc dec time cons 0 ms v l To next page 26 20 1 Touch the Read All key The parameter values in the servo amplifier are read and displayed on the screen 2 The parameter read confirmation window appears Touch the OK servo amplifier to the GOT key to read the parameter values in the 3 The parameter values read from the servo amplifier are displayed on the screen The parameters disabled for write read are not displayed on the parameter setting screen 4 Choose the item whose parameter will be set with the la v key and touch the Change key 26 20 26 OPERATIONS OF SERVO AMPLIFIER MONITOR SCREENS MELSEC GOT From previous page 5 As the parameter setting window appears enter the Parameter name sfuto tuning parameter setting data with Alphanumeric and touch setting field MMB 0001 042Fh_ PV 0108 4 71 Setting to confirm the setting range If you do not confirm it
224. e DEL key can be used to clear individual characters among those input Touch input confirmation Test continues Test ends S ET When is touched tests the I O signal Touch RESET 3 1 All of the following operations can be carried out by touching 2 the keys in the displayed key window e When you touch at the upper left of the key window the key window closes and the display returns to the monitor Screen 1 Use the alphabetic character keys to specify the name of the device to be tested and then touch K 1 2 Use the numeric keys to specify the device number and then touch P 3 Use the numeric keys to specify Set or Reset 0 OFF 1 ON 1 Do not perform the following tests When testing the module may not operate correctly or the buffer memory input signal may return to the output value output status from the special function module 1 Test the buffer memory for reading only from the PLC CPU 2 Test the input signal to the PLC CPU from the special function module 2 When testing buffer memory data specify the change value in the following way 1 For data where 16 32 bits is displayed with one number specify the change value in decimal 2 For data where one number of 16 32 bits is displayed as a percent such as with an A D conversion module specify the change value corresponding to the percentage in decimal Exam
225. e Z 4 K100 5 gt LD TO 6 ANI M 2 SET 1 4 GO 7 D20 Read the 14th step to insert 2 14 END the command 15 NOP 16 NOP MoV D gt 2 gt 0 gt SP gt K gt 14 D20 2 14 K2Y0018 gt 1 1 gt 8 gt GO 19 END 20 NCP 9 The command of MOV D20 K2Y0018 was added to Step 14 20 9 20 9 20 OPERATION OF EDITING SCREEN FOR EACH LIST MELSEC GOT 20 2 4 Deleting command The following example shows the procedure of deleting the command from the sequence program Before deletion Delete the ANI MO command f 0 After deletion 5 LD TO Delete the ANI 7 P K80 K5 D20 MO command Operation example SHIFT DELETE 14 D20 Select the Delete mode 14 K2Y0018 19 END 20 NOP 2 SET 6 GO Read the 6th step 3 GO The key deletes the command at the cursor position The step number is brought forward V The ANI MO command was deleted 20 10 20 10 20 OPERATION OF EDITING SCREEN FOR EACH LIST 20 2 5 Using Help function Operation example MELSEC GOT HELP is input to use the Help function Input of HELP displays the Help function menus in each mode Select the corresponding item for execution 1 Reading the command in the sequence program Example of reading the area using the MOV command in the sequence program 20 11 HELP MENU In
226. e GOT The OS data can only be copied from the GOT to the memory card 8 Setting a use environment of the GOT see Section 4 5 for details stated atta tata atta OSHEE P T F TTT S E BUZZER VOLUME NONE SHORT LONG OUTSIDE SPEAKER OFF ON SCREEN SAVE TIME O MIN D FREE SCREEN SAVE LIGHT OFF ON LANGUAGE BASE EINGLISH MICRO Baud rate 00 9600 19200 MICRO COM FORM FURM 1 FORM T SELECT CHANGE You can set the operating environment of the GOT such as the beep sound message display language and screen saver s idle time When using the A985GOT you can also make settings on the Human sensor 1 OVERVIEW 4 Running diagnostic checks on GOT hardware see Section 4 6 GRAPH IC CHECK L Os AREA CHECK Bid a aaa a SEE ee ee ee eee treet TAREA AAA ATREA FONTROM CHECK COMM CHECK CETTE TTT tin et eee ea rr od OOO uu uM MU MEMCARD CHECK TOLICHSIW CHECK USERROM CHECK MELSEC GOT You can run diagnostic checks on the GOT hardware including the image check font check memory card check and so on 5 Other functions see Section 4 7 for details e Displaying data on available space in the GOT internal memory e Adjusting the clock of the PLC CPU e Displaying the display area cleanup screen e Changing security levels e Limiting access to the Utility Menu screen 1 1 2 Features of the ladder monitor function Installing the ladder mon
227. e History Monitor 2 Note that some functions are unavailable depending on the connection target CPU and connection form There are the following restrictions on each function depending on the connection target CPU and connection form Refer to Chapter 2 of the GOT A900 Series User s Manual GT Works Version5 GT Designer Version5 compatible Connection System Manual for the connectable CPU names and the access range for monitoring per connection form 2 BEFORE BEGINNING OPERATION MELSEC GOT a Connection with QCPU Q mode BT13 Indicates that the ABGT J61BT13 is used intelligent device station BT15 Indicates that the ABGT J61BT 15 is used remote device station G4 Indicates that the ASGT RS4 or ASGT 50WRSA is used via G4 O Usable A Partly restricted X Unusable Ref QCPU Q Mode Functions Scion Bus CPU direct Computer link MELSEC CC Link connection Ethernet connection connection connection NET connection BT13 BTS G4 connection Ladder Sequence program monitoring Section monitor using ladder signals 6 3 1 Displ Decimal and hexadecimal display Secti pay of word device values a switching 6 3 3 Device comment display EN Sr o Section Monitoring of current values by monitor pre registering monitor devices 9 2 Batch Monitoring of n points of current alues subsequent to specified monitor a c 9 3 levice cede of m points of current T C monitor VUES set values contact points Section and
228. e Manual Factory set to FULL POINT e f the touch panel is not touched within the specified time the screen saver function switches off the display to prevent burn in of the display device Especially for the display screen type of EL it is recommended to use this function Dedicated to the A985GOT the Human sensor function automatically deactivates the screen saver without any touch on the touch panel by means of a signal detected by the Human sensor Using the system information function of the GOT the signal detected by the Human sensor may also be controlled by the PLC CPU For full information on the system information function refer to the GT Designer HELP function Signal detection timings are shown below System signal 2 Detection Human sensor detection signal No detection Human sensor operator motion Activation Screen saver status Deactivation Operator approached Operator moved away 1 Motion that the Human sensor cannot detect outside the range or too low moving speed 2 Detection error of Human sensor approx 0 5 sec delay due to Human sensor detection sensitivity 3 Human sensor OFF delay time communication processing time 4 Time when screen saver is being deactivated 5 Human sensor OFF delay setting is required since the Human sensor outputs Detection and No detection alternately 6 Human sensor OFF delay screen save time 4 OPERATING THE UTILITY FU
229. e load torque e The effective value is displayed on the assumption that the rated torque is 100 Regenerative load ratio Displays the maximum torque generated Peak load ratio e The maximum value for the past 15 seconds is displayed on the assumption that the rated torque is 100 Displays the instantaneously generated torque e The value of the generated torque is displayed in real time on the assumption that the rated torque is 100 yin one Displays the within one revolution position in the servo motor in pulse units of the encoder revolution position e When the value exceeds the maximum pulse count it returns to 0 Displays the distance from the home position 0 in the absolute position detection system as 13 ABS counter the multi revolution counter value of the absolute position encoder Load inertia moment Displays the estimated ratio of the servo motor shaft equivalent load inertia moment to the ratio servo motor s inertia moment Bus voltage Displays the voltage across P N of the main circuit converter 2 About the key functions The following table indicates the functions of the keys used for the operations of the monitor screen _ciear Clears the cumulative feedback pulses or cumulative command pulses to 0 md Returns to the function selection menu screen Instantaneous torque Terminates the servo amplifier monitor functions Scrolls the monitor items in units of six items Displayed onl
230. e multiplication of the electronic gear CMX CDV is displayed this value command pulses may not match the indication of the cumulative feedback pulses e The sign appears for the reverse rotation command Displays the position command input pulse frequency s The value before multiplication of the electronic gear CMX CDV is displayed e The sign appears for the reverse rotation command Cumulative feedback pulses Command pulse frequency Analog speed command voltage In speed control mode Analog speed limit voltage In torque Displays the input voltage of the analog speed limit VLA control mode Analog torque command voltage In position speed control mode Analog torque limit voltage In torque Displays the voltage of the analog torque command TC control mode 1 Displayed only when the MR J2S A is connected 26 4 26 4 Displays the input voltage of the analog speed command VC Displays the voltage of the analog torque limit TLA 26 OPERATIONS OF SERVO AMPLIFIER MONITOR SCREENS MELSEC GOT No item Description o Displays the ratio of the regenerative power to the permissible regenerative power in e The permissible regenerative power changes depending on the presence absence of the regenerative brake option Set the parameter No 0 value correctly according to the regenerative option Set 80 or less as a guideline 9 Effective load ratio Displays the continuous effectiv
231. e of grip switch cancel At the setting of NO ACTION the pressed touch key is turned off when it is released May be set only for the A950 handy GOT factory set to KEY OFF 4 Setting of video window may be selected only when the A9GT 80VA is fitted to the A985GOT V e Channel You can choose the video channel for which video window settings are made The settings can be made per video channel e Signal You can choose the video picture input system NTSC PAL e Video width You can choose the video window resolution 720x480 dots 640x480 dots Color balance contrast brightness color power You can adjust the contrast brightness and others of the video picture displayed on the GOT May be selected only when the A9GT 80VA is fitted to the A985GOT V factory set to 5099 4 OPERATING THE UTILITY FUNCTION MELSEC GOT 5 Setting of RGB screen may be selected only when the A9GT 80Rt1 is fitted to the A985GOT V Clock phase You can adjust the flicking of the RGB screen displayed on the GOT H Position V Position You can adjust the position of the RGB screen displayed on the GOT s RGB close key You can select which position of the screen to touch to switch from the RGB screen to the GOT monitor screen You can also turn on off the bit device RGB display controlling bit to switch the screen For the RGB display controlling bit refer to the GT Works Version 5 GT Designer Version 5 Referenc
232. ec 12 1 7 over Lint a ce e Change current value of buffer memory n jo 1 S e Turn output signal from PLC CPU on and off Es uM E m L Proceed to Sec 12 1 7 and Secs 12 2 to 12 31 12 7 12 7 12 OPERATION OF EACH SPECIAL MODULE MONITOR SCREEN MELSEC GOT 12 1 7 Test for special function module 4 CAUTION Read the manual carefully and fully understand the operation before the test operation modifying the current value of a buffer memory of special function module monitor In addition never modify data in a test operation to a device which performs a crucial operation to the system It may cause an accident by a false output or malfunction Testing can be performed for all buffer memory data displayed on the current monitor screen This section describes the operation for changing the current value of the buffer memory and turning the output signal from the PLC CPU to the special module on and off POINTS 1 When testing test for the buffer memory to be written in from the PLC CPU and the output signal that is output from the PLC CPU 2 Be sure to carry out the test operation with the PLC CPU in STOP status If the PLC CPU is tested during RUN status it returns to the output values and output status from the sequence program Operation procedure Display monitor screen SET Data MONIT AD71 Parameter Data Monitor Screen RESET Chg menu END
233. ect test item VALUE16 or VALUE32 Change current value of word device SET VALUE When SET RST iis selected Change T or C set value lucc o om e m e Em BM VAL16 or BM VAL32 NET Nol STATION Change current value of buffer memory O DEVICE l RST 0 SET 1 o or BM VAL16 16 bits is the object X Y ILM ILL ILS lt q gt With VALUE32 or BM VAL32 32 bits is the object B F module When VALUE16 VALUE32 is selected When SET VALUE is selected NETWKNo STATION NETWKNo STATION DEVICE J VLIK DEVICE VLIK WIR via rye WIA Z Vi TIC P EIG AC IDEL i BOI REE 2 Specify the network No station No and CPU No of Al the object PLC CPU See Sec 9 1 3 1 For data link system Network No 0 Station FF Own station 0 Master station 1 to 64 Local station For network system Network No 0 Host loop 1 to 255 Specify loop Station FF Own station 0 Control station 1 to 64 Normal station For Ethernet connection Network No 1 to 239 Station 1 to 64 For multi CPU system y Arrow Se
234. ed 7 24 SVP 10 50 103 906 le used axis ws started 7 24 Maj ft astat sv am qu is FF initial processirg the ap is 10 51 20 1004 Mt wt installed a sv err cooured or the cable is faulty 7424 SVP 10 51 21 q Cmar speed outside the rage 7 24 sy P i 10 51 22 906 Te urused axis ws started No Item Description 1 H D H M The dates and times when errors occurred are displayed The axis Nos and axis types of the axes where errors occurred are 2 Ax displayed Virtual axis Virtual Synchronous encoder axis Sync The servo program Nos that were being executed at error occurrence are displayed 3 SV P No The execution destination of the servo program in error is not displayed Using the servo program No refer to the execution destination The types and error codes of the errors that occurred are displayed The error types are displayed as indicated below Minor error e Major error e Servo error 4 Err Code e Servo program setting error Servo P e Real virtual switching Switch e Test mode request error Test e Manual pulse generator setting error Manual e PCPU ERROR e SSCNET ERROR 5 Error Definition i The definitions of the errors that occurred are displayed The program number in error is displayed if the set data have any errors 1 Not displayed whe
235. ed as special on the system configuration screen cannot be monitored using the special module monitor function To monitor these modules use the system monitor function BM Monitor 2 Display when connecting the small building block type PLC CPU This precaution pertains to a situation where an expansion base unit for a large building block type of setup is connected to a small building block type CPU such as the A1SCPU in a station connected to the GOT In such a case the special function module on the large expansion base unit is displayed on the system configuration screen with the same model name as that of the small building block type special function module If there is no small building block type special function module special is displayed and the object module cannot be monitored Example Module Model Model Name Displayed AD72 A1SD71 AJ71ID A1SJ71ID AJ71PT32 8S83 A1SJ71PT32 S3 AD75P A18D75P A68AND CH1 to CH8 A1S64AD CH1 to CH4 A68RD CH1 to CH8 A1S62RD CH1 to CH4 3 Monitoring restricted special function modules a When monitoring the AD71 S1 S2 S7 When the slot on front of the AD71 module is an empty slot monitoring is done in the following way 1 The AD71 is treated as the AD72 and AD72 is displayed on the system configuration screen In this case when
236. ediately after the step number The 3rd line in the display area is selected for editing You can use the and y keys to move p gt up and down 4 Step number display A step number is displayed as a decimal number On the 1st and 2nd lines in the display area significant digits in the lower four digits of a step number are displayed On the 3rd and 4th lines in the display area up to five significant digits in a step number are displayed Line1 R2345 L D X0000 Displays significant digits in the lower t 22346 MOV four digits of a step number 12346 D100 Sz a ud isplays up to five significant digits in Line 4 1 2346 D200 Sep ni ber 9 9 Step number 5 Device display Two or more device specifications attached to a basic or application instruction are displayed using the same step number For information on the step numbers see Paragraph 4 above 6 Display of data input from the keys Data input from the keys will appear at the cursor position As more characters are input the cursor moves to the right The cursor appears as g Example The user enters SET 1 0 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC GOT 7 Shifting of data to the left during the input of a program When the user inputs a program the codes entered before a touch on the GO key will appear on the 4th bottom line of the display area If the codes cannot appear on a single line the display on
237. een SET RESET Data Chg MONIT MENU Inputs Xx Outputs Y N HOT Error Online Upper Lim Error Lower Lim Error Sensor Error Correction Err J Position Error Error 8 0 8 Status 1 9 Status Status Status Status Status Status Status TIMONI DO N e a N e O PLC READY Pasit Start Posit Stop Fwd Jog Start Rev Jog start LS D P Enable Error Reset P1 Disable P2 Disable 12 14 12 to 226 11 12 to 226 1 000A 000B 0009 0005 0006 000C to 00E2 000C to 00E2 12 14 12 OPERATION OF EACH SPECIAL MODULE MONITOR SCREEN MELSEC GOT 12 8 A1S62RD Module Monitor Screen Image dec hex AiS62RD Operation Monitor Screen RESET Chg MENU Temp value C Temp Value C i Disabled Enabled 21 16 bits 32 bits 0110110110110110 0123 5 1 0123 567 2 1 Enabled 0 Disable 0123 5 0123 567 Conversion 21 0110110110119110 1 Completed 0 Not Completed Average sample Time Count ed 21 0110110110110110 S 9 1 7 1 Averaging 1 Time Average 0 Sampling 0 Count Average Ru Disconnection detection Wi H Disconnection detection Wi Error Temp Sensor Type 0 Merror code 012345 O New JIS DIN 1 01d JIS A1S62RD Input Output Monitor screen EN HOT Error READY Error Detection CH1 Disconnecte CH2 Dis
238. eens The system monitor function provides an entry monitor a batch monitor and a buffer memory monitor enabling monitoring of any device for complete flexibility in any application Entry monitor Batch monitor DEVICE MONITOR TEST MENU FORM SET BATCH MONITOR TEST MENU FORM SET NETWK No 0 STATION FF NETWK No 0 STATION FF D 15 2147483648 DW D 10 32767 D 18 500 D 10 32767 D 11 0 D 19 3234 X 001 e D 12 0 D 20 0 M 25 O D 13 E D 21 0 Y 70 e D 14 0 D 22 0 w 200 43 D 15 3 D 23 32768 R 50 68378428 DW D 16 0 D 24 0 D 300 30000 D 17 0 D 25 0 Up to 8 points for a PLC CPU device registered by the user can be monitored in one window see Section 9 2 e Up to 16 points subsequent to a PLC CPU device specified by the user can be monitored in one window see Section 9 3 T C monitor Buffer memory monitor TC MONITOR TEST MENU FORM SET BM MONITOR TEST MENU FORM SET NETWK No 0 STATION FF NETWK No 0 STATION FF VO NOL 1 T 0 PV 0 SV 0 O A BM 1110 32767 BM 1118 0 Production line A BM 1111 64 BM 1119 0 A 1 PV 0 SV 0 it OH BM 1112 149 BM 1120 150 Production line B BM 1113 1111 BM 1121 131 T 2PV 150 SV 150 0 BM 1114 126 BM 1122 32768 Production line C BM 1115 160 BM 1123 555 T 3 PV 0 SV 0 JL OH BM 1116 255 BM 1124 2368 Production line D V BM 1117 1200 BM 1125 11000 Up to 8 points
239. en N 001 Displays the DI DO signals of the extension lO unit Changes to the function device screen refer to Section 26 6 2 Changes to the amplifier information screen refer to Section 26 6 3 Changes to the unit composition list screen refer to Section 26 6 5 ABSdata Changes to the ABS data screen refer to Section 26 6 4 1 Displayed only when the MR J2M A series is connected Confirms the settings and returns to the function selection menu screen Terminates the servo amplifier monitor functions 26 11 26 11 26 OPERATIONS OF SERVO AMPLIFIER MONITOR SCREENS MELSEC GOT 26 6 2 Function device display screen This section describes the display data of the function device display screen and the key functions displayed on the screen 1 About the display data MR J2M P8A 9600 bps Servo amp Monitor 10st MR J2S CP 9600 bps Servo amp Monitor ast Menu End Input Slot Number Dutput Slot Number x Function Func 12345678 Function Fun 12345678 EN FF pes SN H H Wo RD ITA O Input Function Dutput Function 0FF LSP NH ae SA A LSN laa aaas ar E SON m CDP RD PUS Ti OO INN VLC IL O DOG DI4 TLC PTO Pe HH H ANG H H DIO TCH INP PT1 14 CR La HH ALM 888 O 1 qb HNG PT2 rr HH m KH Ti Dre ALM
240. en 32 special special 32 points points points points 0 240 Head XY number S Set randomly GOT system configuration screen T Special Special Module name not displayed b If the slot assigned to Output in I O allocation is not fitted with a module the GOT displays Input Common to ACPU and QnACPU 6 The system configuration including remote I O stations cannot be monitored 7 Display provided when the QA1S6 extension base unit is used with the QCPU Q mode The following instruction is given for the case where the QA1S6L extension base unit is connected to the QCPU Q mode which is a GOT connected station In this case any of the following special function modules is displayed as the abbreviated formats on the system configuration screen You can use the Unit datail infomation to confirm the formal format of the module which was displayed as the abbreviated format Unsupported special function modules are displayed as Special and the corresponding modules cannot be monitored Loaded module Displayed format A1S63ADA 63ADA A1SJ71PT32 S3 J71PT32 A1SJ711D1 R4 A1SJ711D2 R4 S1 A1S64TCTT BW S1 64TCTT R A1S64TCRT BW S1 J711D 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC GOT 3 4 Network monitor function specifications POINTS Refer to Section 2 3 for restrictions on the network monitor function 3 4 1 Network information to be monitored The following table shows the type
241. en f When a screen other than the basic screen is displayed touch MENU at the top of the currently displayed screen display the basic screen and select Device Monitor HA When you touch MENU you return to the basic screen When you touch FORM you can change this display See Sec 9 1 2 When you touch SET you can specify the monitor station and device See Sec 9 1 3 ITEM THEN ENTER DEVICE PRESS SET KEY SELECT TYPE amp NO 2 Enter the monitor device U Set the station and device to be monitored For the setting method see Sec 9 1 3 Whep entry is complete display Ihe Device 1 Monitor device entry is in station modules Monitor screen If you change the station for the monitor device all monitor devices entered before that are invalid 2 A maximum of 8 entry devices can be entered DEVICE MONITOR TEST MENU FORM SET To enter more than 8 delete in order from the old entry NETWISNOT 0 SSTATIONIFF device The 8 most recent entry device will be D 15 2147483648 DW monitored Nee rco As needed re enter after deleting the entry device M 25 O For the method of deletion see Sec 9 2 3 Y 70 e W 200 43 R 50 68378428 DW D 0 3 Change the screen display Ph Do if needed For the display change method see Sec 9 1 2 9 OPERATION OF THE VARIOUS SYSTEM MONITOR SCREENS MELSE
242. en connected to a MELSECNET B or MELSECNET Il master station 2 Key Functions The table below shows the function of keys that are used on the other station parameter status monitor screen Returns to the own station monitor screen Exits the other station parameter status monitor screen and returns to the previous monitor screen where the network monitor function was executed 17 14 17 14 17 USING THE NETWORK MONITOR SCREENS MELSEC GOT 17 3 5 Display contents and keys functions other station CPU action status monitor This section describes the other station CPU action status monitor screen and the function of on screen keys This option is not selectable when connecting to a remote I O network system 1 Display contents FF The display details are the same as the ones on the A985 97 960GOT Ale Bs Els EN Box Meza dd ox Ld 12 EN ok Lyn Iri Epi Eis EH ie ER SE ER D gt perat ion a L 3 OK gd 22 EN EN es ER oK yl 8 ox ud S n sz EN EB 34 c ERR Lol d ok Lad lf f lf Lh FT TU KT 4 RB Ep ss EE OK ni i OK gl s EN Es ES B OK di B OK di fees mea Jok B Iri Ir 62 d OK No Contents of Display 1 Station numbers are shown up to the maximum number of linked stations Any
243. er bar code report CSV file video RGB input 1 When installed into the GOT this OS uses the memory space twice larger than that of the other extended function OS 2 Install the Other extended function OSs when using the following functions Report function e Operation panel function Printer function Barcode function Video display function RGB display External l O function When object function is used to create CSV format files For this extended function OS refer to the following 1 and 2 and select the OS that meets the language to be output to the printer or CSV file and the optional device used 1 Language to be output to the printer connected to the GOT or the CSV file alarm history display function recipe function ESC printer Output in Japanese PCL printer Output in English Chinese Big 5 printer Output in Chinese traditional language Chinese GB printer Output in Chinese simplified language 2 Used optional device External key input Operation panel ten key panel operation panel function Proximity I O External I O device external I O function Video RGB input Video camera video display function personal computer RGB display function 2 BEFORE BEGINNING OPERATION MELSEC GOT b Number of extended function OSs installed and free space of GOT s built in memory Number of Extended functions OSs Memory Space Used k bytes Free Space User area k bytes b 1 Since the A95
244. er in 32 bit modules beginning with an odd number D1 D3 1017 1018 1019 1020 1021 1022 1023 Monitor display module Nothing displayed 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC GOT 3 The Date column of a Rated Plate shows the date manufactured and function version number If it reads 9707 B or a later notation timer counter settings can be changed and device comments can be displayed when using any of the large scale QnACPUS or small scale QnACPUSs When changing the timer counter setup value and performing the device comment display use the CPU that is described above Viewing the Rated Plate MELSES PROGRAMMBLE CONTROLLER DATE 9707 B LS Date of Function manufacture version 4 Only the main program may be used to change the timer counter set values on the AnNCPU AnACPU and AnUCPU b Only the program of the file name displayed on the T C monitor screen may be used to change the timer counter set values on the QnA and QCPU Q mode Refer to Section 9 4 2 for details 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC GOT 3 3 Special module monitor function specifications POINTS Refer to Section 2 3 for restrictions on the special unit monitor 3 3 1 Access ranges to be monitored 1 When using bus connection CPU direct connection computer link connection The special function modules on the bases of the connected station and other stations can be monitored Special module monitoring for computer
245. erified in the ladder monitor AL A oet NETWK NO 0 STATION FF SET RST VALUE16 BM VAL16 Cancel Print K E SET VAL VALUE32 SIE 3 When using A960GOT EL NOTE The current value display of the word device becomes hidden from view due to the test window Using the gt key entries the hidden current NETWK NO 0 STATION FF L E A L md value display can be displayed by scrolling to the right left SET RST VALUE16 BM VAL16 SET VAL VALUE32 BM VAL32 E EET RI E ES Green Print 6 OPERATING THE VARIOUS LADDER MONITOR SCREENS 6 3 5 About Hardcopy Output MELSEC GOT This section describes the way to print the ladder monitor screen with the printer or to save it in the PC card in the BMP JPEG file format during ladder monitor TTT Lo Ly 1 PC card BMP JPEG file Eu El Printer Depending on the used GOT output the hardcopy in the following corresponding method 1 When A985GOT or A97 GOT is used Touch the Print Screen or Cancel Print screen to output the hardcopy 2 When A95 GOT or
246. erstand the operation before the test operation ON OFF of bit devices modifying current value of a word device modifying timer counter setting modifying the current value or modifying the current value of a buffer memory of system monitor special function module monitor and ladder monitor In addition never modify data in a test operation to a device which performs a crucial operation to the system It may cause an accident by a false output or malfunction REVISIONS The manual number is given on the bottom left of the back cover Print Date Manual Number Aug 2000 SH NA 080118 A First edition Oct 2000 SH NA 080118 B Nov 2000 SH NA 080118 C Feb 2001 SH NA 080118 D SH NA 080118 E May 2001 Aug 2001 May 2002 SH NA 080118 F SH NA 080118 G Partial additions Section3 1 Section3 2 Section3 3 Section3 4 Partial corrections Section4 12 Partial additions Section4 1 Section4 5 Partial additions Chapter1 Chapter2 Section3 1 Section3 1 1 Section3 2 Section3 2 4 Section3 3 Section3 4 Section3 5 Section3 5 1 Section3 5 4 Section4 2 Section4 3 Section4 5 Section6 1 1 Section1 7 1 1 Section 7 2 1 Section1 7 2 2 Section1 7 2 3 Section1 7 2 4 Section1 7 3 1 Section1 7 3 2 Section1 7 3 3 Section1 7 3 4 Section1 7 3 5 Section1 7 3 6 Section1 7 3 7 Partial additions Section1 1 2 Section2 2 Section2 3
247. ervo amplifier power off Single revolution data of encoder present value before servo amplifier power off e Servo command at servo amplifier power off Monitor present value at servo amplifier power off 23 12 23 OPERATIONS OF VARIOUS MOTION MONITOR SCREENS MELSEC GOT 2 Key functions The following indicates the functions of the keys used for operation of the present value history monitor screen Key Function Display example When axis 1 is monitored Used to return to the monitor menu screen Used to end the present value history monitoring and return to the screen that was being displayed when the motion monitor function was started Used to change the axis to be monitored 23 13 23 13 23 OPERATIONS OF VARIOUS MOTION MONITOR SCREENS MELSEC GOT 23 4 Parameter setting With the parameter setting function you can set the servo parameters basic parameters adjustment parameters of the connected motion controller CPU Q172CPU Q173CPU 23 4 1 Display data and key functions of parameter setting screen This section explains the display data of the parameter setting screen and the key functions displayed on screen 1 Display screen Sys Cont Param Setting AxNo 1 AXNO END uto 7 i No Auto Gain Adjustment Manual Mode2 SV Response Setting 5 Load Inertia Ratio 7 0 To Motor Position Ctrl Gain1 35 rad sec A Speed Ctrl Gaini 177 rad sec Position Ctrl Gain2 35 rad
248. et to 1 Host FF address Specify the address on the DH 485 network assigned to the PLC CPU to which the HMI adaptor is connected The specified PLC CPU is the host when monitor device setting is made on GT Designer For details of monitor device setting refer to the help of GT Designer Factory set to 1 4 OPERATING THE UTILITY FUNCTION MELSEC GOT 8 When communication driver for Matsushita Electric Works PLC connection is installed e Baud rate Choose the transmission speed 4800 9600 19200 38400 Factory set to 19200bps e Startup time Set when seconds to start communication with the PLC CPU after power on of the GOT Factory set to Omsec e Send message delay Set the waiting time from when the GOT has received data from the PLC CPU until the GOT send the next data to the PLC CPU Factory set to 3msec C C U monitor registration Choose whether CCU monitor registration is made or not When multiple GOTs peripheral devices are connected to one CPU via the C C U up to one unit When the CPU is the FP10SH up to five units can be set can be registered for C C U monitor When two or more GOTs are used or they are used with peripheral devices together set No for C C U monitor registration 9 When communication driver for Ethernet connection is installed 10 When extended function OS for gateway functions is installed 11 When A9GT J71E71 T module is connected e GOT NET No Set the network number of the
249. expanded comment Japanese character comment or Japanese kana comment When changing to hexadecimal display When changing to comment display DEVICE MONITOR TEST MENU FORM SET DEVICE MONITOR TEST MENU FORM SET NETWK No 0 STATION FF NETWK No 0 STATION FF D 15 H 80000000 D 200 50 A D H 8001 Production line A X e W 200 43 M O Production quantity Y e R 50 68378428 DW W link status R X10 100 C Production line B M 3 Precautions for comment display a When any of the following CPUs is being monitored comments are not displayed 1 FXCPU 2 Motion controller CPU Q172CPU Q173CPU 3 QnACPU whose serial number indicated in the DATE field of the rating plate is 9707B or earlier b When any of the following devices is being monitored comments are not displayed 1 Internal device GB GD GS of GOT 2 Host device B W SB SW at the time of MELSECNET connection 3 Host device X Y WW WR at the time of CC Link connection c When the QCPU Q mode or the QnACPU whose serial number indicated in the DATE field of the rating plate is 9707B or earlier is being monitored comments are not displayed if any of the following settings has been made in the PLC parameter PLC file setting 1 Not used has been selected for the comment file 2 Use the same file name as the program has been selected for the comment file 3 Password has been set to the co
250. ey arrangement and key functions Key arrangement and key functions of the list edit window are shown below When the A985 97 960GOT is used When the A95 956WGOT is used 1 Control key DITOR T 2 Mode key key for selection of mode peer lloren 3 Help key GALE READ 4 Command key upper character Device key lower character LDI ANI 8 9 SET ANB 1 Control key 4 5 6 5 Command key upper character Device number constant set key lower character General description of function Control key Key that declares start of step number input or automatic scroll Switch key that makes the lower character valid on each key with dual functions Whether upper or lower character is valid can be checked on the display Whether upper or lower character is valid can be checked on the display If the Clear key is pressed when the system is not in the Parameter mode Other mode or Help function the screen returns to the initial status of the mode selection The input commands or device numbers except for the mode are cleared Loc This is used for repeating the procedure if incorrect keys are pressed LEA In the Parameter mode the process is cancelled After restarting continue the operation In the Other mode the screen returns to the previous display When the Help function is used the screen returns to the displa
251. f on screen keys All these are displayed and used when the own station acts as the control station ordinary station on the MELSECNET 10 1 Display contents When the A985 97 960GOT is used When the A95 956WGOT is used The display details are the same as the ones on the A985 97 960GOT BE Touch S button to change the spe CH Sta display Curr Ctrl Sta 32 Com Info Ctrista Com SubCtrl Sta Com Have RintOMstSta Blckt Blck2 None None Common Param Sta Have nMode Normal Mode Total of L Sta iss Normal Trans La Normal Trans Largest DL Sta Com Status Cause of ssp Cause of Stop Section Contents of Display e This Station s Indicates the station number of the own station e Network Indicates the network number e Group Indicates the group number e Spc Ctrl Sta Indicates the station number of a station that is specified as a control station e Curr Ctrl Sta Indicates the station number of a station that is currently acting as the control station e Com Info Indicates whether the own station is communicating with the control station or the sub control station e SubCirl Sta Com Indicates the availability of a sub control station Available None s Rmt I O Mst Sta 1 Indicates the station number of a remote I O master station in Block 1 or Block 2 If the master station is not available this indicates None instead 1 Not displayed when the CPU ty
252. f settings include e Language used in a message display Japanese English e Buzzer sound adjustment e Sounds from an external speaker Idle time for a screen saver e Backlighting for a screen saver e Protocol and baud rate when connected to a microcomputer Reverse display Extension number and slot number for bus connection with QCPU e Transmission speed for Computer link connection Setup e Transmission speed for Omron Yaskawa Hitachi Matsushita PLC connection Section 4 5 e Startup time transmission delay and CCU monitor registration Matsushita Electric Works PLC only for Yaskawa Matsushita Electric Works PLC connection e Transmission speed and address for SIEMENS Allen Bradley PLC connection e Transmission time out setting for CC Link ID driver installation s Setting of disable enable detection sensitivity OFF delay for screen save human sensor e Grip switch enable disable setting A950 handy GOT only e Adjusting the color balance contrast brightness color power of a video window e Adjusting the clock phase H Position V Position of an RBG window and setting the touch key position for a return to the monitor screen The self test include diagnostic checks on GOT hardware as follows Drawing check Font check Memory card check Self test User graces the inia emo check Section 4 6 e OS space in the internal memory check CPU communications check Touch key check The contents of GOT memory information include
253. f the running axis currently monitored is displayed Motor Speed The actual speed of the servo motor is displayed Motor Current The motor current value at the rated current of 100 is displayed Servo Alarm The alarm detected by the servo amplifier is displayed 2 Key functions The following indicates the functions of the keys used for operation of the servo monitor screen Display example When Function Used to change the axis to be monitored axis 1 is monitored Used to return to the monitor menu screen Menu Used to end the servo monitoring and return to the screen that was being displayed when the motion monitor function was started 23 11 23 11 23 OPERATIONS OF VARIOUS MOTION MONITOR SCREENS MELSEC GOT 23 3 7 Display data and key functions of present value history monitor screen This section explains the display data of the present value history monitor screen and the key functions displayed on screen 1 Displayed data Present Value History Monitor FE Menu 1 gt 18 Tren HZ D H N 2 gt HP Data RE OH OH 1BESEOH OE 3 gt MON val V 9 17 12 OH OH 1D7051H 39353 0000 Nu PHR ON4 7 9 13 34 D7FEH 45F3H OH 0 0000 0 PHR OFF1 7 9 13 34 OH OH 20B67DH 490142 0000 PHR ON2 7 9 13 10 DTEDH 19460H OH 92274 0000 0 4 PHR OFF2 7 9 13 10 OH OH FFFFFFFOH 92274 0000 PHR ON3 7 8 13 10 D7EDH 19472H 0H 32290 0000 0
254. g TimeNumber E Input Status x o1234 i 01234 01234 01234 01234 01234 01234 01234 01234 L 6 01234 01234 01234 01234 i 01234 01234 i 01234 Error Code a 1 2 mmmmmmmum A1S68AD Input Dutput Monitor Screen X HOT Errar Ready Error Detect 20 to 27 0014 to 001B al A1SESAD Graph Monitor Screen Input s CH CH CH CH CH CH CH CH WDT Error 12 19 12 19 12 OPERATION OF EACH SPECIAL MODULE MONITOR SCREEN 12 13 A68ADN Module Monitor Screen Image AB8ADN Operation Monitor Screen SET RESET Data MONIT Eng MENU C annel 87654321 0110110110110110 O Disabled 1 Enabled Sample Average Count Time Sample Average i Count Time 076549218 7654321 9110110110110110 O Sampling d Averag ing i o Count Average l Time Average Count Time Input Status X Value Resolution 1 Input Status X Resolutian 2 Input Status X Resalution 3 MELSEC GOT 01234 0123 01234 0123 01234 0129 01234 0123 01234 0129 01234 0123 01234 0123 01234 0123 0122 0123 0123 0123 0122 0122 0123 0123 0123 0123 0122 oles 0123 0123 0123 0123 tn en n cn cn in cn ion Resolution selection 9 1 1 4000 2 1 8000 3 112000 Data MONIT AGBADA Input Ou
255. g from inappropriate storage or handling carelessness or negligence by the user Failure caused by the user s hardware or software design 2 Failure caused by unapproved modifications etc to the product by the user 3 When the Mitsubishi product is assembled into a user s device Failure that could have been avoided if functions or structures judged as necessary in the legal safety measures the user s device is subject to or as necessary by industry standards had been provided 4 Failure that could have been avoided if consumable parts battery backlight fuse etc designated in the instruction manual had been correctly serviced or replaced 5 Failure caused by external irresistible forces such as fires or abnormal voltages and Failure caused by force majeure such as earthquakes lightning wind and water damage 6 Failure caused by reasons unpredictable by scientific technology standards at time of shipment from Mitsubishi 7 Any other failure found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi or the user 2 Onerous repair term after discontinuation of production 1 Mitsubishi shall accept onerous product repairs for seven 7 years after production of the product is discontinued Discontinuation of production shall be notified with Mitsubishi Technical Bulletins etc 2 Product supply including repair parts is not possible after production is discontinued 3 Overseas service Overseas repairs shall be accepted by Mitsubishi
256. gner Abbreviation of image creation software GT Designer for GOT900 GT Simulator Abbreviation of GT Simulator screen simulator GOT900 Software GT Converter Abbreviation of data conversion software GT Converter for GOT900 GT Debugger Abbreviation of debugging software GT Debugger GT Manager Abbreviation of GT Manager data editing software for GOT900 GT SoftGOT Abbreviation of GT SoftGOT monitoring software GX Developer Generic term of SWT D5C GPPW E SW D5F GPPW E software packages neric term of SW D5C LLT E I r logi function softwar k GX Simulator A or iis adder logic test tool function software packages A 11 A 11 and special terms Q12HCPU Q25HCPU Q12PHCPU and Q25PHCPU CPU units QCPU A Mode Generic term of QO2CPU A QO2HCPU A and QO6HCPU A CPU units Generic term of QCPU Q Mode and QCPU A Mode Generic term of QnACPU Large Type and QnACPU Small Type Generic term of A2US H CPU AnS H CPU and A1SJ H CPU CPU units Generic term of ACPU Large Type ACPU Small Type and A1FXCPU CPU units FXCPU Generic term of FXo series FXON series FXoS series FX1 series FXIN series FX1S series FX series FX2C series FX2N series FXINS series and FX2NC series CPU unit Motion controller CPU Generic term of A273UCPU A273UHCPU A273UHCPU S3 A171SCPU S3 A171SHCPU A172SHCPU Q172CPU Q173CPU CPU unit FA controller Generic term of LM610 LM7600 LM8000 CPU unit Peripheral connection G4 Abbreviation of AJ65BT
257. h 10 or 10 to to change the numerical values in increments of 10 e Touch to set the clock of the PLC CPU b To return to the Utility Menu screen e Touch to return to the Utility Menu screen POINTS e Adjust the clock when you start up the system e The clock cannot be properly adjusted while reading or writing clock data by running sequence programs on the PLC CPU side or when M9028 is turned on by sequence programs in the case of the ACPU e This option is not selectable from the Utility Menu screen when connected to the PLC CPU that has no clock function e This option is not selectable when the A9GT RS2 is used for microcomputer connection e For MELSECNET 10 connection the function is unavailable when the connection target CPU is the QOOJCPU QOOCPU or Q01CPU 4 OPERATING THE UTILITY FUNCTION MELSEC GOT 4 9 Displaying the display area cleanup screen screen cleanup 1 Display screen Please press top corner buttons simutaneous ly 2 Features A black screen is displayed when cleaning up the display area This makes the Screen easy to view 3 Procedure a Basic operation e Touch the upper right and left corners of the screen at the same time to return to the Utility Menu screen Touch at the same time EGRE tub 4 OPERATING THE UTILITY FUNCTION 4 10 Changing security levels security password 1 Screen di
258. hat sets the touch switch expanded function with the GT Designer and start the system monitor operation When the Utility screen is dislayed touch PLC MON to start the system monitor function ID The circuit monitor function and special module function can also be started from the Utility screen Touch END Touch PLC MON Touch STOP 2 Basic screen Touch FORM Function change menu screen 3 1 See Sec 9 1 1 Touch SET 4 Touch MENU Touch MON Touch STOP 2 Touch FORM 3 MENU Display change menu screen 1 Monitor screen See Sec 9 1 2 2 for selected function eee prem vee 4 See Sec 9 7712 3 9 2 Touch EXEC A Test menu screen Touch SET Touch STOP CCC gt 2 LAUT MENU evice setting menu screen 1 REA 4 See Sec 9 1 3 FORM 3 2 Touch TEST 9 OPERATION OF THE VARIOUS SYSTEM MONITOR SCREENS MELSEC GOT 9 2 Entry monitor Enter the device to be monitored in advance The function that monitors only the device that was entered is called the entry monitor The entry monitor operation when executing the system monitor function is explained below 9 2 1 Basic operation The entry monitor operation procedure is shown below See Sec 9 1 1 Operation procedure Select Device Monitor with the basic scre
259. he Input the between the device the source data and the destination command key Input the command other than above without the Input the SP between the command the device the source data and the destination command key 20 3 2 Operation in Write mode W Procedures key input sequence Continuous write in NOP Write modify change of program 20 13 Program display HELP in the Write mode Set the specified range in the program to NOP Start step specification GO gt Final step specification 1 2 gt Start step specification gt GO WRITE Write the new program modify change 20 13 20 OPERATION OF EDITING SCREEN FOR EACH LIST MELSEC GOT 20 3 3 Operation in Read mode R Procedures key input sequence Read the command of the specified step number in Step number the program Command reading with the specified step number Read the command with the Read the specified Command specified command command in the program Read the command with the specified device used in the program Read the command with the specified device Read operation above T Y Step number y SP x T Ly Displ
260. he like of the corresponding module The keys used for the operation on the System Configuration screen shown in 2 are displayed Touch input 2 Key functions The following table indicates the functions of the keys used to perform operation on the System Configuration screen Function Monitoring ends and the display returns to the screen where the special module monitor function was started Shifts to the System Configuration screen Refer to Section 12 1 1 Scrolls the display one page up or down Scrolls one page down Scrolls one page up END v A 12 5 12 5 12 OPERATION OF EACH SPECIAL MODULE MONITOR SCREEN MELSEC GOT 12 1 5 Monitor screen configuration and key functions This section describes the structure of the monitor screen that is displayed by specifying the module on the system configuration screen in the Basic mode when the QCPU Q mode is used and the key functions displayed on the screen 1 Display with A68RD All types of data are displayed when the SET Data MONIT A6BRD Graph Monitor Screen RESET Chg MENU END v 1 lt readout from the special function module Disabled Enabled 87654321 TV 500 0110110110110110 t zs Ml aoo 1 Enabled 0 Disabled IS comp ete pu 3 EB Conversion 817654321 E e a00 et OS executes it automatically d tc an 1 Completed 0 Not Completed p 209 Sample Average Coun
261. he maximum number is defined by common parameters e Com Status Com Status Displays the communications status of the own station Parameter wait Cyclic comm NG e This shows the status of receiving Device BWY from the master station ADR AU OK Data is being received by cyclic receiving NG The own station cannot receive data because of column reading e This shows the status of receiving Device BW from the master station of a dual layer system OK Data is being received by cyclic receiving NG The own station cannot receive data due to column reading FLoop Shows the status of the primary loop lines of the own station Normal NG RLoop Shows the status of the secondary loop lines of the own station Normal NG Master BW From Hostmaster LoopBK Info 2 Key functions The table below shows the functions of keys that are used on the detailed own station monitor screen Returns to the own station monitor screen Exits the detailed own station monitor screen and returns to the previous monitor screen where the network monitor function was executed Changes the details on the window only for A95 GOT 17 4 17 4 17 USING THE NETWORK MONITOR SCREENS MELSEC GOT 17 2 3 Display contents and keys functions acting as a MELSECNET 10 Control station ordinary Station This section describes the contents of the detailed own station monitor screen and the function o
262. he model of the servo amplifier is selected 2 4 19200 The communication baud rate is selected 3 gt Station Support With The presence of the Station is selected 4 station 0 The Station No of the servo amplifier communicated when is is selected 5 IFU Station The Station No of communicated IFU is selected MR J2M P8A fxis Number The axis which becomes a communicated object is selected MR J2M P8B Capacity The capacity of the servo amplifier is selected MR HR MR HB MR HAC HR HTN Fix You cannot set Axis number and Capacity setting 1 About the display data No Hem Deseiption o Displays the servo amplifier model to be connected Displays the communication baudrate 38400 19200 9600 with the servo amplifier Station supp Displays the station number presence absence Displays the station number 00 to 31 of the servo amplifier to communicate with IFU Station Displays the serial communication station number of the IFU interface unit 2 About the key functions The following table indicates the functions of the keys used for the operations of the alarm display screen Sets the servo amplifier model to be connected Sets the communication baudrate 38400 19200 9600 with the servo amplifier E e Set the communication baudrate parameter on the servo amplifier side to 38400 or less Station station support Sets the station number presence absence Sets
263. hen download is finished Completed is displayed amplifier monitor can be operated through on the download dialog box the GOT GT Designer operation is finished End Proceed to Section 26 1 to operate the servo amplifier monitor 25 1 25 1 25 OPERATION PROCEDURES FOR SERVO AMPLIFIER MONITOR iari el MELSEC GOT 25 2 Operation procedures from user created monitor screen display to start of motion monitor This section provides the GOT operating procedure for starting the operation of any servo amplifier monitor function after completion of the installation of the servo amplifier monitor function OS Start up GOT Display the use created monitor screen Start the servo amplifier monitor function Start in either of the following methods Touch the key for which the touch key extended function has been set on GT Designer Display the utility menu screen and touch AMP MON Have you started servo amplifier monitor for the first time after powering on the GOT The setup screen appears Appears at the initial start only Set the communication baudrate SSS oa ee servo amplifier model etc Sana With e oresence of the Station is selected Powering off the GOT returns the setup Communicated when is selected screen settings to the initial states HA J2S A 3600 bes Servo amp Monitor Lost End Yodel HR J26 A The model of the servo amplifier is selected
264. her than the basic screen is displayed touch MENU at the top of the currently displayed screen display the basic screen and select TC Monitor non When you touch MENU you return to the basic screen NETWK No 0 STATION FF When you touch FORM you can change this display See Sec 9 1 2 When you touch SET the monitor station and device PRESS SET KEY SELECT can be specified See Sec 9 1 3 ITEM THEN ENTER DEVICE TYPE amp NO Specify the initial monitor device 1 Specify the station and devised to be monitored For the method of the specifying see Sec 9 1 3 When reading is complete display the TC Monitor screen TC MONITOR TEST MENU FORM SET NETWK No 0 STATION FF PV 0 SV PV 0 SV PV 150 SV PV 0 SV PV 0 SV PV 25 SV PV 100 SV PV 0 SV Change the screen display FF Do if needed For the display change method see Sec 9 1 2 oo a O GOGO OOO O E Co m NOoORWNM O 9 OPERATION OF THE VARIOUS SYSTEM MONITOR SCREENS MELSEC GOT 9 4 2 TC Monitor screen display and key functions In this section the TC Monitor screen display contents and the function of keys displayed at the top of the screen are explained 1 Display TC MONITOR TEST VENU EORM o NETWK No 0 STATION 33 FILE ABCDEF PRG T 0 PV 0 SV 0 OM Production line A T 1 PV 0 SV 0407 Production line B
265. here is a at the upper left of the screen touch it to return to the original screen When the screen below is currently displayed it is not necessary to touch this MENU Touch Ti H 40025 N Per unser boa Touch the appropriate display position on the ladder em reno v eno Cont Sea End Sea 110 16Dec Hex mon itor men u Print Coil Sea Fact Sea Test Cmnt Em A After moving to the ladder monitor screen the word device value is Mon when you touch Mon M v Change display form Change comment display 10 16 Dec Hex Touch Cmnt Touch Move to circuit monitor screen When changing to hexadecimal display When changing to comment display STEP 12345 18374 STEP 12345 18374 PLS M910 Character string dispaly ON i 4 zt Yo023 Ready Start Operation display operation ready instruction K25 TO K 14H D0 4 R Operation CALL P2 stat n To 7 warning 0007 0000 25 0019 0032 Exit PLCRD mon menu us 4 3 Ll Ext PLoRD mon menu use 3 2 LJ Print Cancel Print Cancel Screen Print Screen Print 6 OPERATING THE VARIOUS LADDER MONITOR SCR
266. hown for explanation of alphanumeric characters Command expressions are omitted Example To express key When input of command is explained MOV When input of alphanumeric characters is explained M 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC GOT 3 5 5 Display format on the display The following describes the position and content of each data field in the display area provided by the List editor function Current mode display Valid key display e EN r Step number device name and number Program list etc The 4th line displays data program name device name etc entered by the user 1 Mode and valid key display The following describes the mode and valid key display The mode display shows the list editor function mode selected by the user The valid key display shows which of the two functions assigned to each key is currently available the function indicated at the upper part of the key or the function indicated at the lower part of the key Current mode display Display Mode Read mode Write mode Insert mode Delete mode Parameter mode Other mode Valid key display This display is not always available With regard to keys framed in dotted lines in the figure shown at the left the valid key display indicates which E y FROM T B TO D INC JLB C E Sur READ frem PARAM ficis of the two functions assigned to each key is valid WRITE
267. ht and left corners of the screen at the same time Touch here simultaneously 2 Touch a touch key displayed on the monitor screen A touch key can be set in the touch key expanded function settings The following flowchart outlines the steps involved in selecting the utility function Touch after changing the setup data Touch key input Utility menu Selection Monitor screen Contrast adjustment PLC MON A A gt SP UNIT gt DATA amp OS COPY 7 D gt SETUP gt SELF CHECK gt MEMORY INFO IL LADDER MON gt TIME SET 1 If you have set the password for the utility gt CLEAN f menu the utility menu will appear after you enter the password For the way of entering the password PASSWORD refer to Section 4 11 Simul 2 How to adjust the brightness contrast mu ated gt NET MON differs with the GOT used touching For more information refer to Section 4 3 l 2 3 Changing any setting in Setup and c5 M Brightness adjustment touching resets the GOT and returns to Touch the monitor screen Notion monitor 4 Not available on the A95 GOT i Servo amplifier monitor 4 OPERATING THE UTILITY FUNCTION MELSEC GOT 4 3 Selecting the required functio
268. ice See Sec 9 1 3 e Deletion of entry device See Sec 9 2 3 e Test See Sec 9 6 Scroll the display up or down one line and display the monitor device that is not displayed just before or after the current display When five or more monitor devices are entered operation is enabled when the monitor device comment is displayed Scrolls down one line Scrolls up one line v A 9 OPERATION OF THE VARIOUS SYSTEM MONITOR SCREENS MELSEC GOT 9 2 3 Deleting a registered device The operation of deleting erasing the entry of the device being monitored with the Entry Monitor screen is explained below The following two methods can be used to delete the registered device e Random deletion Deletes only one specified device e Batch deletion Deletes all devices that are currently registered If there is a at the upper left of the screen touching the returns to the monitor screen Operation procedure Display Device Monitor screen FF See Sec 9 2 2 SET Touch Display device setting menu screen DEVICE MONITOR TEST MENU FORM SET NETWK No 0 STATION FF DEVICE DELETE ALL CLR TEST CANCEL po os Batch deletion Random deletion ALL CLR DELETE Touch either key Display device deletion screen 1 Specify the device to be deleted Match the dat
269. ice is DEVICE MONITOR TEST MENU FORM SET highlighted NETWK No 0 STATION FF D 15 2147483648 DW ZR 1042431 82767 X 0001 O M 25 O W 200 43 R 50 68378428 DW D 0 0 W 100 0 9 OPERATION OF THE VARIOUS SYSTEM MONITOR SCREENS MELSEC GOT 4 Quick test for the word device T C monitor and buffer memory DEVICE MONITOR TEST MENU FORM SET NETWK No 0 STATION FF D 15 ZR 1042431 X 0001 25 50 M rw 0 gt R 200 D W 100 2147483648 DW 32767 e O 43 68378428 DW 0 0 NETWK No 0 STATION FF DEC DEVICE W 2001 VL 7189 AJB i 4 5 6 CD 1 203V EF v A 0 AC DEL qe 9 21 When displaying the device monitor screen Touch the display position of the device to be changed The change value input screen is displayed Enter the current value to be changed in the KEY window See Section 8 1 3 for the KEY window operations 10 ERROR DISPLAY AND HANDLING WITH SYSTEM MONITORING MELSEC GOT CHAPTER10 ERROR DISPLAY AND HANDLING WITH SYSTEM MONITORING The following chart shows the error messages that may be displayed when operating the system monitor and the method of handling them Method of Handling Check the following PLC e Connections between the LU Communication could not be PLC CP
270. ification see 2 in Sec 6 2 2 Sea Displays the search history of the device contact coil search or touch search Back one place backward JUMP JUMPy Scrolls the display up or down by ten ladders 6 OPERATING THE VARIOUS LADDER MONITOR SCREENS MELSEC GOT POINT Sea About the Back key Immediately after the p key has been pressed to go back in the history a continuous device search using the key cannot be executed Using the CENE key you can go back into the history up to 100 ladders When any of the following operations is performed the search history is cleared to return to the normal ladder display 1 When the key is touched When a single ladder block takes up more than one screen scrolling can be made within the block 2 When the JUMP JUMP key is touched 3 When a step search END search or defect search is executed 4 When a comment display is changed 5 When a new ladder is read by touching PLCRD 6 3 2 Precaution during ladder monitoring 1 When making connection to the FXCPU a The comment display is kana comments only b During PLC read operation the PLC read can only be performed for own station only c STL step ladder the FXCPU exclusive instruction is not a contact point but treated as an instruction and displayed in the following manner When monitoring with the peripheral device for FX S0 STL l
271. ified network No or station No 2 The specified drive does not exist Check and correct the following 1 Does the specified PLC CPU exist 2 Is it online Data communication status 3 Has an error occurred LOCK ON OTHER MACHINE PLEASE CANSEL File is locked with the peripheral equipment GX Developer GPPQ After reading and writing with the peripheral equipment GX Developer GPPQ read the file again NOT EXISTING DRIVE 1 The specified drive does not exist 2 The specified drive is faulty 1 Check whether the specified drive exists or not DRIVE ERROR 2 Check whether the specified drive is faulty or not The specified file password differs from the Confirm the file password registered to ENTRY CODE S i E MISMATCH one registered as the file password of the the drive of the corresponding PLC corresponding PLC CPU CPU and specify it again FILE NOT FOUND When you selected the file and pressed the Read key the selected file did not exist in the PLC CPU drive 1 Perform read from the PLC on the network No station number input screen and update the file list 2 Change the specified drive corresponding memory USE BY OTHER MACHINE PLEASE CANCEL The sequence or comment is being used by the peripheral device GX Developer Perform file read again after completion of read write from to the peripheral device GX Developer 2M bytes of com
272. in b To quit entering a password e Touch to return to the previous monitor screen 26 17 26 17 26 OPERATIONS OF SERVO AMPLIFIER MONITOR SCREENS MELSEC GOT 26 7 2 Parameter setting screen This section describes the display data of the parameter setting screen and the key functions displayed on the screen The mark preceding the parameter name indicates that the parameter is made valid when power is switched off once and then on again after the parameter value has been set 1 Display screen MR J25 A 9600 bps Servo amp Monitor Pr Name Value Unit P change j 0 0000 1 Function selection 1 0002 2 Auto tuning 0105 Crie j 3 Com pulse multiply numer 1 A 4 Com pulse multiply denom 1 Verifu 5 In position range 100 pulse 6 Position control gain 1 50 rad s irite anj 7 Pos com acc dec time cons 3 ms 8 Internal speed command 1 100 r min 9 Internal speed command 2 500 r min Read 011 10 Internal speed command 3 1000 r min 11 Acceleration time constant 0 ms default 12 Deceleration time constant 0 ms 13 S pattern acc dec time cons 0 ms v Cu ke amplifier power to initiate changes L Y T T 1 2 3 4 No tem Description IIA Displays the parameter number Displays the parameter name Displays the current setting of the parameter Displays the setting unit of each parameter 1 When the A956W A95 GOT is used
273. including the current value set value contact point and Up to 16 points subsequent to the buffer memory of a special function coil can be monitored in a window subsequent to a PLC CPU timer T counter C specified by the user see Section 9 4 module specified by the user can be monitored in one window see Section 9 5 e With the GOT the full screen can be divided into four windows and separate monitoring carried out in all four windows simultaneously DEVICE MONITOR TEST MENU FORM SE H BATCH MONITOR TEST MENUJFORVI SET NETWK No 0 STATION FF NETWKNo 0 STATIONIFF 15 2147483648 DW 10 32767 T8 500 10 32767 19 3234 0 2 0 1 m e w 200 43 R 50 68378428 DW D 300 30000 21 0 looooooocd looooooocdg o 0 0 22 0 15 3 23 32768 0 24 0 o 25 o TC MONITOR TEST MENU FORM SET NETWK No 0 STATION FF BM MONITOR TEST MENUJFORV SET NETWK No 0 STATION FF VO NO 1 BM 1110 32767 BM 1118 o 64 T ov ow o Production line A T 1PV OSV Production line B TOTA 0 lLO BM 1112 149 BM 1120 150 BM 1113 1111 BM 1121 131 5 0 BM 1114 126 BM 1122 32768 160 BM 1123 555 o Production line C 3 0 O BM 1116 255 BM 1124 2368 Production line D__ Vil BM 1117 1200 BM 1125 11000 1 OVERVIEW
274. ion 21 If an error is detected with the list editor function during operation of each mode an error message appears at the 4th line of the display Error messages display conditions and corrective actions are displayed below If an error message appears take the following actions to resume operation 1 Check the error message 2 Remove the cause of the error 3 Input the corresponding key The error message disappears The screen returns to the status before error Example oooo NONO oo Reading the step with the RST command Display the error message Delete the error message The error message disappears The next operation is resumed 21 1 21 1 21 ERROR DISPLAY AND CORRECTIVE ACTIONS FOR LIST EDIT MELSEC GOT Display condition e In machine language writing the address Address error which was tried to be written was at the e Set the correct address write protect area In communication with the CPU for clearing the keyword or writing the parameter the e Mount the memory cassette properly memory cassette is insufficient or not e Replace the memory cassette with a new one mounted e The set step number is larger than the Step over error e Set the correct step number maximum step number Setting error Setting value is not correct e Set the correct value e The function which cannot be executed was Not selectable selected e Select other function The set device s
275. is aAxis Method Direction Address Return Speed Creep Speed Return Retry x hL tn 1000000 L 0 D08 4 Count l 1 8topperei 5 Counta2 2 8topper amp J Stopera pard Reese L L214 7483648 to 2147483647 x10 1 um x10 5 inch PLS 0 to 35999999 Px to 2 mm min 0600000000 x10 Tek inch mm 10 to600000000 x lt 10 3 inch mm x10 3 deg mm 1 to 1000000 O No Retry 1 retru 01234567890 012245678 012345678 URIE cia o 01234567890 01234567890 s10 5 deg t eta Ie prie eRe stad 012245678 012345678 012345678 012345678 c6 ADTSP OPR Extended Parameter MONIT MENU END Parameter Valid Range 3Axis PR OPR After DOG _ Accel Time Decel ime OP Distance zD ell Timo irons stel Torgue Limit i A AUREUS Ta RUP oe From Zero 0 to 65535 1 to 300 IT TM to 2147483547 x10 1 um 410 5 inch PLS O to 35999999 0123456789 01234 a vr o IMS d A ol 012 densos te F cct EIL oso de Caere ote to x10 1 um i i Travel Distance i 2147483647 x10 5 inch x10 5 deg 0123456789 0123456709 2 012345678930 410 5 degli 01294567890 01234567890 ADTSP Error History Error History Harning History SET RESET chg Data MONIT MENU Harning History Ax 60900900000
276. is displayed touch MOTION MON to start the motion monitor function 22 2 22 OPERATION PROCEDURES FOR MOTION MONITOR FUNCTION 22 3 From preceding page Select the motion monitor function to be used Motion MELSEC GOT Parameter setting monitor a Monitor menu screen appears vation Honiton e Present Value Man Positioning Monitor SFC Error History Servo Monitor Error List Present Value Hist Error List axis Select the menu item Refer to I Section 23 3 The monitor screen of the selected function appears Perform operation for the selected monitor function Present Value Mon Refer to Section 23 3 1 SFC Error History Refer to Section 23 3 2 Error List Refer to Section 23 3 3 Error List Axis Refer to Section 23 3 4 Servo Monitor Refer to Section 23 3 6 Positioning Monitor Refer to Section 23 3 5 Present Value Hist Refer to Section 23 3 7 Has the motion parameter changing password been registered No Enter the parameter changing Refer to password Section 22 2 1 Parameter setting screen appears Sus Param Setting amp xNo i xno 95 eo Gain Adjustment Manuel Mode2 SV Response setting 5 d Inertia Ratio 7 0 To Motor Position Ctrl Gaint 35 rad sec IA Soeed Cinl aini 177 rad
277. isplay screen When special function for test module is selected See Sec 12 1 7 v Touch DataChg Monitor menu display screen Touch on and SET RESET for specified module monitor menu See Sec 12 1 6 Touch 0 Monitor screen for specified monitor menu See Sec 12 1 5 Touch MONIT MENU 1 Touch END Go to user created monitor screen or utility screen 12 10 12 10 12 OPERATION OF EACH SPECIAL MODULE MONITOR SCREEN MELSEC GOT 12 2 A61LS Module Monitor Screen Image 000B SET Data MONIT 0004 A61LS Operation Monitor Screen RESET Che MENU 000A Limit Suitch Function Program No 0 Channel No Qutput Status Output Enable FEDCBAS8 76543210 0110110110110110 0110110110110110 Pasitianing Data Set Value Set Valu R B annel annel 0123 0123 0123 0123 0005 0006 0003 000C annel 0123 0123 annel 0123 0123 annel 0123 0123 annel 0123 0123 annel 0123 0123 0000 annel 0123 0123 annel 8 0123 0123 0008 annel 0123 0123 annel 0123 0123 0002 annel 0123 0123 annel 0123 0123 0001 annel 0123 0123 annel 0123 0123 0009 annel F 0123 0123 000D to 002C Status 0 0FF 1 0N Enable O Enabled 1 Disabled Measured Distance 0129456789 Resolver Speed 0123 rpm Target Address 0123 Error Under low 0 Overflow Batt Error 0 C
278. isplaying GOT memory information memory information 1 Display screen Sample screen MELSEC GOT s SP UNIT DATA NET WORK MON W Version ROM BIOS SYSTEM COMM DRIVER PLC MONITOR PRINT B CODE LADDER A SP UNIT MON SP RECIPE WAVE Installed 2 0 0 2 Features The contents e OS version of GOT memory information include number e Status of communications with the PLC CPU Available space in the internal memory Availability of memory cards and available space in a memory card Availability of the ladder monitor function 3 Procedure a Basic operation Touch A Y to scroll screens b To return to the Utility Menu screen Touch to return to the Utility Menu screen 4 OPERATING THE UTILITY FUNCTION MELSEC GOT 4 8 Setting the Clock Clock 1 Display screen Sample screen 09 99 17 37 57 THU DD MM YY T CHANGE lt SELECT e SET The time when the Clock Settings screen was displayed is shown in the window panel The time indicator in the upper right corner of the screen shows the current time After correcting the date or time check the clock for the current time 2 Features e The date time and a day of the week can be set to adjust the clock of the PLC CPU and the A9GT RS2T 3 Procedure a Basic operation e Touch lt to select the desired option e Touch or y to change numeric values e Touc
279. istory screen and the key functions displayed on the screen 1 About the display data MR J2S A 9600 bps Servo amp Monitor ost Menu end Seg No Alarm No Alarm Name Time hour Detail hex 0 ALBE Serial com error 270 10 woo L E Serial com error 210 10 mg Serial com error 268 10 3 ALBE Serial com error 268 10 4 ALBE Serial com error 268 10 5 ALS2 Error excessive cis 01 E ke Clear amp larmDisp 1 2 3 4 5 No tem Perscription Displays the alarm history starting from the newest alarm in order 1 Sequence No e The newer alarms have smaller history numbers 0 is the newest e Six alarms are displayed Displays the number of the alarm that occurred Displayed only when the A95 GOT A956WGOT is used Displays the energization time of the servo amplifier until alarm occurrence on the assumption that the time at shipment from the factory is 0 Detail hex Displays the code of the alarm detail information 2 About the key functions The following table indicates the functions of the keys used for the operations of the alarm history screen eem clear Clears the alarm history stored in the servo amplifier alarmDisp Changes to the alarm display screen refer to Section 26 5 1 Confirms the settings and returns to the function selection menu screen Terminates the servo amplifier monitor functions 26 8 26 8 26 OPERATIONS OF SERVO AMPLIFIER MONIT
280. it pops 3 inchemin i 6 1 to 600000000 012345678 i 012345678 012945670 x10 3 deg min i i 0 to 1000000 i PLS sec Ti 1 to 65535 L MSC Bn ne N AA Decel Time 0 1 to 65535 i i msec E i EE 166 00A6 316 013C ADTSP Basic Parameter 2 meny END mame oee ome Ene 5 e oor 58 enne 218 fore t te 600000000 speed Lime 1 t0 800000000 170 00AA 320 0140 LR 012345678 012925670 012345678 bario aia olor 4107 3 deg min i oto nod e 24 oo18 174 OOAE 324 0144 Screen Image No 1 to 600000000 PLS sec 1 to 65535 Mun A eonun o d ach due Da a a che Qe Decel Time 0 1 to 65535 msec SETZ Data MONIT ADISP Extended Parameter 2 RESET Chg MENU Parameter Valid Range Axis1 Axis Axis3 pccel Timexti 1 to 65535 012345 E 012395 d 012345 Accel Timez 1 to 65535 012345 012345 012345 Accel Timea 1 to 65535 012345 012345 012305 Decel Timegi 1 to 65535 012345 j 012345 j 012345 Decel Timext2 1 to 65535 012345 i 012345 i 012345 Decel Time3 1 tn amp 5535 012345 i 012345 012345 12 40 12 40 12 OPERATION OF EACH SPECIAL MODULE MONITOR SCREEN MELSEC GOT Screen Image IC EE e ADTSP OPR Basic Parameter MONIT Enu END Parameter Valid Range 1Ax
281. ith simple operation examples 20 2 1 Reading sequence program The sequence program is read to check its content Operation example 1 READ Select the Read mode 2 SET 0 GO X0000 1 0R 0010 2 AN X0001 3 OUT YO010 3 GO Read the Oth step Q Scroll the screen with the GO key 20 7 20 7 20 OPERATION OF EDITING SCREEN FOR EACH LIST MELSEC GOT 20 2 2 Changing overwriting command The following example shows the changing procedure of the sequence program Before change 3 OUT Y010 4 OUT TO K10 y Change the timer setting Q value from K10 to K100 X000 X001 After change f 3 OUT Y010 Change the timer setting value from K10 to K100 Operation example SHIFT gt WRITE Select the Write mode 2 SET 5 GO Read the 4th step that changes the setting value lr gt Move the cursor to setting value K10 of TO 4 K The setting value of timer TO was changed from K10 to K100 20 8 20 8 20 OPERATION OF EDITING SCREEN FOR EACH LIST MELSEC GOT 20 2 3 Adding inserting command The following example shows the procedure of adding the command to the sequence program Before addition f 7 P K80K5 D20 14 END 9 After addition 7 P_K80 K5 D20 command Operation example 4 QUT TO Select the Insert mod
282. itor function operating system into the GOT built in memory using the GT Designer enables ladder monitoring of the PLC CPU program as shown in a ladder diagram The features of the ladder monitor function are shown below 1 Monitoring based on ladder symbols see Section 6 3 for details Sample display Ladder monitor screen PO M999 K 187 H mov 1 Di H K K 1234 D100 J Mov 2 D2 H STEP 12345 18374 RST v H MOV 90 D162 H K MOV 110 D167 H D1 D2 1 2 V D162 47 90 DATA OVERFLOWS ONE SCREEN D 67 D172 110 K L Ll MOV 100 D172 H L Ll BET M9028H K K DUTY 350 400 M9020 100 Exit PLCRD Mon Menu Print Cancel Screen Print 1 OVERVIEW MELSEC GOT The Print Screen and Cancel Print buttons are not displayed on the A956WGOT or the GOT whose display screen type is the EL 1 Ladder monitor screen A maximum of 8 lines max 11 contact points per line with 12 contact points or more the line returns of a sequence program are displayed on one screen Also for the current values and other settings of word devices a maximum of 8 devices are displayed With 9 devices or more use the arrow keys to switch displays Depending on the GOT model a display is provided on the MELSEC Q ladder monitor screen as indicated below A985GOT V Max 15 lines displayed 1 line Max 11 c
283. itoring seen 22 1 22 2 Operation procedures from user created monitor screen display to start of motion monitor 22 2 22 2 1 Password entry operation procedure sse nene 22 4 23 1 Screen layout common operations and screen changes for monitoring sese sese eee eee eee ee 23 1 23 1 1 System configuration screen layout and key functions ss sse 23 1 23 2 Changirig the Scree isminin T 23 2 23 93 MOON MONO deco nt A drea ase a c a atate 23 3 23 3 1 Display data and key functions of present value monitor screen sse 23 4 23 3 2 Display data and key functions of SFC error history screen sse 23 5 23 3 3 Display data and key functions of error list screen sees 23 6 23 3 4 Display data and key functions of error list designated axis screen sss 23 7 23 3 5 Display data and key functions of positioning monitor screen sseenees 23 9 23 3 6 Display data and key functions of servo monitor screen seen 23 11 23 3 7 Display data and key functions of present value history monitor screen sess 23 12 23 4 Paraimeter setlting O 23 14 A 8 A 8 23 4 1 Display data and key functions of parameter setting screen eene 23 14 23 4 2 Parameter setting OperallOn
284. itten parameter values are retained 2 When you have changed any parameter setting on the servo amplifier side also change that setting to the same value on the setup screen of the GOT Section 26 2 If the setup screen settings and servo amplifier side settings do not match normal communication cannot be made with the servo amplifier e Serial communication baudrate selection Protocol station number selection e Station number setting 26 21 26 21 26 OPERATIONS OF SERVO AMPLIFIER MONITOR SCREENS MELSEC GOT 26 8 Test Operations The following test operations are performed for the connected servo amplifier e JOG operation The servo motor runs while you are touching the Forward Refer to Section 26 8 3 or Reverse key Positioning operation When you touch the Forward or Reverse key this Refer to Section 26 8 4 operation starts and runs the servo motor by the preset distance e Motorless operation Simulates the operation of the servo motor in the Refer to Section 26 8 5 servo amplifier if the servo motor is not connected e DO forced output Forcibly turns ON OFF the output signals Refer to Section 26 8 6 independently of the output conditions of the servo amplifier output signals 26 22 26 22 26 OPERATIONS OF SERVO AMPLIFIER MONITOR SCREENS MELSEC GOT 1 The following shows the screen transition after selection of on the function selection menu screen Some screens may not be dis
285. iver into the GOT e Set the output destination PC card printer of the hardcopy in the hardcopy setting of GT Designer Refer to Help of GT Designer for details of the hardcopy setting 26 31 26 31 27 27 ERROR INDICATIONS AND CORRECTIVE ACTIONS FOR SERVO AMPLIFIER MONITOR MELSEC GOT Chapter27 ERROR INDICATIONS AND CORRECTIVE ACTIONS FOR SERVO 27 1 AMPLIFIER MONITOR This chapter provides the error indications given during servo amplifier monitor operation and their corrective actions Error Definition Corrective Action Monitor data not found Monitor data have not been Download the monitor data of the installed or monitor data have servo amplifier monitor been deleted No AMP Communications Communication cannot be made Check the connection state with the servo amplifier set as connector disconnection cable the monitor destination wire break of the servo amplifier and GOT Check the servo amplifier for error occurrence Set the same values to the servd amplifier monitor function setup screen and servo amplifier side parameters This test mode cannot be The other test operation function End the other test operation selected has started Operation without Motor rotation was set in the servo parameter values inside the setting ranges setting connected servo amplifier amplifier with the drive unit unit is loaded The password entered as the Enter the correct password
286. l info beijer no MPL Technology Sp z o o POLAND ul Sliczna 36 PL 31 444 Krak w Phone 48 0 12 632 28 85 Fax 48 0 12 632 47 82 e mail krakowmpl pl Sirius Trading amp Services srl ROMANIA Bd Lacul Tei nr 1 B RO 72301 Bucuresti 2 Phone 40 0 21 201 7147 Fax 40 0 21 201 7148 e mail sirius t sGfx ro ACP Autocomp a s SLOVAKIA Chalupkova 7 SK 81109 Bratislava Phone 421 02 5292 22 54 55 Fax 421 02 5292 22 48 e mail info acp autocomp sk PROVENDOR OY FINLAND INEA d o o SLOVENIA Telj nkatu 8 A 3 Stegnell FIN 28130 Pori SI 1000 Ljubljana Phone 358 0 2 522 3300 Phone 386 0 1 513 8100 Fax 358 0 2 522 3322 Fax 386 0 1 513 8170 e mail e mail inea inea si UTECO A B E E GREECE Beijer Electronics AB SWEDEN 5 Mavrogenous Str Box 426 GR 18542 Piraeus S 20124 Malm Phone 302 0 10 42 10 050 Phone 46 0 40 35 86 00 Fax 302 0 10 42 12 033 Fax 46 0 40 35 86 02 e mail utecoQuteco gr e mail info beijer se Meltrade Automatika Kft HUNGARY ECONOTEC AG SWITZERLAND 55 Harmat St Postfach 282 H 1105 Budapest Phone 36 0 1 2605 602 Fax 36 0 1 2605 602 e mail office meltrade hu CH 8309 N rensdorf Phone 41 0 1 838 48 11 Fax 41 0 1 838 48 12 e mail info econotec ch GTS Dar laceze Cad No 43 KAT 2 TR 80270 Okmeydani Istanbul Phone 90 0 212 320 1640 Fax 90 0 212 320
287. le Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable i Error Reset AAS6B0AY Graph Monitor screen output s CH 1 CH 2 CH CH CH CH CH CH 0 1 07654321 01101101 C H Analog Output Enabled Disabled B aT Error B ero 12 22 MELSEC GOT j dec hex mp o 00 10 to 17 000A to 0011 1010 17 000A to 0011 0001 to 0008 10 to 17 000A to 0011 12 22 1 1 2 3 4 12 OPERATION OF EACH SPECIAL MODULE MONITOR SCREEN 12 16 A616AD Module Monitor Screen Image MELSEC GOT 000F AGL6AD Operation Monitor Screen 0004 0030 to 003F SET RESET MONIT MENU FEOCBASS 76543210 Error Code 01 Enable 0110110110110110 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Data Format FEDCBAS8T76S43210 0005 0003 Error CNT No FEDCBAIG 76543210 0110110110110110 Setting 0110110110110110 Sampling time 01234 ms 0000 to to For Data Format 0 Refer Format 1 Refer Input Status LS left hand side values right hand side values 01234 01234 01234 01234 01234 01234 01234 01234 01234 01234 01234 01234 01234 01234 01234 01234 OOOO amono 01234 01234 01234 01234 01234 01234 01234 01234 01234 01234 01234 01234 01234 01234 01234 01234 OOOO Direct Access INPUT CH 0 MX CH 0
288. le as option A950GOT A951GOT A953GOT A956GOT User s Manual Explains the specifications general system configuration component devices part names option k i c SH 080018 unit loading methods installation and wiring methods maintenance and inspection methods and 13JL92 error codes of AB50GOT A951GOT A953GOT A956GOT unit Available as option GOT A900 Series User s Manual GT Works Version 5 GT Designer Version 5 compatible Connection System Manual Gives the specifications system configuration setting method and connection diagram of each connection form available for the GOT A900 series SH 080119 13JR20 Available as option GT SoftGOT Version 5 Operating Manual Describes the system configuration screen makeup and usage of GT SoftGOT Available as option SH 080156 13JU12 Abbreviations and generic terms in this manual Abbreviations generic terms and special terms used in this manual are described as follows Abbreviations generic terms A985GOT V Generic term of AS85GOT TBA V and A985GOT TBD V Generic term of A98B5GOT TBA V and A985GOT TBD V of A985GOT TBA V and A985GOT TBD V A985GOT A975GOT TBA EU Generic term of A970GOT TBA B A970GOT TBD B A970GOT TBA A970GOT TBD A970GOT A970GOT SBA A970GOT SBD A970GOT LBA A970GOT LBD A970GOT TBA EU and A970GOT SBA EU A97 GOT Generic term of A975GOT and A970GOT A960GOT Generic term of ABG0GOT EBA A960GOT EBD and A960GOT EBA EU A956G
289. lect input area gt 4 Lett right CPU No 0 to 4 CPU number Character Enter network No station No CPU Displayed for QCPU monitor only No 3 device name device No 8 Specify object device test value 1 2 5 4 Specify test value With SET RST set reset of bit device specify 0 RST or 1 SET e BNET When changing current value of word device Touch input confirmation When changing T or C set value or RES When changing current value of buffer memory Move return to screen where SET was specified Match current display form decimal hexadecimal and specify change value 4 9 OPERATION OF THE VARIOUS SYSTEM MONITOR SCREENS MELSEC GOT 1 The data being entered can be cleared by using the following keys AC Clear all data being entered in the object area DEL Clear one character from the cursor position 2 The format for the data being entered is displayed on the right side of the screen DEC Enter in decimal HEX Enter in hexadecimal 8 The monitor target must be preset using GT Designer For ACPU monitor specify the network number station number set on GT Designer Refer to the help of GT Designer for details of the monitor target setting for Ethernet connection 4 Even when the setting value current value is changed after the timer T has timed out and the counter C has finished counting the time up status count up status do not change The current status is m
290. lity screen 23 2 Fara ETA ema Sone eo ho Auto anual Node ws 7 0 Ta Motor Password entry window Refer to Section 22 2 1 Touch 1 Sys Conf ENG Auto Gain Adjustment Manual Mode2 SV Response Setting 5 Position Ctrl Gaini 35 rad sec Load Inertia Ratio 7 0 To Motor a Speed Ctr1 Gaini 177 rad sec Position Ctrl Gain2 35 rad sec v Speed Ctrl Gain2 817 rad sec Speed Integral Comp 20 rad sec Notch Filter Not Used Feed Forward Gain 1 Parameter setting screen Refer to Section 23 4 1 Touch END Go to user created monitor screen or utility screen 23 2 23 OPERATIONS OF VARIOUS MOTION MONITOR SCREENS 23 3 Motion monitor 23 3 MELSEC GOT The motion monitor function allows you to monitor various servo monitor data on multiple monitor screens To display any of the monitor screens make selection on the monitor menu screen Monitor menu screen Mation Monitor Present Value Mon Positioning Monitor SFC Error History Servo Monitor Sel ERE E Error List Axis 1 Present Value Mon 2 SFC Error History 3 Error List 4 Error List Axis 5 Positioning Monitor 6 Servo Monitor 7 Present Value Hist Monitors and displays the feed current values and actual current values of all running axes
291. ments were read since they exceeded 2M bytes Only 2M bytes of the comment file was read because its size is greater than 2M bytes Outside CPU reset device range special module illegal access The accessed special module is faulty or does not exist Check the system configuration 7 ERROR DISPLAY AND HANDLING WITH LADDER MONITORING MEMO MELSEC GOT 8 OPERATION PROCEDURES FOR THE SYSTEM MONITOR FUNCTION SEC GOT CHAPTER8 OPERATION PROCEDURES FOR THE SYSTEM MONITOR FUNCTION The operation procedures for using the system monitor function are explained in this section 8 1 Operation procedures before starting system monitoring This section contains a summary of the procedure for transmitting the system program OS for the system monitor function from the Personal computer to the GOT until it is installed in the built in memory For details please refer to the Help in the GT Designer Details of the screen display and key operation are shown in the Help Connect GOT to Personal computer Start up GOT Itis not necessary to set up and operate the GOT after startup Start up Personal computer and drawing software With the drawing software transmit the Transmit the data using the installation dialog box system program OS for the system monitor function from the Personal computer to the GOT and install it in the built in memory When installation is finished
292. mment file for the QCPU Q mode 4 Keyword has been registered to each memory for the QnACPU Comments are displayed if the setting is changed using GX Developer or like d When the Q00J Q00 Q01 CPU is being monitored comments are not displayed if the comment file MAIN does not exist in the program memory 9 OPERATION OF THE VARIOUS SYSTEM MONITOR SCREENS MELSEC GOT Below is an explanation of the operation for changing the display using the Entry Monitor window as an example The operation procedure is the same for changing the display when selecting windows other than Entry Monitor Operation procedure When you touch MENU you return to the basic screen Display Entry Monitor screen DEVICE erre SETS When you touch SET the monitor station and device NETWK No 0 STATION FF vs ae can be specified See Sec 9 1 3 E l Ere n When you touch FORM you can change this display D D X 001 e M 25 O The selected FORM display is also found on the screen displayed after selecting the monitor function with the basic screen and on each menu screen in addition to each monitor FORM Touch Screen DEVICE MONITOR TEST MENU FORM SET NETWK No 0 STATION FF rue Display monitor station network no and station When you touch CANCEL the display change is NUMERIC DEC HEX interrupted and the display returns to the monitor screen COMMENT
293. module to be monitored and the buffer memory as follows Initial Y NETWK No 0 STATION FF Specify the initial address VONO 1 e BM 1110 BM 1118 of the buffer memory in BM 1111 BM 1119 decimal BM 1112 BM 1120 BM 1113 BM 1121 m a BM 1114 BM 1122 When the initial I O signal of BM 1115 BM 1123 A i A BM AITE Bid Jod module is displayed with three BM 1117 BM 1125 digits specify the first two digits Change the screen display Switching between decimal and hexadecimal display is enabled Do this as needed For the display change method see Sec 9 1 2 9 OPERATION OF THE VARIOUS SYSTEM MONITOR SCREENS MELSEC GOT 9 5 2 BM Monitor screen display and key functions In this section the BM Monitor screen display and the functions of keys displayed at the top of the screen are explained 1 Display BM MONITOR TEST MENU FORM SET 1 2 NETWK No 0 STATION FF lO NOL 1 BM 1110 32767 BM 1118 0 BM 1111 64 BM 1119 0 Displays current value of a BM 1112 149 BM 1120 150 a BM 1113 4111 BM 1121 131 maximum of 16 devices BM 1114 126 BM 1122 32768 BM 1115 160 BM 1123 555 BM 1116 255 BM 1124 2368 BM 1117 1200 BM 1125 11000 Displays the keys that are used with the operation of the BM Monitor screen shown in 2 Touch input Displays the monitor station network No station No CPU No 1 and the first 2 digits of the I O signal N
294. monitor device 1 Specify the station and device to be monitored For the method of specifying see Sec 9 1 3 When reading is complete display the Batch Monitor screen BATCH MONITOR TEST MENU FORM SET NETWK No 0 STATION FF D 10 32767 D 18 500 D 11 0 D 19 3234 D 12 0 D 20 0 D 13 1 D 21 0 D 14 0 D 22 0 D 15 3 D 23 32768 D 16 0 D 24 0 D 17 0 D 25 0 Y H Change the screen display eee Do if needed For the display change method see Sec 9 1 2 9 OPERATION OF THE VARIOUS SYSTEM MONITOR SCREENS MELSEC GOT 9 3 2 Batch monitor screen display and key functions In this section the Batch Monitor screen display and the functions of keys displayed at the top of the screen are explained 1 Display BATCGH MONITOR TEST NENU EOS Sg 1 2 NETWK No 0 STATION FF D 10 32767 IM When comment is not displayed max 16 devices D 11 O Inventory quantity When comment is displayed max 8 devices D 12 O Shipment quantity Display when system monitoring D 13 1 Bit device ON O OFF 3 D 14 O Warehouse A temperature Word device Current value D 15 3 Warehouse B temperature D 16 o D 17 O Production plan 1 IM Displays the keys that are used with the operation of the Batch Monitor screen shown in 2 Touch input Displays the monitor station network No station No and CPU No 1 Displays the status a
295. monitoring the AD71 select the AD72 in the object display position 2 The monitor screen that is displayed by 1 above is for the AD72 The number obtained by subtracting 10H from the I O signal number on the display is the number to be used when installing the AD71 in the O slot If you do not want the AD1 to be treated as the AD72 execute Shift the installation position of AD71 forward or In the I O assignments assign the empty slot in front of AD71 to the 16 X Y points 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC GOT b When monitoring the A68AD A68ADN or A68RD used with a small building block type PLC CPU A special function module installed in a large building block type extension base unit connected to a small building block type PLC CPU e g A1SCPU is recognized and monitor processed by the GOT as a small building block type special function module Hence there are the following instructions for use of the A68AD A68ADN and A68RD Special function module Instruction The A68AD cannot be displayed correctly because of the buffer memory map differences between the A68AD and A1S68AD Among CH1 to CH8 of the A68ADN CH5 to CH8 cannot be displayed since the A1S64AD has only CH1 to CH4 displayed since the A1S62RD has only CH1 and CH2 The above special function modules can be monitored properly if they are installed in a base unit connected to a large building block type PLC CPU e g AnUCPU c When monitoring the A1SD75M AD75M
296. mplifiers stations O to 31 on the same bus as the connected servo amplifier can be monitored 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC GOT 3 7 3 Precautions for use of the servo amplifier monitor functions 1 Before starting test operations always read the precautions in Section 26 7 1 2 The maximum communication speed between the GOT and servo amplifier is 38400bps Set the servo side communication speed to 38400bps or less 3 If the PLC CPU connected to the GOT does not have clock data the time displayed by the servo amplifier monitor functions is not precise 4 The settings of the GOT side servo amplifier monitor functions setup screen refer to Section 26 2 1 should be the same as the servo amplifier side settings If they are different normal communication may not be made 5 When the servo amplifier monitor functions are used communication from GT Designer OS installation monitor screen data downloading cannot be made Before starting communication from GT Designer terminate the servo amplifier monitor functions 6 When the servo amplifier is connected the bar code function cannot be used 7 The transparent function cannot be used on the GOT where the servo amplifier monitor function operating system OS has been installed 3 7 4 System configuration for servo amplifier connection The system configurations for servo amplifier connection are shown below Connection Condition System Configuration Servo amplifier
297. n Mode A S Function Action mode display Write program Writes adds or modifies a program Change device Changes a device used at the selected step in the program sici n mY Displays a list of instructions that start with the specified character and Write W y allows the user to choose from them Write help instruction a Reads a program after allowing the user to specify a step number Declares the specified part of the program NOP Comment display Displays a comment for the specified device Reads a program after allowing the user to specify a step number Read program Reads a cmi SH after allowing the user to specify an instruction used Reads a program after allowing the user to Reads a program after allowing the user to specify a device used a device used Automatically scrolls the display of a program that has been read up to Automatic scrolling a sp cified step MET Corresponds to program read and automatic scroll functions described Device above Automatic Automatic scrolling Comment display Displays a comment for the specified device Insert program Inserts a new program into the displayed program Display sel d p ay Displays a list of instructions that start with the specified character and Instruction ect allows the user to choose from them help instruction Insert 1 Read step Reads a program after allowing the user to specify a step number nse program program Comment a Dis
298. n 5 GT Designer Version 5 GOT900 Series Operating Manual Introductory Manual For those who use the GOT for the first time describes the way to create a monitor screen on GT SH 0801 16 Designer transfer monitor data to the GOT and display it on the screen 13JU07 Available as option GT Works Version 5 GT Designer Version 5 Reference Manual Deals with the system configuration of GT Works Version 5 GT Designer Version 5 the screen makeup of the GT Designer the general description of various monitoring functions the procedure for displaying the monitor screen on the GOT and how to use the help function Available as option SH 080117 13JF95 GOT A900 Series Operating Manual GT Works Version 5 GT Designer Version 5 compatible Gateway Functions Manual SH 080254 Explains the specifications system configuration setting methods and others of the gateway functions 13JU29 that can be performed on the GOT A900 series Available as option GT Simulator Version5 Operating Manual l SH 080120 Explains the system configuration screen makeup and using methods of GT Simulator a 13JU09 Available as option A985GOT A975GOT A970GOT A960GOT User s Manual Explains the specifications general system configuration component devices part names option SH 4005 unit loading methods installation and wiring methods maintenance and inspection methods and 13JL70 error codes of A985GOT A975GOT A970GOT A960GOT unit Availab
299. n on the utility menu screen Adjusting the brightness contrast of the monitor screen 1 Display screen The display screen differs with the GOT used Screen Example A985 97 960GOT A95 A956WGOT B R 29 e 29 m PLC NET LIST LADDER MOTION SP MON MON EDITOR MON MON UNIT R 2 sl e ele AMP MEMORY DATAS SET TIME CLEAN MON INFO SCOPY UP SET S eE eed 9d p NET LIST LADDER MOTION SP e sl in o 8 Big esl ey MEMORY DATAS SET TIME CLEAN INFO OSCOPY UP SET MN LIST EDITOR LADDER WON MITTEN RH lajm oB EHR WO AA DPY ETP TR ZT EN S amp ed c p MET LIST LADDER MOTION SP MON EDITOR MON MON UNIT S 2 mi iex ol 8 MEMORY DATAS SET TIME CLEAN INFO OSCOPY UP SET SELF CHECK 2 Function e Menu screen used to select any of the utility functions Used to adjust the brightness contrast of the monitor screen 4 OPERATING THE UTILITY FUNCTION MELSEC GOT 8 Operation a Basic operation Directly touch the portion where the function you will select is being displayed b Return to the monitor screen Touch E to return to the monitor screen c Brightness contrast adjustment e Touch XE e and at top of the screen to make contrast adjustment e You can adjust the contrast in about 20 steps e Touch Ld at top right of the screen to show the
300. n screen i Example MASM KO When resuming the defect search specify either of the found contacts M669 and X0025 After touching Esc to change it into Menu execute the defect search 6 OPERATING THE VARIOUS LADDER MONITOR SCREENS MELSEC GOT 3 Precautions for making defect search a If a B contact is found defective as a result of the defect search a search for the cause of the ON OFF state will be automatically switched b After the end of the defect search the GOT stops monitor and displays the search result Hence the monitor screen of the GOT shows the result retained during the defect search c While the search result is displayed after the end of the defect search the searched ladder can be displayed backwards by pressing 4 single ladder block scroll or JUMP4 JUMP 10 ladder block jump available for only the MELSEC Q ladder monitor function Up to 100 ladders can be displayed on screen The following messages will appear at the start or the end of the search results e When viewing the start of search results This is the start of search results When viewing the end of the search results This is the end of search results d The ON OFF of the contact and coil is displayed as described below 1 During automatic search execution MELSEC A ladder monitor Displays ON OFF in the entire ladder displayed on the screen MELSEC Q ladder monitor Displays ON OF
301. n the A95 GOT A956WGOT is used 6 Set Data 4 2 Key functions The following indicates the functions of the keys used for operation of the error list screen Used to return to the monitor menu screen Used to end the error list and return to the screen that was being displayed when the motion monitor function was started 23 OPERATIONS OF VARIOUS MOTION MONITOR SCREENS MELSEC GOT 23 3 4 Display data and key functions of error list designated axis screen This section explains th key functions displayed 1 Displayed data In real mode 7 e display data of the error list designated axis screen and the on screen In virtual mode 7 REF M jon X Error Definition PC Link COM ERR Motion CPU WDT ERR MAN PLS Axis ERR Each 1 Pulse IM Error MAN PLS Ax ERR Each MAN PLS SM ERR Op Axis No Bu Test Mode Reg Test REQ ERR Error Definition 6 Error List Designated Axis Er code Out Module nin 0 2 gt 16x Ha ERH 1000 phi qeratin srw err dtt tured SV ERR 0 Program No 0 0 3 virt axis Min ERf 7 gt tax Maj ERA 0 Sunc Enco Min ERR O 4 gt Ax Maj ERH 0 R V CHG ERR Info H 0000 PC Link COM ERR 0 Motion CPU WDT ERR 0 Description The axis No currently monitored is displayed The output module axis No currently monitored is displayed The virtual axis No currently monitored is displ
302. n the window only for A95 GOT 17 7 17 7 17 USING THE NETWORK MONITOR SCREENS MELSEC GOT 17 2 4 Display contents and keys functions acting as a MELSECNET 10 remote master station This section describes the detailed own station monitor screen and the function of on Screen keys all of which are displayed and used when the own station acts as the remote master station on the MELSECNET 10 1 Display contents When the A985 97 960GOT is used When the A95 956WGOT is used The display details are the same RET JEND as the ones on the A985 97 960GOT 2 Touch S button to change the EUR O o E display Com Info Ctrl Sta Com n Mode Total of L Sta 8 ransmission Mode 3 Normal Trans Transmission Stat Normal Trans Largest DL Sta 64 Com Status D Link in prog Cause of Ssp Normal Cause of Stop Normal Section Contents of Display eThis Stations Indicates the station number of the own station e Network Indicates the network number e Group Not displayed e Spc Ctrl Sta Not displayed e Curr Ctrl Sta Not displayed Com Info Not displayed e SubCirl Sta Com Not displayed TsSt Info Ctrl St Info 17 8 17 8 17 USING THE NETWORK MONITOR SCREENS MELSEC GOT Section Contents of Display s Total of L Sta Indicates the maximum number of the stations to be linked The maximum number is defined by common parameters e La
303. nctions per target CPU and connection form 1 1 Features The monitor functions described in this manual are intended to improve the efficiency of trouble shooting and maintenance operations for the PLC system The features of each monitor function are explained in the following sections 1 1 1 Features of the utility function The utility function enables you to use GOT setup and self tests To use the utility function you need to install an operating system for the utility function on the GOT built in internal memory by using GT Designer The features of the utility function are shown below POINT Some of the utility functions cannot be used with GT SoftGOT Refer to the GT SoftGOT Version 5 Operating Manual for the utility functions available for GT SoftGOT 1 The brightness of a monitor screen can be adjusted see Section 4 3 for details ay pu el rs v m NET LIST LADDER MOTION SP MON EDITOR MON MON UNIT m m o 8 MEMORY DATAS SET TIME CLEAN INFO OSCOPY UP SET El PASS SELF WORD CHECK eee MELSEC GOT 2 The screen and OS data can be copied between the internal memory and memory card see Section 4 4 for details MONITOR INNER MEMORY MEMORY CARD MONITOR INNER MEMORY MEMORY CARD OS INNER MEMORY MEMORY CARD T J SEL NI The data monitored can be copied to and from the GOT built in internal memory or a memory card installed on th
304. nd current value of the monitor device The screen above shows when the monitor module is 16 bits 1 Displayed for QCPU monitor only 2 Key functions The chart below shows the functions of the keys that are used with the Batch Monitor screen operation Function Move to basic screen function change menu screen for changing to another monitor function or ending the system monitor See Sec 9 1 1 Move to display change menu screen for changing the numerical display on the Batch Monitor screen decimal hexadecimal or changing the comment display on off See Sec 9 1 2 Move to device setting menu screen to change the monitor device or execute a test e Change of monitor device See Sec 9 1 3 e Test See Sec 9 6 Scroll the display up or down one line and display the monitor device that is not displayed just before or after the current display Y Scrolls down one line A Scrolls up one line 9 OPERATION OF THE VARIOUS SYSTEM MONITOR SCREENS MELSEC GOT 9 4 TC Monitor monitor of timer and counter The function that monitors only the time T and counter c when monitoring is called the TC monitor The TC monitor operation when executing the system monitor is explained below 9 4 1 Basic operation The TC operation procedure is shown below See Sec 9 1 1 Operation procedure Select TC Monitor with the basic screen E When a screen ot
305. nenenenenenenenenenenenenenenenanenenenenenenenenenenenenenenenenene 3 10 3 4 3 Precautions when using the network monitor function esee 3 10 3 5 List editor function DGT a Taa Ena a Ha A E aa aaa E 3 11 A 3 A 3 3 5 1 PLC CPU that allows for Tae TTT 3 11 3 5 2 Access range that allows for list edit essent tnter 3 11 3 5 3 Precautions for List editor function aad aata aa ad dand aata a did aTait daai agus 3 11 3 5 4 List of key arrangement and key functions sesenta 3 12 3 5 5 Display format on the display nesa nennen 3 15 3 5 6 List of Listeditor f nction s nua snos as A tenete de ned 3 18 3 6 Specifications of the motion monitor function 3 20 3 6 1 PLC CPUs that can be monitored sss essen 3 20 3 6 2 Access ranges that can be monitored seeeeeseeenenenennn nn 3 20 3 6 3 Precautions for use of the motion monitor function seen 3 20 3 6 4 Memory space necessary to use the motion monitor function sss sees sees eee eee eee eee eee 3 20 3 7 Specifications of the Servo Amplifier Monitor Functions sese sese eee eee eee eee 3 21 3 7 1 List of servo amplifier models that can be monitored and functions sss 3 21 3 7 2 Access range that can be monitored essere ereenn enen 3 21 3 7 3 Precautions for use of the servo amplifier monitor functions
306. ner KUMITATE Coment 1999 06 10 17 45 A Line Refer to the help of GT Designer for details of the monitor target setting for Ethernet connection HANSOI Comment 1999 06 10 07 21 B Line MONITOR Comment 1999 06 10 17 50 Monitor System 3 The PLC read screen appears Pagel PP First touch the Set Up key to display the setting window KENSA Comment 1999 06 10 13 02 C Lini To the following page 6 OPERATING THE VARIOUS LADDER MONITOR SCREENS MELSEC GOT From the previous page ETE 4 The setting window appears l Make the setting for initial ladder monitor start Name Type Size Date Time Title q q qq Touching the MEMORY key changes the setting choice as EE KAKOU Program 2148 i 37 A Line KUMITATE Program 2184 B Line 93 06 10 T HANSDU Program 3108 1999 06 10 17 40 C Line indicated below KENSA Program 2184 1999 06 10 17 42 D Line MONITOR Program 2164 19290610 KUMITATE Comment 2184 HANSOL Comment 2184 19 DISPLAY USE OF EXISTING DATA MONITOR Comment 1083 19 KENSA Comment 1363 19 SELECT USE OR CLEAR CLEAR EXISTING DATA USE OF EXISTING DATA After the setting is over touch the amp button DISPLAY USE OF EXISTING DATA SELECT USE OR CLEAR 5 Then touch the Drive key to select the drive applicable loe c memory which stores the applicable ladder data to be monitored
307. ner and the cable to be connected between the PLC and the GOT see GT Works Version5 GT Designer Version5 Reference Manual 8 Only MELSEC Q ladder monitor may be used 2 BEFORE BEGINNING OPERATION MELSEC GOT 2 3 Precautions before use Precautions before using each function are described as follows 1 There are unavailable functions depending on the GOT A985GOT Function category Function A97 GOT A956WGOT A95 GOT GT SoftGOT 2 A960GOT Basic function IUH function o o o o Extension function System monitor funcion oO o o O O Ladder monitor function Memory board Memory board required 1 required 1 3 O Memory board Special unit monitor function required 1 O Network monitor function Memory board Memory board Use A95 GOT required 1 required 1 BD M3 O List editor function Memory board Memory board Use A95 GOT required 1 required 1 BD M3 O O O Motion monitor function Memory board Memory board Use A95 GOT required 1 required 1 BD M3 O O O Memory board Memory board Use A95 GOT required 1 required 1 BD M3 Servo amplifier monitor function 1 Refer to Section 2 2 for details of the memory board designed to perform the option functions 2 Using GT SoftGOT and GX Developer on the same personal computer enables the equivalent functions to be performed 3 Only MELSEC Q ladder monitor may be used 4 Unusable for Present Valu
308. ner for details of password setting 2 Procedure a To enter a password follow these steps e Touch 0 to 9 and A to F to enter a password e Touch to confirm the password entered e To correct the password entered touch DEL to delete wrong characters and then enter correct characters again b To quit entering a password e Touch to return to the previous monitor screen 22 4 22 4 23 OPERATIONS OF VARIOUS MOTION MONITOR SCREENS MELSEC GOT CHAPTER23 OPERATIONS OF VARIOUS MOTION MONITOR SCREENS This chapter explains screen operations to be performed when using the motion monitor function The display screen of the motion monitor function varies slightly with the GOT used This chapter mainly uses the screen of the A975GOT for explanation 23 1 Screen layout common operations and screen changes for monitoring This section describes the screen layout and common operations for execution of motion monitoring 23 1 1 System configuration screen layout and key functions This section explains the layout of the system configuration screen that is displayed 23 after starting the motion monitor function and the key functions that appears on screen 1 Displayed data Module types and like are displayed on completion of reading module information from PLC CPU Automatically displayed by OS Main 1 pta Ext 2 Parameter Set
309. ns X o fo po station __ Causes of data link stoppage Xx x o OT monitor Constant link Constant link scan x x O scan O O BWYrecdve BW irom the masterstation x o x x x BW receive EWiromthe masterstaioninthetigherloop X o x x x Prop status 1 9 T o To o o Riopsass d o o o o o Loopback F oopback staton o x o o J o F loopback station Loop switching frequency x Own station Seni O 9 o Siet SaO LGG CPU action status of each station x po o x O o o Loop status of each station d o o0 x o Qr on 1 Accessible only when connected to a MELSECNET lI local station 2 Accessible only when connected to a MELSECNET 10 optical fiber cable O Accessible X Not accessible 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC GOT 3 4 2 Access ranges to be monitored For access range for monitoring see Chapter 2 of the GOT A900 Series User s manual GT Works Version5 GT Designer Version5 compatible Connection system manual 3 4 3 Precautions when using the network monitor function The following describes precautions that should be followed when using the network monitor function 1 When the GOT is connected to an ANNCPU or AnACPU a screen display shows a screen of the MELSECNET II network even when you are connected to the MELSECNET 10 network the monitor screen shows the display contents of the MELSE
310. ntact 1 points or more move to the next line When a comment display is specified a comment is also displayed expanded comments are given priority For the method of displaying comments see Sec 6 3 3 A maximum of eight devices is displayed for the word device current value timer and counter current value upper row and set value lower row When the set value is an 2 indirect specification the value of the indirectly specified device is displayed To switch between decimal and hexadecimal for the displayed value see Sec 6 3 3 3 Display the keys used with the operation on the ladder monitor screen shown in b Touch input 4 The display step number left and the remaining step number right are displayed b Key functions This table shows the key functions used with the operations on the ladder monitor screen Key Function Return to screen where ladder monitor function starts Move to PLC read screen to read sequence program being monitored from PLC CPU PLC read Move to ladder monitor menu screen to specify sequence program to be displayed on ladder monitor screen Ladder read Start monitoring of sequence program that is displayed on ladder monitor screen Activates the List editor function For details of the List editor function see Chapter 19 Switch display device when there are nine or more devices displaying current values and set values Dis
311. o of the object module Displays the current values of the buffer memory The screen above shows when the monitor module is 16 bits 1 Displayed for QCPU monitor only 2 Key functions The chart below shows the function of the keys that are used with the operation of the BM Monitor screen Function This moves to basic screen function change menu screen for changing to another monitor function or ending the system monitor See Sec 9 1 1 This moves to display change menu screen for changing the number display on the BM monitor screen decimal hexadecimal See Sec 9 1 2 This moves to device setting menu screen to change the monitor device or execute a test e Change of monitor device See Sec 9 1 3 e Test See Sec 9 6 9 OPERATION OF THE VARIOUS SYSTEM MONITOR SCREENS MELSEC GOT 9 6 Test Read the manual carefully and fully understand the operation before the test D CAUTION operation ON OFF of bit devices modifying current value of a word device modifying timer counter setting modifying the current value or modifying the current value of a buffer memory of system monitor In addition never modify data in a test operation to a device which performs a crucial operation to the system It may cause an accident by a false output or malfunction When monitoring with the system monitor function you can specify an optional station or device to be monitored and test it The
312. o 000E 11 to 14 000B to 000E 0001 to 0004 12 52 12 52 i S MET o gt E JY EN Id mom Iri Input 12 OPERATION OF EACH SPECIAL MODULE MONITOR SCREEN MELSEC GOT 12 30 QD62 QD62D Module Monitor Buffer memory address No dec hex 1 00 to 01 0000 to 0001 32 to 33 0020 to 0021 Screen Image E QD62 Operation Monitor CHEHHET INCA Eto ce 0123456 7890 01234567890 01234561890 01234567890 Idling Count disable Idling Count disable 01234567890 0123456 7890 02 to 03 0002 to 0003 34 to 35 0022 to 0023 3 04 to 05 0004 to 0005 MN 01234567890 01234567890 36 to 37 0024 to 0025 338 012345 10ms 012345x10ms 06 to 07 0006 to 0007 01234567890 38 to 39 0026 to 0027 EEN 01234567890 10 42 000A 002A poeni 6 12 to 13 000C to 000D count Now 01234567890 44 to 45 002C to 002D 0 Ring count min 14 to 15 000E to 000F n REE 0125456 7050 01254567699 7 o 46 to 47 002E to 002F 16to 17 0010 to 0011
313. oSec 9 3 a Execute operation for selected monitor function v To Sec 9 4 monitor ends and the display moves to the original screen where the system monitor function started BM MON Touch display position of monitor function to be selected To Sec 9 5 See Sec 9 1 for common operations Y Display monitor screen of selected function SET v TEST M To Sec 9 6 The procedure for testing is as follows Set reset bit device Change current values of word device Change current value set values of T or C 1 Touch the key where the touch switch expanded function was set with the drawing software and start the system monitor function When the Utility screen is displayed touch system monitor function PLC MON to start the 9 OPERATION OF THE VARIOUS SYSTEM MONITOR SCREENS MELSEC GOT CHAPTER9 OPERATION OF THE VARIOUS SYSTEM MONITOR SCREENS This chapter contains an explanation of each screen operation when using the system monitor function POINT With any of the four windows when changing the station monitor device or executing the test operation it is not possible to do an operation with another window until that series of operations is finished 9 1 Screen configuration common operations and changing screens when monitoring The common operations of each monitor function such as screen configuration and target PLC CPU specific
314. object monitor function OS into the GOT PLC and downloading the special module GT Designer 2 monitor data It is necessary to install the GT Designer into the PLC Required for connecting the above PLC and the GOT when installing the object monitor function OS into the GOT and downloading the special module monitor data Connecting cables 2 1 The table below shows the types of memory boards available for using the option functions To use the ladder monitor function requires the memory board compatible with the PLC CPU to be monitored Contents erario option function applicable for MELSEC A FX ladder monitor option functions A9GT IASGT QFNB For option function applicable for MELSEC Q QnA A FX ladder monitor Expanded Option function applicable for MELSEC A FX ladder monitor internal memory extension 1MB memory board for A9GT FNB2M Option function applicable for MELSEC A FX ladder monitor internal memory extension 2MB option functions Option function applicable for MELSEC A FX ladder monitor internal memory extension 4MB A9GT FNB8M Option function applicable for MELSEC A FX ladder monitor internal memory extension 8MB Option function applicable for MELSEC Q QnA A FX ladder monitor internal memory extension 4MB A9GT QFNB8M Option function applicable for MELSEC Q QnA A FX ladder monitor internal memory extension 8MB 2 For information about the PLC on which to install and use GT Desig
315. ocedures before starting ladder monitoring This section contains a summary of the procedures for transmitting the system program OS for the ladder monitor function from the personal computer to the GOT until it is installed in the built in memory For details please refer to the Help in GT Designer Details of the screen display and key operation are shown in the Help Connect GOT to Personal computer Y Start up GOT Itis not necessary to set up and operate the GOT after startup Y Start up Personal computer to start GT Designer 5 With the GT Designer transmit the Transmit the data using the installation dialog box system program OS for the ladder monitor function from the Personal computer to the GOT and install it in the built in memory When installation is finished the ladder When installation is finished Completed is displayed monitor can be operated through the GOT on the installation dialog box Y The GT Designer operation is finished Proceed to Section 5 2 to operate the screen monitor Y End 5 OPERATION PROCEDURES FOR THE LADDER MONITOR FUNCTION MELSEC GOT 5 2 Operation procedures from display of user created monitor screen to start of ladder monitoring This section shows the operation procedures for the GOT when starting each operation of the ladder monitor function after the ladder monitor function system program OS has been installed in the GOT built in memory
316. ocessing GOT EX CUTE uu i A sum check error from the link communication has occurred Check the system again There is no station corresponding to the PLC number the correct number This error may occur when the ACPU is reset during monitoring Perform the monitor setting again Remote error Perform the remote run stop pause 24 Although remote stop pause is performed from the computer link unit remote run stop 32 l T from either unit is additionally performed Link error While the slave station is monitoring the master station the master station is reset 34 EEPROM failure Replace the EEPROM with a new The EEPROM cannot be written due to EEPROM failure one If error number 25 appears the following causes are possible Check the details and the corrective actions Perform the monitor setting again 1 When connected to the master station Device i m Description Details number Link card error OFF Normal The control depends on whether there is an error at the M9210 l hardware of the link card The link card in the CPU link unit is for master station ON Error judged at the CPU Replace the link unit OFF Online The control depends on whether the master station itself is M9224 Link status ON Offline station to station test online or offline or in the station to station mode or the self or self loopback test loopback mode Check the mode switch OFF Not executed E The control
317. ock function or do not use the clock setting 4 OPERATING THE UTILITY FUNCTION MELSEC GOT 4 4 Copying the monitor data OS data between the internal memory and memory card Screen amp OS copy 1 Display screen Sample screen MONITOR INNER MEMORY MEMORY CARD MONITOR INNER MEMORY MEMORY CARD S INNER MEMORY MEMORY CARD T L SEL NI 2 Features e Project data stored in the internal memory can be saved to the memory card e Project data stored in the memory card can be saved to the internal memory e OS data can be backed up by copying them from the internal memory to the memory card 3 Procedure a Basic operation e Touch or y to select options e Touching 2 will display a message asking you to answer the question Do you want to execute e f you answers Yes to the question touch lt again Touch or y to select another option To quit the backup copy touch to return to the Utility Menu screen b To return to the Utility Menu screen e Touch E to return to the Utility Menu screen 4 On screen error messages Corrective Action wri Release write protection of Cance wate protest The memory card is write protected p function the memory card a card is not installed on the Install a memory card on Install memory card the GOT Il Format memory card la slds da Format the memory card formatted
318. olution pulse is f displayed The ON and OFF of the symbols that represent the axis by axis Status control statuses are displayed e In the ON status the symbol is lit green e At error or servo error detection the symbol is lit red The ON and OFF of the positioning command signals are o CMD Signal displayed In the ON status the signal is lit green 1 Not displayed when the A95 GOT A956WGOT is used 23 9 23 9 23 OPERATIONS OF VARIOUS MOTION MONITOR SCREENS MELSEC GOT 2 Key functions The following indicates the functions of the keys used for operation of the positioning monitor screen Ke Function Data Item 1Ax Display example When Used to change the axis to be monitored axis 1 is monitored rer Used to return to the previous screen EA Used to return to the monitor menu screen END Used to end the positioning monitoring and return to the screen that was being displayed when the motion monitor function was started 23 10 23 10 23 OPERATIONS OF VARIOUS MOTION MONITOR SCREENS MELSEC GOT 23 3 6 Display data and key functions of servo monitor screen This section explains the display data of the servo monitor screen and the key functions displayed on screen 1 Displayed data r Mon Servo Monitor Menu eno 1 18x Servo Monitor Data 2 Motor Speed 108 r min 3 3 Motor Current 2 4 9 Servo Alarm Description Ax The axis No o
319. omatically after about one second Is a keyword stored in the ACPU If no keyword is stored If a keyword is stored Enter the keyword stored in the connected ACPU wd SE MODE SELECTION READ INS PARAM PRESS MODE KEY READ WRITE INSERT INSERT MODE i i i y i j Selection of a different mode 19 2 Activate the list editor function by touching a touch key to which you have assigned this expanded function using the GT Designer If the utility menu or ladder monitor screen is displayed touch the LIST EDITER key to activate the list editor function See Section 19 2 1 MODE SELECTION WRITE DEL OTHERS PRESS MODE KEY See Section 19 2 2 See Chapter 20 19 2 19 19 OPERATION PROCEDURES FOR THE LIST EDITOR FUNCTION MELSEC GOT 19 2 1 Operation of keyword input If a keyword is registered in the ACPU when the connected ACPU or the ACPU PLC No corresponding to the operation is changed the GOT requests for input of the registered keyword Input the keyword registered in the ACPU and press the GO key If a keyword is not registered in the ACPU this operation is not required The operation automatically changes to Selection of Function and Mode in 19 2 2 NOM BEADING ELS Start the list editor function REESE WAIT A MOMENT sh
320. ommand Actual PV 358127 PLS POS Completion Dyt Counter 327 Pls DSS Command In Positionf EXE Prog No 4 E i Min Major SV ERR RI CE speed Controlling L speed POS CHG Latch H Code T Limit 0 300 zero Point Passage Error Detection E Servo Error Detect AZERO Request AZERO Completion al External Signal FLS External Signal RLS External Signal STOP External Signal DOG CHANGE Servo ON OFF Status Torque Limiting Signal M code Dutputting Error List Error List MD RM E Err Error Definition H M No Code S 7 24 sv P 10 50 103 906 Te uned acis ws started 7424 Maj At astart sv amp pu is OF initial processing the ap is 10 50 5 20 1004 Mot yet installed a sv err oocurred or the cable is faulty 7 24 SVP 10 50 21 4 Umi speed ausi the rae 7 24 SVP 10 50 22 906 Tre mal axis ws started 7424 SVP 10 50 103 906 Te nm axis ws started 7 24 Maj At astat sv am qu is OFF initial processirg the amp is 10 51 5 20 1004 Mt yet installed sw err ccorred or the cable is faulty 7 24 SVP 10 51 21 4 Comend speed outside the rage 7 24 SV P 10 51 22 906 Temel acis ws started e Displays the history of errors that occurred on and after the leading edge of PLC ready M2000 Refer to Section 23 3 3 Error List Designated Axis Monitors the details of the positioning data set to any axis Refer to Section 23 3 5 1 12 Ern Error Definition Code
321. ompensation Val 0123 Compensated Address 0123 cQnoogoooooooocooouoo 0 Nomal 1 Error Data MONIT A61LS Input Output Monitor Screen Chg MENU Inpu Y We HOT Error PLC READY Online Posit Start Overflow Detect Limit Func start Underf low Detect Overflow Reset Resolver Direct Underf low Reset Comp Val Excee Error Reset Resolver Error Error Detect CHO ON OFF Status CH1 ON OFF status ON OFF Status j ON OFF Status ON OFF status ON OFF Status 0 ON OFF Status 0 ON OFF status AMOO ANA 12 3 AD61 Module Monitor Screen Image 0004 0005 0024 0025 0006 0007 Data MONIT A061 Operation Monitor Screen Chg MENU Present Value Set Value Mo Channel 1 Channel 2 01234567 01234567 01234567 01234567 2 1 2 e 1 Phase 2 Phase Inputs x Count Greater0 Count Equal 11 Count Less 12 Ext Preset 13 Count Greaterfid Count Equal 15 Count Less Ext Preset Equal Reset Preset Cmd Equal 0 P Doun Count Count Enable Value Read Ext Preset Equal Reset Preset Cmd Equal P Down Count Count Enable Value Read Ext Preset 0026 0027 0003 0023 12 OPERATION OF EACH SPECIAL MODULE MONITOR SCREEN MELSEC GOT 12 4 A1SD61 Module Monitor Buffer memory address Screen Image No A1S061
322. on list display screen and the key functions displayed on the screen 1 About the display data MR J2M P8A 9600 bps Servo amp Monitor 108t Menu end Unit Composition List Slot Type name fixNo State Motor model S N version IFU MR J2M P8A 10 RB BCD B30H100 AO Slot 1 MR J2M 10DU 1 C1 HC PQ053 MF 8 053 BCD B29H000 BO Slot 2 MR J2M 10DU 2 C2 HC PQ053 MF 8 053 BCD B29H000 BO Slot 3 Slot 4 Slot 5 Slot 6 Slot 7 Slot 8 Option Bec l emez Sea mE 1 2 3 4 5 No tem Description S Displays the types of the drive unit DRU interface unit IFU and option unit installed to the slots Displays the axis numbers of the drive unit DRU and interface unit IFU Displays the states and alarm warning numbers of the drive unit DRU and interface unit IFU Motor model Displays the motor model connected to the drive unit DRU Displays the software numbers of the drive unit DRU and interface unit IFU 2 About the key functions The following table indicates the functions of the keys used for the operations of the unit composition list display screen ar Changes to the function device screen refer to Section 26 6 2 Confirms the settings and returns to the function selection menu screen Terminates the servo amplifier monitor functions Scrolls the list display in units of three items Displayed only when the A95 GOT A956WGOT i
323. onnector disconnected 2 Encoder cable faulty Reset AlarmHist Item Description 1 Alarm Number Displays the number of the alarm that occurred SR mi Displays the name of the alarm that occurred Displays the date and time when the alarm occurred e The alarm occurrence time is displayed on the basis of the clock data of the PLC CPU connected to the GOT 3 Time of Alarm e If a fault occurred in the servo amplifier before it is connected to the GOT an alarm is displayed when the servo amplifier is connected to the GOT In that case the time when the GOT and servo amplifier was connected is displayed as the alarm occurrence time Cause of Alarm Displays the cause of the currently occurring alarm 2 About the key functions The following table indicates the functions of the keys used for the operations of the alarm display screen Sets the servo amplifier model to be connected Displays the cause of the alarm on the window screen o 5 only when the A95 GOT A956WGOT is used meum Changes to the alarm history screen refer to Section 26 5 2 n to the alarm history screen refer to Section 26 5 2 Confirms the settings and returns to the function selection menu screen m Terminates the servo amplifier monitor functions 26 7 26 7 26 OPERATIONS OF SERVO AMPLIFIER MONITOR SCREENS MELSEC GOT 26 5 2 Alarm history screen This section describes the display data of the alarm h
324. ontacts A956WGOT Max 5 lines displayed 1 line Max 7 contacts 2 The display format can be changed to show comments for devices see Section 6 2 2 for details Sample display Ladder monitor screen STEP 12345 18374 M9036 PLS M910 Normally ON Character string Action display X0001 X0002 4H 40023 K Ready Start Operation ready display operation instruction K25 TO Operation start warning TO 7 25 exit Pcro mon menu List 4 lt i Print Cancel Screen Print 1 Switching the display format The current values monitor of the word devices at the bottom of the screen are executed in decimal or hexadecimal format 2 Displaying device comments Comments of for the device used in the PLC program comments that are written into the PLC CPU are displayed 3 Monitoring other stations Other stations in data link systems network system or CC Link system including the GOT or stations connected to the GOT can be monitored 1 OVERVIEW MELSEC GOT 1 1 3 Features of the system monitor function Installing the screen monitor function operating system into the GOT built in memory using the GT Designer enables monitoring and testing of the buffer memory for the PLC CPU program and the special functions module The features of the system monitor function are shown below 1 Any desired device can be monitored using 4 dedicated scr
325. ontents up or down one line to display the monitor device that is not displayed just before or after the current display Operation is enabled when monitor device comment is displayed Scrolls down one line Scrolls up one line v A 9 OPERATION OF THE VARIOUS SYSTEM MONITOR SCREENS MELSEC GOT 9 5 BM Monitor monitor of buffer memory When monitoring the function that monitors the buffer memory of the special function module is called the BM monitor The BM monitor screen when executing the system monitor is explained below 9 5 1 Basic operation The BM Monitor operation procedure is shown below See Sec 9 1 1 Operation procedure When a screen other than the basic screen is displayed touch MENU at the top of the currently displayed screen display the basic screen and select BM Monitor EET When you touch MENU you return to the basic screen When you touch FORM you can change this display See Sec 9 1 2 When you touch SET the monitor station and device PRESS SET KEY SELECT can be specified See Sec 9 1 3 ITEM THEN ENTER DEVICE TYPE amp NO Select BM Monitor with the basic screen ff oey NETWK No 0 STATION FF Specify the station and device to be monitored and the monitor module 16 32 bit module ee complete display ig BM For the method of the specifying see Sec 9 1 3 Specify the
326. op Switching Indicates the cumulative number of times for which loops have been switched is displayed when coaxial bus connections are established D Link Info Constant LS LoopBK Info 17 9 17 9 17 USING THE NETWORK MONITOR SCREENS MELSEC GOT Section Contents of Display e Parameter Setting Not displayed e Reserved Sta Indicates the availability of a reserved station Have None e Communication Mode TsSt Sta Indicates either of Normal mode or Constant LS e Transmission Mode Indicates either of Normal Trans or Multipl trans e Transmission Stat Indicates either of Normal Trans or Multipl trans ox ox is displayed when coaxial bus connections are established 2 Key functions The table below shows the function of keys that are used on the detailed own station monitor screen Function Returns to the own station monitor screen Exits the detailed own station monitor screen and returns to the previous monitor screen where the network monitor function was executed Changes the details on the window only for A95 GOT 17 10 17 10 17 USING THE NETWORK MONITOR SCREENS MELSEC GOT 17 3 Other station monitor This section describes the structure of the monitor screen and the common operations used when executing the other station monitor 17 3 1 Display contents and keys functions other station monitor menu This section describes the
327. or Screen FEDCBAS875543210 Digital Value Err 0110110110110110 Temp Value Err 0110110110110110 at tee Err 0110110110110110 isc Error Enable 0110110110110110 O Normal Disabled 1 Break Enabled onversion 0110110110110110 S No FEDOBASS 76543210 nable 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Data Format 0110110110110110 Input Status X Temp Value Input Status Format Format c Format 0 Format Temp Value 0 01234 01234 01234 01234 1 01234 01234 01234 01234 2 01234 01234 A 01234 01234 3 401234 01234 01234 01234 4 01234 01234 01234 01234 S 01234 01234 a 01234 01234 6 01234 01234 a 01234 01234 7 01234 01234 x 01234 01234 Digital Output Temp Value D 0 0123 5 C D 4000 0123 5 C 12 26 Data MONIT AG16TO Input Output Monitor Screen Chg MENU Inputs X uts ty HOT Error READY Error Discon Error Digital Error Temp Error LED Display MELSEC GOT Buffer memory address dec hex 000F E O 0000 0001 0002 0004 0070 to 007F 112 to 127 0010 to 0017 y O 0000 0180 to 01FF 0050 to 0057 0060 to 0067 0040 to 0047 0020 to 0027 0200 to 027F 0030 to 003F po gt E 1 12 26 12 OPERATION OF EACH SPECIAL MODULE MONITOR SCREEN MELSEC GOT Buffer memory address Screen Image No 256 to 383 0100 to 017F 128 to 255 0080 to 00FF Data MO
328. ory Space k bytes Information common to motion monitor data A985GOT A956WGOT 115 A95 GOT 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC GOT 3 7 Specifications of the Servo Amplifier Monitor Functions POINT Refer to Section 2 3 for the restrictions on the servo amplifier monitor functions 3 7 1 List of servo amplifier models that can be monitored and functions The following table lists the servo amplifier models where the servo amplifier monitor functions can be performed and the functions Servo Amplifier MR J2M A Series MR J2S LJA MR J2S L CP MR J2M P8A MR J2M L DU Modelselection o o o J O Badae O o Oo o Station number selection O 0 J Station number seting O O O J O IFU station number erm RR Alarm Diagnostics display ABS data display Module composition list display Parameters DRU JOG operation Positioning operation Test Motorless operation DO forced output Function available Function unavailable Parameter setting Parameters Parameters IFU DRU 3 7 2 Access range that can be monitored The access range where the servo amplifier monitor functions can be performed is as follows 1 When RS 232C communication function is used Only the connected servo amplifier can be monitored 2 When RS 422 communication function is used multidrop communication The servo amplifier from among up to 32 axes of servo a
329. ot canceled until the servo amplifier is powered off 26 8 2 Preparations for test operations To start test operations you need to make settings for test operations on the connected servo amplifier For details of the servo amplifier side settings for performing test operations refer to the manual of the connected servo amplifier 26 26 26 26 26 OPERATIONS OF SERVO AMPLIFIER MONITOR SCREENS MELSEC GOT 26 8 3 JOG operation screen This section describes the display data of the JOG operation screen and the key functions displayed on the screen 1 About the display data MR J2S A 9600 bps Servo amp Monitor ost Menu Ena Motor speed 200 r min 0 5175 Aec dec time 1000 ms 0 20000 No temo Description Motor speed Displays the set speed of the servo motor 2 Acc dec time Displays the set acceleration deceleration time constant of the servo motor 2 Operation Operation start Touch the Forward or Reverse key Operation stop Release the Forward or Reverse key 3 About the key functions The following table indicates the functions of the keys used for the operations of the JOG operation screen Runs the servo motor in the forward rotation CCW direction while being touched Runs the servo motor in the reverse rotation CW direction while being touched B Changes to the positioning operation screen refer to Section 26 8 4 Witho
330. ows communication status with the PLC CPU MOTION CONTOROLLER NOT SUPPORTED y input of the keyword is requested KEYWORD Y Input the keyword registered in the connected ACPU and press the GO key Input the keyword to 6 letters maximum with the device No constant setting key 0 to 9 A to F 0 4 0 4 1 1 GO When the keyword Y KEYWORD 040411 is input let The GOT checks the input keyword and displays an Incorrect keyword TS Inpat the result When the input keyword The check result display time is about 2 seconds EMISOR eh Od i gorreet To Mode Selection in 19 2 2 When the input keyword KEYWORD NG is not correct 1 1 When the input keyword does not match with the registered keyword only the following operations in Chapter 20 can be allowed Other modes Error step reading Buffer memory overall monitor Time monitor PLC No setting Main sub switching POINTS e For operations not shown in other modes clear delete the registered keyword with the PLC memory all clear in the following page if you do not remember the keyword registered in the ACPU When PLC memory all clear is performed the user data including sequence program is also cleared e The keyword registered in the ACPU can be changed or a new keyword can be registered as shown in Chapter 20 19 3 19 3 19 OPERATION PROCEDURES FOR THE LIST EDITOR
331. pe of the GOT connection target is the AnNCPU or AnACPU TsSt Info Ctrl St Info 17 5 17 5 17 USING THE NETWORK MONITOR SCREENS MELSEC GOT No Section Contents of Display e Total of L Sta Indicates the maximum number of the stations to be linked The maximum number is defined by common parameters e Largest Nrm Sta Indicates the station number of the largest station that is connected in a normal condition e Largest DL Sta Indicates the station number of the largest station that is data linked Com Status Show the current communications status of the own station D Link in prog D Link Stop A D Link Stop H B Pass 3 D Link Info excut Disconnection Testing Reset in prgr Causes of Ssp Indicates the causes why the communications were interrupted This indicates OK if communications is in a normal condition Normal Offline Offline Test Others error codes Causes of Stop Indicates the causes why the data link was stopped This indicate OK if the data link is in a normal condition No common para Host Para error Instructed by Other Station n station Essential Parameter Not Matched Instructed by Host Station Improper I O Allocation Instructed by All Stations n stations Others error codes e Constant LS Indicates the predetermined time of constant link scans FLoop Shows the status of the primary loop lines of the own station Normal LoopBK Trans D Link Impo RLoop
332. play one ladder scroll up or down When reading ladder with device specification read next program with same device specification see 2 in Sec 6 2 2 6 OPERATING THE VARIOUS LADDER MONITOR SCREENS 2 When MELSEC Q QnA ladder monitor is executed a Display 9 9 89 7 When comment is not displayed maximum 8 lines O FF O PLC RAM MAIN 124STEP n m When comment is displayed maximum 3 lines 1 Normaliy Sc S ING ind ON OFF status display for ladder monitor Bem Su Operation ON status 4 o9 Ak display operation ready epee dc OFF status JEK Or 2 porto a einig The MCR command is normally displayed as 4L 3 sorte ant Sequence program is displayed A maximum of 11 contact points is displayed in one line of a ladder for 12 contact 1 points or more move to the next line 1 When a comment display is specified a comment is also displayed expanded comments are given priority For the method of displaying comments see Sec 6 3 3 A maximum of eight devices is displayed for the word device current value timer and counter current value upper row and set value lower row When the set value is an 2 indirect specification the value of the indirectly specified device is displayed To switch between decimal and hexadecimal for the displayed value see Sec 6 3 3 3 Display the keys used with the opera
333. played depending on the model of the connected servo amplifier For the screens that cannot be displayed refer to 2 MR J2S A 9600 bos Servo amp Honitor Tosti End setup Honiton D Disgrostics Function selection menu screen refer to Section 26 2 Test Y Motor speed 200 r min 0 5175 Enes Mee tine 100015 10 2000011 Reverse JOG operation screen 1 ou oto DL O equ D Y 2 N a E E SORT Ig Kena Mu MR J25 A 9600 bos Servo amo Monitor Lost Meru End gt A SONS US fe pe gt 1 cuis e Oo Oor Motor speed 200 r min 0 5175 pores Select Start to enter Operation without Motor cuis O aie ema 1s O Acc dec time 1000 0 20000 Reverse Cycle amplifier power ta restore Normal Mode ena O cusa O onta ta O 4 4 moc Ieur petas nororcemuugt Cd Lug lesas Rane netazl 0 Positioning operation screen Positioning Motorless IUE Screen DO forced output screen c 1 Not displayed for MR J2M P8A monitor 2 Not displayed for MR J2M ODU monitor If the JOG operation screen data has not been downloaded to the GOT Monitor data not found appears and the subsequent screens are not displayed 26 23 26 23 26 OPERATIONS OF SERVO AMPLIFIER MONITOR SCREENS MELSEC
334. plays a comment for the specified device Delete program program Deletes a program at the specified step Specified block Deletes the specified block in the program Deletes all NOP instructions found in program codes described before the END instruction NOPLF instructions will not be deleted Parameter Sets or changes various parameters like those for the memory Set parameter capacity timer counter and latching range Sets or changes a keyword 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC GOT Mode Function Action mode display Change T C set values Changes values settotimer counterdevices values set to timer counter devices Read t Displays details of an error in the ACPU and the associated step PC ead erroneous step Aumber check Checks duplex coils instruction codes and other elements in the Buffer memory batch With regard to a special function unit of the specified I O number Monitor monitor monitors the contents of the buffer memory at the specified address Clock monitor Clock monitor Monitors the ACPU clock D9025 through D9027 h Others O TN es all contents of the ACPU memory and resets it to the initial All Clears the program Main Sub currently selected Device memory Clears all device memories except for special D special M and R system PC No setup lt No PC No setup lt Switches the target ACPU in GOT operations in each mode Switch Switch Main Sub DC the target program
335. ple When the set value of the offset or gain is O to 2000 when specifying a change value of 50 input 1000 3 For data where 16 bits is displayed one bit at a time as 0 and 1 specify the change value of 16 bits in decimal 12 9 12 9 12 OPERATION OF EACH SPECIAL MODULE MONITOR SCREEN MELSEC GOT 12 1 8 Changing the screen This section describes how to change the screen when executing each monitor function of the special module monitor function from the status where the user created monitor screen is displayed User created monitor screen 41 1 Touch the key where the touch switch expanded function was set with the GT Designer and start E Touch the special module monitor operation When the Utility screen is displayed touch SP UNIT and start the special module monitor function The system monitor function and special module monitor Utility Sereen function can also be started from the Utility menu screen Touch SP UNIT Touch END PC Information screen Touch QCPU See Sec 12 1 3 Touch System Configuration System Configuration screen See Sec 12 1 1 Touch the display module m in info mode Unit Dtail info screen Touch System Configuration See Sec 12 1 4 Touch Touch on display module Sys conf 1 When I O module is selected Key window d
336. po123 00 00 00 00 012 Dp0123 00 00 00 00 012 Dpo123 00 00 00 00 012 Dpo123 00 00 00 00 012 Dp0123 00 00 00 00 012 Dpo123 00 00 00 00 012 Ax Start Mode 6009000000000000 Dp i23 00 Dpoie3 00 Dpo123 00 Dpo123 00 Dpoie3 00 Dpoie3 00 Dpoi 3 oo Dpoie3 oo Dpoiea 00 Dpoi 3 00 Dp ie3 00 Dpoie3 00 Dpoi 3 00 Dp ie3 00 Dpo123 00 Dpo123 00 Time Res 00 00 00 012 00 00 00 012 00 00 00 012 00 00 00 012 00 00 00 012 00 00 00 012 00 00 00 012 00 00 00 012 00 00 00 012 00 00 00 012 00 00 00 012 00 00 00 012 00 00 00 012 00 00 00 012 00 00 00 012 00 00 00 012 Speed Position Control SET RESET MONIT MENU Axigl Axis2 Axis3 Switch rv Lantral Travel After Travel Correct ion Register WP Switch Latch Switch Enabled Ddo 1 wm 10 5 inch x107 5 deg o uoi uml x10 5 inch x10 5 deg 01234567890 01234567890 i 01234567890 ERST nr cm cene veo e ano NEA LEON So n ij 01234567690 01234567890 01234567890 O Disable i H 1 Enable d ADISP SP Start JOG MPG Drive SET RESET MONIT Menu ENP d Spacial Star Dperat ion Information Parameter Data No 012 i 01H Qiz 01 H 012 f 01H 012 012 012 0123 0123 oles JOG amp MPG ny LS Axis Axis3 JOG Speed x10 5 mm min 10 3 in
337. put Status Y emp Value Module 22 to 25 C Code 22 to 25 Channel 01234 6 1 01234 6 01234 2 01 ae Channel 01234 6 01234 6 01234 01 26 Channel 01234 6 1234 6 01234 01 Channel 01234 6 01234 6 01234 01 Loaded 02 04 05 10 12 06 07 16 17 18 18 1C Writing Data Error Module 13 14 15 18 1h 1E 1F CH 0 Code O Code 1C 1E 1F Channel 4321 B HET Error B Module 1 Fault D P Enable Valid 0110110110110110 B Module 2 Fault B Module 3 Fault DP Enabled 0000 B Module 4 Fault 0020 0022 0024 0026 7 0021 0023 Process ing Mode Count Time 0025 0027 Channel 1 3 0123 AB4AD Setting Monitor Screen Sample Average Count Time CH 4321 4321 Channel e 0123 0110110110110110 Channel 3 0123 0 Sampling 0 Enunt Average 1 Averaging 1 Time Average Channel 4 0123 AS4AD Input Output Monitor Screen Inputs Xx WOT Error RERDY CH1 Mad Fault CH2 Mad Fault CH3 Mad Fault CH4 Mad Fault 12 48 12 48 12 OPERATION OF EACH SPECIAL MODULE MONITOR SCREEN MELSEC GOT Buffer memory address Screen Image No 10 to 13 000A to 000D 18 to 21 0012 to 0015 Data MONIT AB4AD Graph Monitor Screen Che MENU 28 to 31 001C to 001F 0018 Input Qutput 0 50 Temp Value x
338. put the HELP 1 READ the Read mode 2 COMMENT DISPLAY READ Select Read 1 STEP 2 INSTRUCTION CLEAR END HELP MEN READ 2 Select Command KEY IN STEP NO CLEAR END HELP MENU READ Set the MOV command KEY IN STEP NO MOV ICLEAR END HELP MENU a Reading MOV D20 K2Y0018 13 gt MOV 13 D20 of the 13th step 13 K2Y0018 6 D20 139 MV 13 020 Message when the MOV NOT FOUND command is not present after the 13th step U Now reading the command with the Help function command specification is completed 20 11 20 OPERATION OF EDITING SCREEN FOR EACH LIST MELSEC GOT 2 Displaying Kana comment The following example shows the procedure of displaying the Kana comment in the Read mode Operation example HELP MENU Input the HELP 1 READ the Read mode 2 COMMENT DISPLAY CLEAR END COMMENT DISP 2 Select the Kana comment display 1 YES 2 NO CLEAR END HELP MENU R OLD X0000 Select 1 Kana comment display 2 1 QUI Y0020 Display the Kana comment of 2 LD X0000 the device at the cursor position Motor start limit 0 LD X0000 1 gt QUT Y0020 2 LD X0000 Motor start check 20 12 20 12 20 OPERATION OF EDITING SCREEN FOR EACH LIST MELSEC GOT 20 3 Operation procedure list of list edit 20 3 1 Common operation Procedures key input sequence Input of keyword Input when the keyword is K
339. r device number k En s Used to stop the defect search retuming to the ladder monitor screen 1 Use the following touch keys if you want to delete any data entry AC Clears all the data entered in a specific field DEL Clears one character at the cursor position 5 Start searching for a device that caused a failure and view search results on the ladder monitor screen Search from the last step number backward as displayed on the ladder monitor screen Please note that any touch keys other than Esc and Exit are enabled until the defect search is completed 6 12 6 12 6 OPERATING THE VARIOUS LADDER MONITOR SCREENS Search results MELSEC GOT Search results reveal any occurrences of the search device They are useful when you determine whether a defective device is conductive or nonconductive If any occurrence of the search device is not found as a result of the search a message appears on screen telling that PROGRAM NOT FOUND 1 When an occurrence of the search device is found If an occurrence of the search device is found as a result of the search the search for another defective device will automatically be started Example After searching for Device M120 that is in the OFF state M669 will be displayed as a device that caused a failure STEP 63 932 Maes 54 1 M120 j s _ PLoro mon esc List 4 Print Cancel Screen Print 4 L
340. r function from the status where the user created monitor screen is displayed Start 1 n User created monitor screen 1 Touch the key where the touch switch expanded function was set with the GT Designer and start the motion monitor operation 23 2 Touch MOTION MON and start the motion monitor Touch 1 3 function 3 When END was pressed to end the motion monitor function starting the motion monitor function the next SU N 2 time will display the previously ended screen H El ml 9 E NL SL HK O The system monitor function and special module monitor A l function can also be started from the Utility menu screen Utility screen Touch END Touch MOTION MON 2 3 Ext 1 Touch Hs Touch Parameter Set M System Configuration screen Refer to Section 23 1 1 Touch Touch sys conf Motion Monitor v E vation monitor FAES Monitor menu screen Refer to Section 23 3 Touch Mon Touch the monitor Menu menu item fetal fv fits Ors lus Ons Ons Ons Ons las Ad Monitor screen of selected function Refer to Section 23 3 1 and later Touch END Go to user created monitor screen or uti
341. r monitor When a password is registered at the PLC CPU a file password window is displayed at the start of reading Input the password It does not have to be input if it is not registered e MELSEC QnA ladder monitor When a keyword is registered at the PLC CPU a key window nuu is displayed at the start of reading Input the keyword LORIE It does not have to be input if it is not registered Name Type Size Date Time Title EIINITIAL Program 2184 1999 06 10 17 35 MELSECNET 10 Program No 10 KAKOU Program 2148 1999 06 10 17 37 A Line WA program Sio 1999 0610 17 40 I Lie 8 Contents and capacity of the reading process are displayed KENSA Program 2184 1999 06 10 17 42 D Line MONITOR Program 2164 1999 06 10 17 43 Monitor System B k x FUMITATE coment 2194 1993 06 10 17 45 a Line Touch Break to stop the reading process HANSOU Comment 2184 1999 06 10 07 21 B Linc MONITOR Comment 1083 1993 06 10 17 50 Monitor System KENSA Comment 1909 1555 06 10 19 02 0 Line To read the ladder again start from the beginning 9 When the message Completed is displayed reading is E EJ E SAE za completed Change the screen with the following keys Exit Move to the screen when the ladder monitor is started Ladder Move to the ladder monitor screen Menu Start from setting window 2 for the network No station No Once PLC reading is performed operations for PLC reading are no
342. ration procedures Ladder monitor function 5 1 Network monitor function 15 1 Special module monitor function 11 1 System monitor function 8 1 List editor function ssse 19 1 Servo amplifier monitor 25 1 Other station monitor 17 9 Outside speaker sound s 4 8 Own station monitor sse ee ee ee ee ee ee ee n 17 1 P Pas WO elect ERES 4 19 Positioning Monitor sese eee eee eee eee eee ee 23 9 Present Value Mon eee eee 23 4 Present Value HIS eee eee 23 12 Q QC24 connection transmission speed 4 9 Quick test function sese eee 9 19 QBUS extension number 4 8 QBUS slot number ss sese eee 4 8 R Reading data from the PLC 6 3 Required equipment sese eee eee eee eee eee eee 2 1 Reverse display eesss 4 11 Router Address coooooconcoconcccoccccconcconancncnncnnnos 4 10 S Screen display and key functions Batch monitor sse eee eee eee ee eee 9 11 BM monitot iii 9 15 Detailed own station monitor 17 3 Entry monitor iana aeaa Zhang 9 8 Ladder monitor function 6 19 Other station monitor 17 9 Special module monitor function 12 1 System monitor function
343. reated as a station that stays in a normal condition 2 Key Functions The table below shows the function of keys that are used on the other station communications status monitor screen Key RET Returns to the own station monitor screen Exits the other station communications status monitor screen and END returns to the previous monitor screen where the network monitor function was executed 17 12 17 12 17 USING THE NETWORK MONITOR SCREENS MELSEC GOT 17 3 3 Display contents and keys functions other station data link status monitor This section describes the other station data link status monitor screen and the function of on screen keys 1 Display contents When the A985 97 960GOT is used No 1 2 When the A95 956WGOT is used The display details are the same as the ones on the A985 97 960GOT Display example Data L s per 1232455678 Contents of Display Station numbers are shown up to the maximum number of linked stations Any station that is not data linked is highlighted on screen 3 s a normal condition 2 Key Functions Any station specified as a reserved station is treated as a station that stays in The table below shows the function of keys that
344. rgest Nrm Sta Indicates the station number of the largest station that is connected in a normal condition e Largest DL Sta Indicates the station number of the largest station that is data linked e Com Status Show the current communications status of the own station D Link in prog D Link Stop A D Link Stop H B Pass excut Disconnection Testing Reset in prgr e Causes of Ssp Indicates the reason why the communications were interrupted This indicates OK if communications is in a normal condition Normal Offline Offline Test Others error codes e Causes of Stop Indicates the causes why the data link was stopped This indicates OK if the data link is in a normal condition No common para Host Para error Instructed by Other Station n station Essential Parameter Not Matched Instructed by Host Station Improper I O Allocation Instructed by AII Stations n stations Others error codes e Constant LS Indicates the predetermined time of constant link scans FLoop Shows the status of the primary loop lines of the own station Normal LoopBK Trans D Link Impo e RLoop Shows the status of the secondary loop lines of the own station Normal LoopBK Trans D Link Impo FLoop Back Station Indicates the station number of a station that executes the loopback along the primary loop e RLoop Back Station Indicates the station number of a station that executes the loopback along the secondary loop e of Lo
345. rmal condition is highlighted on screen A station specified as a reserved station is treated as a station that stays ina normal condition 2 Key Functions The table below shows the function of keys that are used on the other station loop status monitor screen Key Function Returns to the own station monitor screen Exits the other station loop status monitor screen and returns to the previous monitor screen where the network monitor function was executed 17 47 17 17 18 ERROR DISPLAYS AND COUNTERMEASURES WHEN MONITORING MELSEC GOT CHAPTER18 ERROR DISPLAYS AND COUNTERMEASURES WHEN MONITORING NETWORKS The following chart shows the error messages that are displayed during the network monitor operation and how to handle them Error message Contents of error Action to take e Check the connections between the PLC CPU and the GOT for Communication could not disconnected connectors and established with the PLC Can not icati les Communication CPU cables e Check if an error has occurred in the PLC CPU The PLC CPU to be Key Word error connected is keyword Release the keyword protected by the QnA 18 1 18 1 18 ERROR DISPLAYS AND COUNTERMEASURES WHEN MONITORING MELSEC GOT MEMO 19 OPERATION PROCEDURES FOR THE LIST EDITOR FUNCTION MELSEC GOT CHAPTER19 OPERATION PROCEDURES FOR THE LIST EDITOR FUNCTION This section describes the operation procedure
346. rough the GOT on the download dialog box Y GT Designer operation is finished v End Proceed to Section 22 2 to operate the motion monitor 22 1 22 1 22 OPERATION PROCEDURES FOR MOTION MONITOR FUNCTION MELSEC GOT 22 2 Operation procedures from user created monitor screen display to start of motion monitor 22 22 2 This section describes the operation procedure for the GOT when starting each operation of the motion monitor function after the system program OS of the motion monitor function has been installed in the GOT built in memory and downloading the motion monitor data Install memory board on the GOT Start up GOT Display the use created monitor screen Start the motion monitor function Display the system configuration screen Specify the motion controller CPU to be monitored 1 To next page 1 When starting the module format and related data are not displayed When reading of module data from the PLC CPU is complete the module format and related data is displayed When END is selected the motion monitoring ends and the display moves to the original screen where the motion monitor function was begun See Secs 23 1 Touch the key where the touch switch expanded function was set with the drawing software and start the system monitor function When the Utility screen
347. s for use of list editor function 19 1 Operation procedures before starting the list edit Procedures for transferring the operating system OS for the list editor function from the personal computer to the GOT and for installing the system into the memory For details refer to the Help of the drawing software Detailed information including displays and key operations is provided Connect the GOT to the personal computer Start the GOT Start the personal computer and the GT Designer EL The GOT does not require setting and operation after start up Transfer the OS for the list editor function from the Jv Transfer the system in the installation dialog box personal computer to the GOT Install it into the memory After installation the GOT allows editing the list After installation the installation dialog box shows Completed End the GT Designer End For list edit go to 19 2 19 1 19 1 19 OPERATION PROCEDURES FOR THE LIST EDITOR FUNCTION MELSEC GOT 19 2 Operation procedures from user created monitor screen display to starting list editing This section explains how you should operate the GOT to access the list editor function after having installed the list editor function operating system OS to the GOT internal memory Start Start up the GOT y Display the user created monitor screen Y Start the list editor function EE The screen switches aut
348. s how to start the network monitor function after the operating system OS for the network monitor has been installed in the GOT built in internal memory Y Install a memory board on the GOT y Start up the GOT Y Go to the user created monitor screen Start the network monitor function 1 Go to the own station monitor screen See Section 17 1 Y Select the detailed own station monitor or other station monitor option Go to the detailed own station monitor or other See Sections 17 2 and 17 3 station monitor menu 1 Touch the key assigned to the network monitor function set in the touch switch expanded function of the GT Designer In the Utility Menu screen touch NET MON to start the network monitor function 15 2 16 SWITCHING THE NETWORK MONITOR SCREENS MELSEC GOT CHAPTER16 SWITCHING THE NETWORK MONITOR SCREENS The following flowchart outlines the steps involved in switching the network monitor Screens Utility menu screen or je user created monitor screen B Touch a touch key for the network monitor function Host station monitor screen Touch a module Other station monitor menu screen ET pun F UNIT2 P a E GEN S aG R j R SPOUE Onkin h 2 emere entan L H a Li MELsECNETAO isa ok li MELSECNET 2 Select a module gt nz aastamistSta a a OSta
349. s local overseas FA Center Note that the repair conditions at each FA Center may differ 4 Exclusion of chance loss and secondary loss from warranty liability Regardless of the gratis warranty term Mitsubishi shall not be liable for compensation to damages caused by any cause found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi chance losses lost profits incurred to the user by Failures of Mitsubishi products damages and secondary damages caused from special reasons regardless of Mitsubishi s expectations compensation for accidents and compensation for damages to products other than Mitsubishi products and other duties 5 Changes in product specifications The specifications given in the catalogs manuals or technical documents are subject to change without prior notice 6 Product application 1 In using the Mitsubishi MELSEC programmable logic controller the usage conditions shall be that the application will not lead to a major accident even if any problem or fault should occur in the programmable logic controller device and that backup and fail safe functions are systematically provided outside of the device for any problem or fault 2 The Mitsubishi general purpose programmable logic controller has been designed and manufactured for applications in general industries etc Thus applications in which the public could be affected such as in nuclear power plants and other power plants operated by respective power companies and applic
350. s of network information that can be monitored Table 3 1 Network Information To be Monitored union T awenn MELSECNET MELSECNET MELSECNET MELSECNET MELSECNET Function Network Information 11 B Master 11 B Local 10 Control 10 Ordinary 10 Remote Station Station Station Station Master Station Network category display o Oo o o o Network No display x x O O O Station No display 90090 Own station operatonmode o o o o o Own station monitor Ownstonbopesaus o o o o T o Loop back execution status o o o o o Link scan time display _ _ o x o o o Datalinksystemloopstaus o x o o o Own station s station No O O O O O Own station Ownstation o o x x x information NetworkNo 1 Xx Xx o o o x x GopN X X 9 L9 L X Specified control station x x d o o x Control Currentcontrolstation O x x o o x station Communicationsinformation x x o o x information Sub control station link He x o o x Remote O master station station No x x o o x Total oflinked stations o o o o o Largestconnectedstation x x o o o Data link Largest data linked station x x O O O __ information Communications status x o o o gt SO Causes of interupted communicatio
351. s of the external I O signals e Function device display Displays the ON OFF states of the I O function devices e Amplifier information display Displays the model ID and encoder resolution of the servo motor connected to the servo amplifier ABS data display Displays the absolute position data of the absolute position detection system Unit composition list display Displays the servo amplifier unit composition list 5 Parameters Displays the parameter data and changes the parameter Refer to Section 26 6 setting 6 TeSLc orem Performs various test operations JOG operation Refer to Section 26 7 positioning operation motorless operation DO forced output 26 2 26 2 26 OPERATIONS OF SERVO AMPLIFIER MONITOR SCREENS MELSEC GOT 26 3 Setup Set communication with the servo amplifier POINT 1 Before making the settings on the setup screen also make the same settings on the servo amplifier side If the settings on this screen differ from the settings on the servo amplifier side normal communication may not be performed 2 The settings on the setup screen return to the initial states when the GOT is powered off or reset After powering on the GOT make settings on the setup screen again 26 3 1 Setup screen This section explains the display data of the setup screen and the key functions displayed on the screen MR J25 A 19200bps Servo amp Monitor 00Stat ion Ena 1 4 MR J28 A T
352. s used 26 15 26 15 26 OPERATIONS OF SERVO AMPLIFIER MONITOR SCREENS MELSEC GOT 26 7 Parameter Setting Using the parameter setting function you can set the servo parameters basic parameters extension parameters 1 2 for the connected servo amplifier After the password has been set on GT Designer an attempt to access the parameter setting screen of the servo amplifier monitor displays the password input screen After selection of Parameters on the function selection menu screen the screen transition is as shown below MR J25 A 9600 bps Servo amp Moniton ost End ew ete Alarm Diagnostics Function selection menu screen refer to Section 26 2 1 Set the servo parameter changing password on GT Designer For details of the parameter setting 1 refer to the GT Works Version 5 GT Designer Version 5 Reference Manual Have you registered the servo amplifier parameter changing password MR J28 A 9600 bps Servo amp Monitor L ost Pr Name Value Unit A TE A Write Password input screen Refer to Enter the parameter changing password Section 26 7 1 MR J2S A 9600 bps Servo amp Monitor L ost Menu End Pr Name Value Unit n C000 a Change 1 Function selection 1 0002 2 auto tuning 0105 a me 3 Com pulse multiply numer 1 4
353. sec Position Ctrl balnz 35 rad sec wr Speed Ctrl Galn2 817 rad sec Soeed Integral Comp 20 rad sec Notch Filter t Used Feed Forward gain ix che Select the servo parameter to be set Refer to Section 23 4 1 Change the servo parameter setting Refer to Section 23 4 2 Refer to Section 23 4 2 Write the new servo parameter setting 22 3 22 OPERATION PROCEDURES FOR MOTION MONITOR FUNCTION MELSEC GOT 22 2 1 Password entry operation procedure With the motion parameter changing password written to the GOT using GT Designer the password entry screen appears if you attempt to access the parameter setting screen of the motion monitor function Param Setting AxNo 1 AXNO E END MINO auto Manual Mode2 SV Response Setting 5 Load Inertia Ratio 7 0 To Motor Position Ctrl Gaint A Speed Ctrl Gaini E Position Ctrl Gain2 PL Speed Ctrl Gain2 Speed Integral Comp Notch Filter Feed Forward Gain 1 Features e If the characters entered match a password the Parameter Setting screen appears e f the characters entered do not match a password an error message appears on screen Touching El will return to the previous monitor screen e Numerical numbers and alphabets A to F can be used for a password Use GT Designer to set the motion parameter changing password Refer to the help function of GT Desig
354. solute encoder data pulse Absolute encoder data CYC Motor edge pulse value CYCO Motor edge pulse value 2 61453 0 CyC Command pulse value CyCO Command pulse value Number of motor rotations rev Number of motor rotations ABS 21095 ABSO 0 uo mi no em Description S Displays the following items of the absolute position data in the absolute position detection Absolute position system data Motor edge pulse value e Command pulse value Displays the following items of the encoder data Current position Absolute encoder data e CYC Motor edge pulse value e CYC Command pulse value 2 Encoder data Number of motor rotations ABS Position at power loss Absolute encoder data e CYCO Motor edge pulse value e CYCO Command pulse value e Number of motor rotations ABSO 2 About the key functions The following table indicates the functions of the keys used for the operations of the ABS data display screen Changes the indication between the current value and home position information of the encoder data Displayed only when the A95 GOT A956WGOT is used gt DI DO Changes to the DI DO display screen refer to Section 26 6 1 nc Dev Changes to the function device screen refer to Section 26 6 2 26 14 26 14 26 OPERATIONS OF SERVO AMPLIFIER MONITOR SCREENS MELSEC GOT 26 6 5 Unit composition list display screen This section describes the display data of the unit compositi
355. splay MELSEC GOT EET KEINE En PRE E 7 caes 2 Features e If objects numeric input or touch keys etc are secured by using GT Designer their security levels can be changed by entering a password e f the characters entered match a password a message appears on screen telling that the security levels have been properly changed Touching will return to the Utility Menu screen e f the characters entered do not match a password an error message appears on screen Touching will return to the Utility Menu screen e Numerical numbers and alphabets A to F can be used for a password e Details about security levels see GT Works Version5 GT Designer Version5 Reference Manual 3 Procedure a To enter a password follow these steps e Touch 0 to 9 and A to F to enter a password e Touch to confirm the password entered e To correct the password entered touch DEL to delete wrong characters and enter correct characters again b To quit entering a password to return to the previous monitor screen e Touch amp 4 OPERATING THE UTILITY FUNCTION MELSEC GOT 4 11 Controlling limited access to the utility menu password 1 Screen display Lr p T4151 a 4 5 Jie Itc IP CA v 1 2 8 Je L8 ele 2 Features e Password protection can be set on the GOT by using GT Designer
356. splay the program gt HELP 1 Delete the whole NOP ihe picaram ihe Delete moda 20 14 20 14 20 OPERATION OF EDITING SCREEN FOR EACH LIST MELSEC GOT 20 3 6 Operation in Parameter mode P Procedures key input sequence Return the parameters to Clearing all parameters S i PARAM gt GO gt END GO the initial setting status P S arameter setting Set the parameters for the PARAM for AOJPHCPU AOJ2HCPU Select the latch range from Setting of latch range No latch 1 2 latch and All latch MEET Set the availability s1536 1 gt l2 gt t gt GO gt 2 9 PRAE to 2047 of the step relay idt When the parameter 2 gt END 4 setting is complete write Setting for multiple items is ee the PLC CPU also available End of writing is displayed Parameter setting Set the parameters other other than AOJ2HCPU than AOJ2HCPU Set the main sequence program capacity and the gt y Capacity K END gt 2 For sub input unit 1K step file register capacity Completion of setting write Capacity GO END 2 For main input unit 1K step Setting of memory capacity 1 4 gt points gt KENDI g
357. st adjustment You can adjust the contrast in about 20 steps e Touch Enter to store the settings into the GOT b Return to the utility menu screen e Touching amp returns to the utility menu screen 4 OPERATING THE UTILITY FUNCTION MELSEC GOT Some GOTs display the brightness adjustment switch on the screen though they cannot use the brightness adjustment function The brightness adjustment switch can be hidden in the following method 1 Corresponding GOTs Type A975GOT TBA A970GOT TBA Serial number 9806AA to 9807AA Confirm the serial number in the DATE field of the product rating plate 2 Method Install the system programs into the GOT Install all system programs except ROM BIOS that have been installed into the target GOT The system programs installed in the GOT can be confirmed in the following method 1 Confirmation on the GOT You can confirm the system programs in the memory information of the utility function 2 Confirmation from GT Designer You confirm the system programs in the built in memory information of GT Designer Refer to Help of GT Designer for details of the built in memory information 5 OPERATION PROCEDURES FOR THE LADDER MONITOR FUNCTION MELSEC GOT CHAPTER5 OPERATION PROCEDURES FOR THE LADDER MONITOR FUNCTION The operation procedures to follow when using the ladder monitor function are explained in the following section 5 1 Operation pr
358. station that stays in an abnormal condition or out of action is highlighted on screen A station specified as a reserved station is treated as a station that stays ina normal condition 2 Key Functions The table below shows the function of keys that are used on the other station CPU action status monitor screen Key Function Returns to the own station monitor screen Exits the other station CPU action status monitor screen and returns to the previous monitor screen where the network monitor function was executed 17 15 17 15 17 USING THE NETWORK MONITOR SCREENS MELSEC GOT 17 3 6 Display contents and keys functions other station CPU RUN status monitor This section describes the other station CPU RUN status monitor screen and the function of on screen keys This option is not selectable when connecting to a remote I O network system 1 Display contents The display details are the same as the ones on the A985 97 Ep El 960GOT ror Els ror Ml 16 ER El Display example pls ToP IAE STOP ze Elo EN SR EN a CPU RUN Status Contents of Display Up to 64 station numbers are shown is displayed below station numbers of reserved stations or any stations that come after the maximum number of linked stations 2 Key Fun
359. t Do not touch them and bring the parts cables etc close to them Doing so can cause a burn and damage to the parts 1 Servo on In the JOG operation and positioning operation among the test operations the SON digital input signal of the servo amplifier is turned ON automatically in the servo amplifier to start operation independently of whether the SON signal is ON or OFF The servo amplifier does not accept any external command pulses and input signals expect the emergency stop until the test operation screen is closed SON turns ON automatically by touching the Forward or Reverse key on the JOG operation screen or positioning operation screen 26 25 26 25 26 OPERATIONS OF SERVO AMPLIFIER MONITOR SCREENS MELSEC GOT 2 Stop To make an emergency stop turn OFF the emergency stop signal of the servo amplifier or switch off the input a The operation for stopping the test operation on the servo amplifier monitor Screen is as described below e JOG operation Release the Forward or Reverse key e Positioning operation Touch the Pause key b The servo motor stops if any of the following states occurs during test operation e The communication cable is disconnected e The servo amplifier monitor screen is switched to that of the other servo amplifier or the servo amplifier monitor function is terminated However during motorless operation the test mode is n
360. t 2 For file register input unit 1K point i Set the top device number M L S setting used in the latch relay ste gt Top number of L gt T ber of S gt 2 other than AnA AnUCPU m y step p er o op number o Set the top device number Top number of L gt GO Top number of S GO M L S settin l 9 used in the latch relay step AnA AnUCPU onl y relay internal relay R Top number of M Set the top device used in the low speed high Top number of timer gt speed retentive timers Timer setting other than AnACPU Set the number of timers used the top device number that stores the No of timers GO Top device for storage of setting values setting value after T256 L and the top device used in the low speed high speed retentive timers Timer setting AnACPU GO gt Top number of timer GO gt 2 Set the number of A counters used and the to r Counter setting p of counters Top device for storage device number that stores AnACPU onl of setting values y the setting value after 1 C255 Set the range of the device Top number of latch ASS for latch setting Setting of latch range bena number of latch gt GO Set the value of the
361. t Y0000 X0000 c SET s20 X0000 c SE S21 bo When ladder monitoring with GOT STL so H lt Y00005 X0000 c S sers2o H X0000 LJ gt gt gt SET 821 H d When searching for STL instruction search for S state in the device search 2 When making connection with the motion controller CPU a When the OS version is SV5 in the SVST instruction J appears as the tag name of MC 6 OPERATING THE VARIOUS LADDER MONITOR SCREENS MELSEC GOT 6 3 3 Switching the display form decimal hexadecimal and turning the comment display on off You can switch the display form decimal hexadecimal of the word device value or the timer counter value that is displayed on the ladder monitor screen You can also specify whether or not to display a comment for the object device 1 Switching the display form decimal hexadecimal When monitoring display the word device current value the timer counter current value upper row or the set value lower row in decimal or hexadecimal When decimal is displayed the display changes to hexadecimal 2 Switching the comment display on and off Display the comment that is written in the object PLC CPU When no comment is displayed this turns on the comment display Comment display priority order expanded comment gt Japanese character comment or Japanese kana comment The display change operation is explained below Operation procedure When t
362. t Time 2 B o 8765432167654321 0110110110110110 100 1 Averaging 1 Time Average 180 0 Sampling 0 Count Average 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 W CHi disconn Mi CHS disconn W CH disconn gg CH6 disconn BT Error Temp Sensor Type 0 W CH3 disconn MW CH disconn WError Code 012345 0 Neu JIS DIN 1 01d JIS R CH4 disconn R CH8 disconn Displays format of module being monitored Displays buffer memory data of object module in its current form or in a graph Display status of I O signal with the PLC CPU When testing tests after moving the cursor to the display position of the target data The keys used for the operation with the monitor screen shown in 2 are displayed Touch input 2 Key functions The chart below shows the functions of the keys that are used with the System monitor screen operation Key Function END Monitoring ends and display returns to the screen where the special module monitor function was begun MONIT MENU Ends current monitoring and moves to screen that shows monitor menu Operation can be used only if the special function module has a Monitor menu Data Chg Starts change of current values for buffer memory of special function module displayed on screen SET RESET Starts test set reset for I O signal between PLC CPU and special function module 12 6 12 6 12 OPERATION OF EACH SPECIAL MODULE MONITOR SCREEN MEL
363. t ini files in the corresponding folders always install or download the GT Designer OS specify the PC card as the download destination to create the memory card If Explorer or like in the personal computer is used to copy the OS the GOT cannot recognize the data in the memory card b Do not edit the screen data in the memory card directly using GT Designer Edit the screen data uploaded by connecting the personal computer and GOT by an RS 232C cable c When copying the file alarm history data recipe data in the memory card to the personal computer or deleting it load the memory card into the personal computer and then copy or delete the data using Explorer of the personal computer When copying the screen data use the data for backup purpose only When editing use the method in above b d The SRAM type memory card can be formatted on the GOT Check the memory card with the self diagnostics of the utility function When the memory card is checked the memory card is formatted after the check The compact flash PC card cannot be formatted on the GOT Use the personal computer to format it For the way to format the memory card refer to the GT Works Version 5 GT Designer Version 5 Reference Manual POINTS You cannot use this function to install the OS from memory card to internal memory For details of OS installation refer to the Help function of GT Designer 4 OPERATING THE UTILITY FUNCTION MELSEC GOT 4 5
364. t required from the next time onward 6 OPERATING THE VARIOUS LADDER MONITOR SCREENS MELSEC GOT 6 2 2 Ladder read operation This section describes the object sequence program of the ladder monitor that is read from the PLC CPU for the operation displayed on the ladder monitor screen Operation procedure To 7 25 When there is a at the upper left of the screen touch it to return Ext PccRo Mon Menu to the original screen Print Screen MENU Touch When the screen below is currently displayed it is not necessary to touch this Dev Sea Step Sea 16 32Bit Cont Sea End Sea 10 16Dec Hex Exit PLCRD Mon Menu Print Coil Sea Fact Sea Test Cmnt When specifying and reading the device contact point or coil used in the program 4 i Touch any of these Dev Sea Cont Sea CoilSea When entering device name When entering device No DEVICE D DEVICE D TSI aC EL ama la Ej LY LA acipg ell 7 i m gt Ju x F Z G 4 Select input area Alphanumeric Enter device name and device No 1 1
365. tas snnt 26 14 26 6 5 Unit composition list display screen a e Lagal arg aaa aeaa nennen nente aaas as 26 15 26 7 Parameter Settings iia tii 26 16 26 7 1 Password entry operation procedure sse eene ene tenerent nenne 26 17 26 7 2 Parameter setting screen a 26 18 26 7 3 Daramieter set rng operatloh oe Re e er e e E wane TCU d 26 20 26 6 Test Operations Aaaa p o a d e i o n A RET f EC eel Re e E E t Fees 26 22 26 8 1 Precautions for test operations esses eee eise aaa 26 25 26 8 2 Preparations for test operations e a E E A 26 26 26 8 3 JOG operation Screen seene 26 27 26 8 4 Positioning operation Screen sese eee eee eee eee 26 28 26 8 5 Motorless operation screen sssssssseeseseeene nene nente nenne nenen 26 29 26 8 6 DO forced output SCEE N 1 2 2 ek edd Tec edid d o da ded eel dd di d ve coded 26 30 26 9 About Hardcopy OUEDUL odo ceret e ere ite e sica gu bao pata to dea 26 31 About Manuals The following manuals related to this product are available Obtain the manuals as required the according to this table e Related manual Manual number Model code GT Works Version 5 GT Designer Version 5 Operating Manual Start up Manual Describes how to install GT Works Version 5 GT Designer Version 5 into a personal computer and IB 0800143 how to browse the online manuals 13JU06 Found in the packing of the GT Works Versio
366. ter was changed l Read the ladder monitor on the PLC again if C The capacity of the file R register was set Read the ladder monitor again required The PLC program was edited Read e Set the PLC number and change the station for 2 Edit the PLC program the ladder monitor again access Reduce the program capacity by K steps for setting The keyword is not input e The GO key was pressed without input of Set the PLC No the keyword on the keyword input screen 21 3 21 3 21 ERROR DISPLAY AND CORRECTIVE ACTIONS FOR LIST EDIT MELSEC GOT 21 2 Error of PLC CPU When the error step read in other mode is performed the error message and the error step of the current error in the ACPU are displayed Error messages error details and corrective actions are displayed below If an error message appears take the following actions to resume operation 1 Check the error message 2 If the error code is not displayed check the error code of special register D9008 with the system monitor function Refer to Chapter 8 3 Remove the cause of the error Display Example of display for an error in the CPU other than AnA and AnU Mode is displayed other mode 0 ERR STEP 25 Error step number is displayed SP UNIT DOWN step number of D9010 ERR CODE 41 Error message is displayed Error code is displayed error code of D9008 Example of display for an error in the AnA or ANUCPU
367. the information of only the selected parameter is displayed at the bottom of the Screen 2 About the key functions The following table indicates the functions of the keys used for the operations of the parameter setting screen Selects the servo parameter setting item Scrolls the parameter items in units of one screen Changes the servo parameter setting read to the GOT internal memory E Write Writes the servo parameter setting of the selected item to the servo amplifier verity Verifies all parameter values currently displayed on the GOT and the parameter values of the servo amplifier irite aui Writes all parameter values currently displayed on the GOT to the parameters of the servo amplifier Read All Reads all parameter values from the servo amplifier to the GOT and displays them there ire defauit Returns all parameter values to the initial values 26 18 26 18 26 OPERATIONS OF SERVO AMPLIFIER MONITOR SCREENS MELSEC GOT Param 1 U Every time touched changes the parameter display between the drive unit DRU and interface E AS 1 Selects the slot number of the drive unit DRU e 1 P 4 Displays the specified parameter number on the parameter list screen Displayed only when the A95 GOT A956WGOT is used Confirms the settings and returns to the function selection menu screen 99 ferminates the servo amplifier monitor functions 1 Displayed only when the MR J2M A series is connecte
368. the keys used for the operations of the positioning operation screen Runs the servo motor in the forward rotation CCW direction Runs the servo motor in the reverse rotation CW direction cc dec time time Changes the acceleration deceleration time constant o 3 26 28 26 28 26 OPERATIONS OF SERVO AMPLIFIER MONITOR SCREENS MELSEC GOT 26 8 5 Motorless operation screen This section describes the display data of the motorless operation screen and the key functions displayed on the screen 1 About the display data MR J2S A 9600 bps Servo amp Monitor ost Menu Ena Select Start to enter Operation without Motor Cycle amplifier power to restore Normal Mode 2 Operation Operation start Touch the key Operation stop Power off the servo amplifier to cancel the motorless operation 3 About the key functions The following table indicates the functions of the keys used for the operations of the motorless operation screen Key Function Starts motorless operation 06 Changes to the JOG operation screen refer to Section 26 8 3 Changes to the positioning operation screen refer to Section 26 8 4 6 DD EOR ERIE Changes to the DO forced output screen refer to Section 26 8 6 i Confirms the settings and returns to the function selection menu screen d Terminates the servo amplifier monitor functions 26 29 26 29 26 OPERATIO
369. the system monitor can be operated through the GOT When installation is finished Completed is displayed on the installation dialog box Drawing software operation is finished Proceed to Section 8 2 to operate the screen monitor End 8 OPERATION PROCEDURES FOR THE SYSTEM MONITOR FUNCTI 8 2 Operation procedures from user created monitor screen display to start of system monitoring MELSEC GOT This section explains the operation procedure for the GOT when starting each operation of the system monitor function after the system program OS of the system monitor function has been installed in the GOT built in memory y Start up the GOT Display the user created monitor screen Start the system monitor function j 1 y Display the system monitor initial scren Operation for each window is described The A95 GOT displays 1 window DEV MON BAT MON TC MON DEV MON BAT MON The A985 97 960GOT displays 4 divided windows TONON When END is selected in any window the system BM MON BM MON END END DEV MON BAT MON TC MON DEV MON BAT MON TC MON BM MON BM MON END END i v DEV MON BATMON TC MON ToSec 9 2 T
370. tion dialog box With the GT Designer transmit the Transmit the data using the download dialog box special module monitor data from the personal computer to the GOT and install it in the built in memory Download When download is finished the special When download is finished Completed is displayed module monitor can be operated through the on the download dialog box GOT GT Designer operation is finished Proceed to Section 12 2 to operate the special module monitor 11 1 11 OPERATION PROCEDURES FOR SPECIAL MODULE MONITOR MELSEC GOT 11 2 Operation procedures from user created monitor screen display to start of special module monitor 11 2 This section describes the operation procedure for the GOT when starting each operation of the special module monitor function after the system program OS of the 11 special module monitor function has been installed in the GOT built in memory and downloading the special module monitor data Start y Install memory board on the GOT Start up GOT Display the use created monitor screen v Start the special module monitor function uL Display the system configuration screen NET System Configuration NETWK No 0 PLC STATION FF By GNo END MAIN d oure purs n H CPU wol raz sal SP pra2 sa v o Yao ky so vao Kal A inte Jourse Juri 62LS TODA ext1 H
371. tion on the ladder monitor screen shown in b Touch input 2 4 The network No the station No and CPU No are displayed 5 The drive is displayed 6 The file name of the PLC program is displayed 7 The total number of steps in the current monitor PLC program is displayed 1 Depending on the GOT model a display is provided on the MELSEC Q ladder monitor screen as indicated below A985GOT Max 15 lines displayed 1 line Max 11 contacts A956WGOT Max 5 lines displayed 1 line Max 7 contacts 2 When the A985GOT or A956WGOT is used the operation keys appear on the right side of the MELSEC Q ladder monitor screen b Key functions This table shows the key functions used with the operations on the ladder monitor screen Function Exit Return to screen where ladder monitor function starts PLCRD Move to PLC read screen to read sequence program being monitored from AE PLC CPU PLC read Menu Move to ladder monitor menu screen to specify sequence program to be displayed on ladder monitor screen Ladder read Mon Start monitoring of sequence program that is displayed on ladder monitor screen a Switch display device when there are nine or more devices displaying current values and set values 4 a Display one ladder scroll up or down 4 When reading ladder with device specification read next program with same device spec
372. tion selection AGBRD Graph monitor screen 1 Operation Monitor 2 VO Monitor Menu 3 Graph Monitor v m selection gt Sample display 2 for I O module Monitor screen X MODULE x x G gt Jar SRERSERESEREEREE 1 Menu screen The menu is displayed classified into monitor items for the special function module only The object monitor screen is displayed by selecting the item from the menu 2 Monitor screen With the special function module the buffer memory contents and the status of the PLC CPU I O signals are monitored using text numbers and graphs With the I O module the status of I O signals to and from an external module is monitored EMEN MELSEC GOT 2 Data can be changed by writing see Section 12 1 5 for details Writing example Monitor screen When changing channel that can be changed AGBRD Graph monitor screen n xz ABCDDEFF n ES ITTED 0000000000000000 Peete ERTUEHIIS Menu selection gt 1 Yeo aBcDDEFF Mapa B 55223 1 The designated values are written into the user specified buffer memory by writing the values from the monitor 2 When changing the buffer memory data input the numeric value
373. to the screen where that special module will be monitored Info mode Shifts to the screen which shows the detail information of the selected module Switches the System Configuration screen to the info mode Refer to Section 12 1 4 Switches the System Configuration screen to the Basic mode Module display position Scrolls the display one base up or down to display the system configuration of the currently undisplayed base immediately before after the currently displayed base This operation cannot be performed when the system has three or more extension bases V Scrolls one base down A Scrolls one base up 12 2 12 2 12 OPERATION OF EACH SPECIAL MODULE MONITOR SCREEN MELSEC GOT 12 1 2 Setting method for remote station monitoring The setting method to perform remote station monitoring during special module monitoring is described below Special Module Monitor 1 Touch SP UNIT to display the system configuration screen When connected to MELSECNET Depending on the connection method the screen first displayed will be different as indicated below Bus connection and CPU direct The base of the connection station connection is displayed host is displayed CC Link via G4 connection displayed MELSECNET II B connection No system configuration display MELSECNET 10 connection CC Link connection No system configuration display Intelligent device
374. tored The station assigned in the Ethernet setting of GT Designer can be monitored 3 3 2 Special function modules to be monitored The modules for which special function monitoring can be done are only those types shown in Section 3 3 3 Monitoring of special function modules other than those can be done with the system monitor function BM Monitor 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC GOT 3 3 3 Required memory spaces for use of special module monitor function The following table indicates memory spaces for special module monitor data The memory spaces required for storing data into the internal memory of the GOT is the same as the memory spaces required for storing data into the hard disk of a personal computer For QCPU A mode QnACPU ACPU For QCPU Q mode Memory space k bytes 4 18 2 313 5 QD75M 473 8 Input module 00 AJ711D1 1D2 R4 A1SJ711D1 ID2 R4 A1S64TCTT RT S1 0 0 Input module Output module 00 1 The AD75M1 M2 M3 can be monitored within the range of the AD75P1 P2 P3 2 The A1SD75M1 M2 M3 can be monitored within the range of the A1SD75P1 P2 P3 8 Downloading either data enables both special function modules to be monitored 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC GOT 3 3 4 Precautions when using the special module monitor function The precautions to follow when using the special module monitor function are discussed below 1 Special function modules that cannot be monitored Modules display
375. tput Monitor Screen Chg MENU tx ts LO HOT Error READY Error Ma Error Reset AGGAQN Graph Monitor Screen Resolution Input E annel annel annel annel annel annel annel annel Resolution Selection WOT Error 12 20 12 20 12 OPERATION OF EACH SPECIAL MODULE MONITOR SCREEN MELSEC GOT 12 14 Ae8RD Module Monitor Screen Image hex 000A to 0011 0012 to 0021 END 0002 to 0009 Temp Value Temp value Time Disabled Enabled 87654321 0000 16 bits 32 bits Count 0110110110110110 SETZ Data MONIT A68RD Operation Monitor Screen RESET Chg MENU 0123 5 1 o123 567 2 3 01234 1 Enabled 0 Disabled 0123 5 0123 567 01234 Conversion 87654321 0110110110110110 0123 0123 567 01234 1 Completed 0 Not Completed 0123 0123 567 01234 Rverage Sample Time Count 876543218 7654921 0110110110110110 0123 0123 567 01234 6 7 1 Averaging 1 Time Average 0 Sampling 0 Count Average 0123 0123 567 01234 0123 5 0123 567 01234 0123 5 0123 567 01234 W CH1 disconn W cH disconn EHDOT Error Temp sensor Type 0 W CH3 disconn W CH disconn Error Code 012345 0 Meu JIS DIN 1 01d JIS CH4 disconn W CH8 disconn LLL E AE 9 m CHS disconn m CHE disconn
376. tware version of the ABGT J61BT13 used is version W or earlier 7 If you modified the set value for T C using the ladder monitor test function you need to repeat the PC readout procedure to enable the display of the modification 8 The target CPUs of the motion monitor function are only the Q172CPU and Q173CPU 9 Cannot be monitored when the Q172CPU or Q173CPU is monitored 2 BEFORE BEGINNING OPERATION MELSEC GOT b Connection with QnACPU or ACPU QCPU A mode Usable A Partly restricted X Unusable QmCPU ACPU QCPU A mode Functions Ref CPU Fus e qoe LES oc Tener MELSEC CC Link Ethernet Bus CPU Computer MELSEC CC Link Ethernet Section Sef died ink NET nnection connection connection died ink NET connection connection beakers ae A connection connection on en GU ore E EA connection connection Utility function Utility function Ch 4 4 Ladder Sequence program monitoring e _ monitor using ladder signals 6 3 1 Decimal and hexadecimal display A Display of word device values Section switching 6 3 8 Device comment display Device Changing of device values Section changing ging 6 3 4 A A ER Section as Print out Printing of ladder 635 Entry Monitoring of current values by Section monitor pre registering monitor devices 9 2 Monitoring of n points of current values subsequent to specified device Monitoring of m points of current T C monitor
377. ures Ladder monitor function 1 3 Network monitor function 1 9 Special module monitor function 1 7 System monitor function 1 5 Utility function esee 1 1 List editor function ss 1 11 Servo amplifier monitor 1 14 Index 1 F nction list iiem 2 4 Functions requiring a memory board 2 1 G Grip SWIC one hene teens 4 11 GOT IP address sees 4 10 GOT PG NO 5 etie eco coe oc e c 4 10 CO 4 10 GOT NET NO inani caeco teo icri 4 10 H Host FF address A a a dT dak 4 9 How to display the utility menu 4 2 Human sensor detection sensitivity 4 9 Human sensor function sss 4 11 Human sensor OFF delay 4 11 L Ladder monitor function 1 3 Ladder read operation 6 6 List editor function sss sese eee eee 1 11 M Memory capacity of OS sese eee eee 2 7 Memory information eese 4 15 Message display sees eee eee eee 4 8 Microcomputer connection protocol 4 8 Microcomputer connection transmission speed 4 8 N Network monitor function 1 9 O Operation for defect search 6 12 Ope
378. using the auto display key window and write it into the buffer memory 8 Special module monitor data can be allocated as user monitor screen data The special module monitor data installed in the computer can be allocated to serve as user monitor screen data To do this the steps below are required 1 Using the Copy function allocate special module monitor data from another project as user monitor screen data 2 Correct the data to match the system used for the BM initial buffer memory number of the Object function which has been set Ld MELSEC GOT 1 1 5 Features of the network monitor function To use the network monitor function you first must install an operating system OS for the network monitor function on your GOT by using GT Designer This enables you to monitor the status of the MELSECNET B MELSECNET Il and MELSECNET 10 networks The following describes the features of the network monitor function 1 Network monitor screens are selectable on the own station monitor screen to monitor the own station and other stations on a network The own station monitor screen enables you to monitor the status of all the network lines connected to the own station A touch of the screen will guide you through various monitor screens to monitor the status of the own station and other stations on a network MELSECNET2 OSta MstSta 32StaMstSta NETWK No 255 E IntPLCNe
379. ut or Output is displayed Refer to Section 12 1 3 for the way to specify the special function module Display the monitor screen for the specified module 2 For information on confirming the displayed contents and subsequent operation please see Sec 13 2 STI la 319 7 Tests cannot be conducted on input or output modules T e E ES MEE 3 Bon vee eel e Z i a ANE EE E ES nee Veh ES 5 E E 31 21 To Sec 13 2 13 1 13 1 13 OPERATING I O MODULE MONITOR SCREENS MELSEC GOT 13 2 Monitor screen configuration and key functions This section describes the configuration of monitor screens displayed by specifying the input module on the system configuration screen and explains the functions of the keys displayed on the screen 1 Display for an input module Sys 4 1 X MODULE Sys END 2 X o X Displays the statuses of input and output o v EH Se MES came S signals after being read out from the corresponding module 03 9 li 9 33 S 33 8 OS executes it automatically 1 3 04 o 14 e 24 6 34 o 3 05 15 25 e 35 o o 07 N 1 gt E Statuses for up to 64 can be displayed 08 9 13 9 13 e 1 M Signal statuses 0A o 1A o 2A e 3A Q S 0B o 1B o 28 3B o ON 0C 1C g 0D e 1D e 2D e 3D O OFF 0E 1E e 2b e 3E e OF e 1F e 2F e 3F o Displays the type of the object module input or output module Displays the name
380. ut Motor Changes to the motorless operation screen refer to Section 26 8 5 DO Forcedoutput Bit Changes to the DO forced output screen refer to Section 26 8 6 Confirms the settings and returns to the function selection menu screen Ea Terminates the servo amplifier monitor functions 26 27 26 27 26 OPERATIONS OF SERVO AMPLIFIER MONITOR SCREENS MELSEC GOT 26 8 4 Positioning operation screen This section describes the display data of the positioning operation screen and the key functions displayed on the screen 1 About the display data MR J2S A 9600 bps Servo amp Monitor ost seno ena Motor speed 200 r min 0 5175 2 Aec dec time 1000 ms 0 20000 3 Move distance 131072 pulse 0 9999999 Nos dem Description o 1 Motor speed Displays the set speed of the servo motor 2 Acc dec time Displays the set acceleration deceleration time constant Displays the set distance 2 Operation Operation start Touch the Forward or Reverse key To resume the operation stopped temporarily retouch the button for forward rotation or the or button for reverse rotation Operation stop Operation stops when the axis has moved the preset distance Alternatively touch the key to stop the operation temporarily After a temporary stop retouch the key to erase the remaining distance 3 About the key functions The following table indicates the functions of
381. w shows the function of keys that are used on the other station monitor screen Function Switches to the other station monitor screen Returns to the own station monitor screen Exits the other station monitor screen and returns to the previous monitor screen where the network monitor function was executed 17 11 17 11 17 USING THE NETWORK MONITOR SCREENS MELSEC GOT 17 3 2 Display contents and keys functions other station communication status monitor This section describes the other station communications status monitor screen and the function of on screen keys 1 Display contents When the A985 97 960GOT is used When the A95 956WGOT is used The display details are the same as the ones on the A985 97 ER 960GOT 3 OK Sl GR ig Elis Elis E FH 19 Bl co Display example 8 OK g b b b H H i OK jos SR ER d SR Es 30 ox Ld R R R R R 3 ok 233 El E EB D EE EE 40 12345678 y OK di ij ij ij ij ij Bj OK Ends El Eas El B E EE i OK dal b b b i OK 150 e ER so i OK Iri Lal ox Ld Res Enea Jok F No Contents of Display 1 Station numbers are shown up to the maximum number of linked stations Any station in an abnormal condition is highlighted on screen Any station specified as a reserved station is t
382. y at the input of the HELP key Key that provides blank space at the command and at between device names Key that moves the cursor on the display gt Wi or determines scroll directions Press this key at the last of a series of key operations to execute the operation Check the details of key operations on the display before pressing this key 2 Mode key ee es Key that selects each mode of the List editor function Switch the upper lower character mode with the SHIFT key Key that selects the help function in the mode supporting the help function Key that inputs K H at the input of command device name and constant input Advice key FROM Only when the valid key of upper lower character needs to be switched switching is allowed with input of the SHIFT and SET keys Command key Key that inputs the command device number and constant Device D to E Only when the valid key of upper lower character needs to be switched switching is No Constant allowed with input of the SHIFT and SET keys Setting key 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC GOT Movement of the cursor key between steps between the menu items and in the input area is explained below 1 Keep pressing the cursor key to repeat the movement toward the specified key direction 2 Movement between steps and between menu items To display the program immediately before after the current step number command Input either or
383. y key Program immediately before the command no change after 0 step 4 Program immediately after the command no change after the last step gt moves to the specified direction upward downward with or y key 3 Movement in the input area To move the cursor between command names between sources and between destinations input either or key 3647 D10009WWg Input area Display example for DWOVP K2147483647 D1000 Wi moves to the specified direction left right with or gt key 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC GOT In this operating manual the List editor function key is represented in the following abbreviation form 1 Expression of Key 1 gt Key 2 Key n means the sequential input from Key 1 to Keyn 2 Expression of Key 1 Key 2 means input of Key 1 and Key 2 at the same time 3 As in key or key keys with dual functions for input of the command or the device constant or control keys that control the List editor function are represented as follows a The mode command or only alphanumeric characters are described Example m RST Or Tol Mov MOV or M b Only commands are shown for explanation of command input Alphanumeric characters are omitted Only alphanumeric characters are s
384. y screen EAS AE Funciondevicedispayseceen o o o Amplifier information display screen O O O ABS data display screen o0 Z 0O o Unit composition list display screen o o O Screen present Screen absent 26 10 26 10 26 OPERATIONS OF SERVO AMPLIFIER MONITOR SCREENS MELSEC GOT 26 6 1 DI DO display screen This section describes the display data of the DI DO display screen and the key functions displayed on the screen 1 About the display data MR J2M P8A 9600 bps Servo amp Monitor 108t menu Ena EN TEP Input Signal Dutput Signal RS CN18 4 CN18 36 CN1B 32 CN5 7 UM CN16 3 CN18 8 CN1A 23 CN18 5 CN1A 37 CN1B 34 CN5 10 EN cN18 6 CN1B 11 CNIA 22 CN18 7 CN1B 4 CN1B 36 CN5 11 CN1A 8 CN1B 28 CN1B 25 CN18 9 CN1B 5 CN1B 37 CN5 12 CN1A 11 CN1B 30 CN1B 24 1 lt guta 10 cN18 7 CN5 13 CN1A 28 CN1B 33 CN1B 23 CN1A 12 CN1B 9 CN5 14 CN1A 30 CN1B 35 CN1B 22 CN18 29 CN1B 1 CN5 15 CNiA 33 HN CN1A 31 CN1B 12 CN5 16 CN1A 35 MERA CN1A 32 CN1B 29 CN5 5 CN5 17 CN1B 3 CN1A 25 CN1R 34 CN1B 31 CN5 6 CN5 18 CN1B 6 CN1A 24 No ltem Description 1 Input Output Signal Indicates the ON lit OFF extinguished of the DI DO signal 2 About the key functions The following table indicates the functions of the keys used for the operations of the DI DO display scre
385. y when the A95 GOT A956WGOT is used 26 5 26 5 26 OPERATIONS OF SERVO AMPLIFIER MONITOR SCREENS MELSEC GOT 26 5 Alarm Function The following alarm definitions are displayed Alarm display Displays the currently occurring alarm Refer to Section 26 5 1 Alarm history Displays the history of alarms that occurred Refer to Section 26 5 2 The following shows the screen transition after selection of on the function selection menu screen Seg Parameters Alaro Diagnostics Function selection menu screen refer to Section 26 2 2 REP Menu alam Alarm display screen AlarmDisp rex ral MRCIES h 9600 bps Serva anp Monitor Lost Time hour enst thes pena Alarm history screen POINT If the alarm display screen data has not been downloaded to the GOT Monitor data not found appears and the subsequent screen is not displayed 26 6 26 6 26 OPERATIONS OF SERVO AMPLIFIER MONITOR SCREENS MELSEC GOT 26 5 1 Alarm display screen This section describes the display data of the alarm display screen and the key functions displayed on the screen 1 About the display data MR J2S A 9600 bps Servo amp Monitor ost Menu Ena 1 Alarm Number RL20 2 gt Alarm Name Encoder error 2 3 Time of Alarm 18 52 08 4 Cause of Alarm 1 Encoder c
386. ymbol is incorrect Perform the correct key operation nana Bar The specified command was not found e Set the correct device symbol The device number exceeds the range e Set the number within the range of CPU device Proceed to the next operation if it does not affect j The identical coil is found in the sequence p Identical coil Param the control program e Correct the program if it affects the control e When the CPU has detected the error stop running of the operation After resetting the e When the program is read it cannot be g p g Command error CPU check the command around the error converted to the proper command Write the correct command For check of the error step refer to 20 3 7 s The command set at the time of read write Command setting error e Set the correct command or insert is not correct e When writing in the Write or the Memory protect Insert Delete mode the memory protect switch in the memory cassette is ON Memory cassette check e Turn OFF the memory protect switch in the memory cassette e Memory assignment set in the parameter Capacity over exceeded the capacity of the memory cassette Write the END command at the last step of the No END command There is no END command MEI Restart the list editor function If communication When the list editor function is started is not made properly check the following PLC communication error proper communication with the PLC is not

Operating Manual (GT Works Version5/GT Designer

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents